IP Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide

IP Messaging Module
Operations and System
Administration Guide
3Com® Convergence Applications Suite
IP Messaging Module Release 7.1
VCX System Release 7.1
NBX System Release 6.0
Part Number 900-0371-01 Rev. AJ
Published October 2007
http://www.3com.com/
3Com Corporation
350 Campus Drive
Marlborough, MA
01752-3064
Copyright © 2000–2007, 3Com Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any
derivative work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from
3Com Corporation.
3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from
time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation to provide notification of such revision
or change.
3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either
implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties, terms, or conditions of
merchantability, satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements
or changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time.
If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a
license agreement included with the product as a separate document, in the hardcopy documentation, or
on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE.TXT or !LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to
locate a copy, please contact 3Com and a copy will be provided to you.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGENDS:
If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein
are provided to you subject to the following:
United States Government Legend: All technical data and computer software is commercial in nature
and developed solely at private expense. Software is delivered as Commercial Computer Software as
defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as
such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com’s standard commercial license for the
Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov
1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June 1987), whichever is applicable. You agree not to remove or deface any
portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in, or delivered to
you in conjunction with guide.
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or
may not be registered in other countries.
3Com, the 3Com logo, NBX, and Call Builder are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation. VCX and
NBX NetSet are trademarks of 3Com Corporation.
Linux is the registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the U.S. and other countries. FLEXlm® is a
registered trademark of Macrovision Corporation. Speechify is a trademark of ScanSoft, Inc. Other
brand and product names may be registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.
CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Conventions 16
Notices 16
Text 16
Figures 16
Related Documentation
Comments 18
1
17
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Overview 19
Platform Architecture 20
Single-Site Systems 20
Multi-Site Systems 21
Regional Offices with Branch Offices 21
Regional Offices with no Branch Offices 22
System Configurations 22
Single Office Configurations 22
500 Users 22
1,500 Users 23
5,000 Users 23
Multi-Site Configurations 23
IP Messaging Configuration Tools 24
2
CALL BUILDER
Call Builder Description
27
System Requirements 28
Installing Cygwin/X 28
Configuring Your PC 29
Installing the Apprentice Font 29
Setting Environment Variables 30
Starting Call Builder 31
Application Utility (AppMon) 31
Voice and Channel Screen 33
Message Window Screen 34
Intelligent Mirroring Status 34
Error Messages 35
Application Utility Menu Options 35
App System Menu 36
Reports Menu 37
Utilities Menu 37
Scripts Menu Options 38
Document Menu Options 39
Network 39
Shell 40
Accessing Voicemail Administration 40
Process Monitor Utility 42
Message Utility 44
Stopping Call Builder 45
3
MAINTENANCE
About VCX Passwords 48
System Startup 48
Determining if IP Messaging is Running 49
IP Messaging Shut Down and Restart 50
Using EMS to Change IP Messaging System Status 52
IP Messaging Backup and Restore 53
Backing Up IP Messaging Data 53
Scheduling Regular IP Messaging Backups 55
Restoring IP Messaging Data 55
Restoring Backup Files from an External Location 57
Managing Archived Messages 58
Data Backup 58
Message Archival 58
Implementing Message Archival 59
Retrieving Archived Messages 60
Enabling Secure Copy and Secure Shell Commands 63
Network Time Protocol (NTP) Configuration 64
Configuration 64
Verification 65
Manual Switchover 65
Example: 66
Verifying Server Synchronization 67
Database 67
File System 68
Managing Log and CDR Files 68
Tomcat and IP Messaging Log File Maintenance 69
CDR File Maintenance 69
CODEC Overview 71
Changing CODECs 72
Converting Prompts and Messages to a Different CODEC
Voice Prompt Overview 74
Adding a Set of Language Prompts 75
Downloading Language Prompts 76
4
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR PROFILE
Configuring the Administrator Profile 79
Creating a New Administrator Profile 79
Setting Permissions 81
Modifying an Administrator Profile 82
Deleting an Administrator Profile 83
5
73
PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Creating a Subscriber Profile 85
92
Modifying a Subscriber Profile 93
Importing Subscriber Information
Exporting Subscriber Information
94
99
Setting
Delivery Options 100
Fax Printing Options 102
Sending Faxes as TIFF Attachments 103
Defining a Fixed Text Message 104
Setting up the Password 104
Provisioning a Subscriber Alias 104
Merging Mailboxes 107
Splitting a Mailbox 108
Sharing a Mailbox 108
Merging Two Mailboxes 108
Aliasing an Extension with a Mailbox 110
Provisioning FMFM 111
Defining a New Procedure 114
Setting Filter Parameters 117
Setting the Notification Schedule 120
Configuring the Filter for the Default Schedule 121
Configuring a Message Notification Filter for a Day of the
Week 122
Configuring a Message Notification Filter for a Specific Date
Changing Profile Settings 124
Configuring Mailbox Options 127
Configuring Personal Address Book Entries 131
Configuring Additional Mailbox Options 132
Identifying a Call Processor for a Subscriber 134
Configuring Delivery Reports and Call Bridging Options 136
Call Monitor 139
Linking a Mailbox to an External Email Account 141
Integrating a Subscriber Mailbox with an E-Mail Application 143
Constructing From: Field Information 144
Deleting a Subscriber Profile 146
PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Accessing the Class of Service Option
147
123
Message Delivery 154
Updating the Subscriber Records 156
Provisioning Permission Levels 158
Provisioning the Notification Feature 159
Provisioning the COS Profile 162
Delivery Reports 167
Provisioning Call Monitor for a Class of Service
Creating a Class of Service 173
6
REPORTS
Accessing the Reports Screen 176
Generating a Report 177
Setting a Schedule 178
All Subscribers 180
NPA Subscribers 181
NPA-NXX Subscribers 182
Subscribers by Company/Division 182
All Classes of Service 183
ID Class of Service 184
Administrators 185
Message Time Stats 185
Port Usage Stats 186
Mailbox Usage Stats 188
Disk Usage by Message Type 188
Idle Mailboxes and Active Mailboxes 189
Call Processing By Mbx 191
Call Processing By Port 192
Initialized Mailboxes 193
Failed Login Attempts 195
System Information 196
7
COMPANY AND DIVISION PROFILES
Overview 198
Creating a Company Profile 198
Renaming a Company Profile 200
Deleting a Company Profile 201
Creating Or Deleting a Range of Mailboxes
201
171
Updating Subscribers 202
Setting Permission Levels 203
Importing a Company Profile 204
Defining E-mail Domains 206
Adding Domains 206
Deleting Domains 207
8
SEND USER GROUPS
Send User Groups Overview 209
Provisioning the SUG Option 211
Adding Companies 211
Adding and Deleting Subscribers
9
212
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
System Configuration Description 216
System Configuration Screen Buttons 217
E-mail Banner 218
Deleting Banner Information 219
Additional Servers 219
Access Number Management 221
Configuring an IP Messaging Voicemail Access Number 222
Configuring Music on Hold 224
Configuring a Hunt Group Announcement 226
Converting a Voice File 226
Configuring an Announcement Number 228
Configuring the Message Archival Access Number 229
Deleting an Access Number 230
Inbound Ports 230
Line Groups 232
MWI Configuration 234
System Status Screen 237
System Alarms 238
10
PAGER TEMPLATES AND TIME ZONES
Pager Templates 239
Time Zones 242
11
AUTO ATTENDANT
Auto Attendant Overview 246
Provisioning the Auto Attendant 248
Creating a New Auto Attendant 248
Assigning Key Button Options 251
Configuring Other Auto Attendant Options 253
Advanced Options 257
Creating Sub-nodes 259
Recording a Voice File 259
Associating a Voice File with an Auto Attendant Function
Scheduling an Auto Attendant 260
Exporting an Auto Attendant 262
Using an Existing Configuration 262
Telephone User Interface 263
TUI Menu System for the Auto Attendant 264
12
DISTRIBUTION LISTS
Distribution List Overview 267
Subscriber Distribution Lists 268
Adding Subscribers 270
Adding Phone Numbers 270
Adding VPIM Destinations 271
Adding Lists 271
Adding E-mail Addresses 272
Editing a Distribution List 272
Address Book 272
Using the Address Book Option 273
Importing Distribution List Entries 275
Adding a Company to a Distribution List 275
Adding a Class of Service to a Distribution List 275
System Distribution List 276
Creating a System Distribution List 276
13
GLOBAL VOICEMAIL INTEGRATION
Description 279
Architecture 280
260
Features 280
Global Name Directory 280
Global Message Sending 281
Global Name Announcements 281
Global Provisioning 282
Installation and Configuration 282
Local Office Administration 283
Adding Local Servers 285
Editing Local Servers 285
Deleting Local Servers 286
Adding a Subscriber to the Global Voicemail Central Server Directory
Enabling Global Voicemail for a Class of Service 287
Enabling Global Voicemail using Web Provisioning 288
Disabling Global Voicemail 289
14
VPIM
VPIM Overview 291
Configuring VPIM Domains and Mailboxes
15
292
ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
Accessing the Web Interface 295
Class of Service 297
Editing an Existing Class of Service 297
Creating a New Class of Service 298
Deleting a Class of Service 299
Company Administration 299
VPIM Administration 300
System Configuration 303
Configuring the Banner and E-Mail Reply Server 303
Configuring the Voicemail Access Number 305
305
Configuring MOH and Announcement Access Numbers
Replacing Forgotten Passwords 308
16
CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Creating Mailboxes
311
306
286
Email Address Field 313
Adding a Range of Mailboxes 313
Deleting Mailboxes 314
Deleting a Range of Mailboxes 314
Editing Mailboxes 316
Viewing Message Information 319
Personal Address Book 319
External Email 321
Distribution Lists 324
Scheduled Greetings 327
Notification 328
Create a Notification Filter 329
Create a Notification Procedure 330
Create a Notification Schedule 334
Alias Configuration 336
Virtual Calling Card 338
Toggle On/Off Preferences 339
Family Mailboxes 340
Delivery Options 342
Integrating a Subscriber Mailbox with an E-Mail Application
17
344
SETTING UP FIND ME FOLLOW ME
Find Me Follow Me Description 347
Configuring FMFM 348
Accessing the Basic FMFM Screen 348
Allowing All Callers to Find a User 349
Allowing Some Callers to Find a User 349
Preventing Callers From Finding a User 350
Entering Destination Phone Numbers 351
18
CALL REPORTING
Call Reports Utility Overview 356
Accessing the Call Reports Utility and Configuring the Server
Data Display Options 360
Display Tab Options 360
Changing Column Selections 361
Navigation Pane Display Options 362
357
Grid Navigation Tab 362
Retrieving CDRs 363
Retrieve IP Messaging CDRs Manually 363
Retrieve IP Messaging CDRs Automatically 364
Purging CDRs 365
IP Messaging CDR Field Descriptions 366
Creating Custom Reports 369
Report Grids 370
Customized Grids 370
Locking /Unlocking Columns 371
Filtering Columns 371
Sorting Columns 371
Status Bar 371
19
CONFIGURING TEXT-TO-SPEECH
Text-To-Speech Overview 374
Installation Requirements 375
Installation Overview 376
Installing the Engine 376
Installing a Voice 376
TTS Adapter Installation 377
Installing the Adapter 377
Configuring the Adapter 377
Starting the Adapter Service 380
License Configuration 381
Automatic License Activation 381
Manual License Activation 381
Starting the Licensing Service 383
Automatic Start-up 383
Manual Start-up 383
Uninstalling the E-Mail Reader TTS Adapter
Adding TTS
with the VCX Reconfiguration Script 384
A
CONFIGURING A PRINTER
Printer Configuration Overview
Adding a Printer 386
385
384
INDEX
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide describes how to set up, maintain, and provision the IP
Messaging Module of the 3Com® Convergence Applications Suite.
This guide is for network operations, internal support, and Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP) systems planning personnel. Users of this
document should have a thorough knowledge of telecommunications, IP
telephony technology, and networks.
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Release Notes are issued with some products. If the information in the
release notes differs from the information in this guide, follow the
instructions in the release notes.
16
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Conventions
This section describes notice, text, and figure conventions.
Notices
Table 1 lists notice icons.
Table 1 Notice Icon Descriptions
Icon
Text
Notice Type
Description
Information note
Information that describes important features or
instructions
Caution
Information that alerts you to potential loss of
data or potential damage to an application,
system, or device
Warning
Information that alerts you to potential personal
injury
Table 2 lists text conventions.
Table 2 Text Convention Descriptions
Convention
Description
Screen displays
This typeface represents information as it appears on the
screen.
Commands
The word “command” means that you must enter the
command exactly as shown and then press Return or
Enter. Commands appear in bold. Example:
To remove the IP address, enter the following
command:
SETDefault !0 -IP NETaddr = 0.0.0.0
Words in italics
Italics are used to:
■
Emphasize a point.
■
Denote a new term at the place where it is defined in
the text.
■
Identify menu names, menu commands, and software
button names. Examples:
From the Help menu, select Contents.
Click OK.
Figures
This guide provides figures and screen captures that contain sample data.
This data may vary from the data on an installed system.
Related Documentation
Related
Documentation
17
These 3Com documents contain additional information about the
products in this release that are a part of or support the 3Com
Convergence Applications Suite.
The following documents are a part of the IP Messaging Module:
■
IP Messaging Module Quick Reference Guide - 3Com Native Interface
■
IP Messaging Module User Guide - 3Com Native Interface
■
IP Messaging Module Quick Reference Guide - Traditional Interface
■
IP Messaging Module User Guide - Traditional Interface
■
IP Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide
■
IP Messaging Module Installation Guide for NBX
■
E-Mail Reader Application Quick Start Guide
The following documents are a part of the IP Conferencing Module:
■
IP Conferencing Module Installation Guide
■
IP Conferencing Module User Guide
■
IP Conferencing Module Administration Guide
■
Convergence Center Client User and Administration Guide
The following documents provide information on products that support
this release:
Enterprise Management Suite
■
Enterprise Management Suite Getting Started Guide, Version 2.3
■
Enterprise Management Suite User Guide, Version 2.3
■
Enterprise Management Suite 2.3 for VCX 7.1 User Guide
Digital Gateways
■
V7122 and V6100 Digital User Guide, Version 4.8
■
V6100 Digital Fast Track Installation Guide, Version 4.8
■
V7122 Digital Fast Track Installation Guide, Version 4.8
Analog Gateways
■
V7111 Analog Fast Track Installation Guide, Version 4.8
18
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
Comments
■
V7111 Analog User Guide, Version 4.8
■
V6000 Analog Fast Track Installation Guide, Version 4.8
■
V6000 Analog User Guide, Version 4.8
Send e-mail comments about this guide or about any Voice product
documentation to:
Voice_Techcomm_comments@3com.com
Include the following information with your comments:
■
Document title
■
Document part number (found on the front page)
■
Page number
■
Your name and organization (optional)
Example:
IP Messaging Module Operations and System Administration Guide
System Release 7.1
Part Number 900-0371-01 Rev. AJ
Page 25
Please address all questions regarding 3Com software to your authorized
3Com representative.
1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Overview
■
Platform Architecture
■
IP Messaging Configuration Tools
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Overview
The IP Messaging (IPM) Module is part of the 3Com® Convergence
Applications Suite. IP Messaging centralizes and integrates voice mail,
e-mail, and fax mail so users can combine communications modes and
take advantage of powerful message handling and distribution features.
The IP Messaging Module provides services that enable users to contact
each other and access information in a customized way. This product is
used primarily for:
■
Voice mail
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
■
Unified messaging (the integration of voice, facsimile, and e-mail into
a single inbox for message retrieval and management)
■
User interactive applications in IP networks
■
The delivery of value-added targeted services that are standalone or
integrated features
IP Messaging enables users to see their voice and fax mail as e-mail and
hear e-mail messages over the phone. They can control call paths with
Find Me Follow Me capabilities. This sends all calls or special calls to their
choice of phones and determines response times and messaging media
20
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
that meet changing needs. Users can also schedule message delivery and
send voice mails to an individual or group of fellow users, which is aided
by extensive, easily maintained distribution list capabilities.
IP Messaging uses the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) standard for
signaling. The IP Messaging architecture enables service providers to
deploy applications in basic, small-scale systems or in complex, fully
redundant, large-scale distributed or centralized systems. IP Messaging
communicates with external IP network resources by using a SIP gateway
or directly connected SIP endpoints.
Platform
Architecture
The 3Com Convergence Applications Suite is a system of components
that work together to provide services. These components can be
combined in various ways that depend on application requirements,
hardware configuration, and customer preferences. All components,
including IP Messaging, are installed on single or multiple servers. IBM
X306 or IBM X346 servers are the standard platforms that run the VCX
Linux operating system.
Multi-site, client-server, and redundant server configurations are
supported only on VCX systems.
VCX systems can be categorized by the number of sites a system
supports. Single-site and multi-site configurations are described below.
Single-Site Systems
In a VCX single-site system, software is installed on a single pair of
redundant servers or on four servers (5000 user configuration).
For IP Messaging, the primary and secondary servers in a single-site
system mirror each other. This enables the duplication of application data
on two independently running servers. The mirrored application data
consists of table data and message component files.
There are three configuration options:
■
IP Telephony and Messaging Configuration – Install all VCX
components (including IP Messaging) on a pair of redundant servers.
The primary server is active and the secondary server acts as a standby.
If the primary server fails, the secondary server assumes call processing
and messaging functions.
■
IP Messaging Configuration -Install the IP Telephony VCX call
processor software on one pair of redundant servers. Install IP
Platform Architecture
21
Messaging software on a second pair of redundant servers. The
primary server in each pair is active and the secondary server in each
pair is in standby mode.
■
Multi-Site Systems
Client-Server Configuration – For large numbers of telephone
users, add up to 20 IP Messaging clients to an IP Messaging
configuration to provide server load-balancing and improve IP
Messaging performance. Up to 20 IP Messaging clients (voiceless) can
be dedicated to non-voice applications such as Web provisioning,
e-mail synchronization, and logging. The remaining clients can be
dedicated to voice functions. IP Messaging Clients should be located
on the same subnet as the Primary IP Messaging server.
In a VCX multi-site system, software is installed on multiple,
geographically dispersed servers. Multi-site configurations usually include
one or more regional offices and each regional office may support one or
more branch offices.
Regional Offices with Branch Offices
■
Local Messaging – In a local messaging configuration, IP Messaging
is installed in the regional office and in each branch office.
At the regional office, IP Messaging is installed on a pair of redundant,
mirrored servers. IP Messaging clients can also be added to a regional
office. See Client-Server Configurations in “Single-Site Systems” for
more information.
At each branch office, IP Messaging is only installed on a single server
as part of an IP Telephony and Messaging configuration. IP Messaging
data is not mirrored because there is only one server.
If global voicemail integration has been enabled during installation,
then one or more additional servers need to be added to an existing
configuration to act as Global Voicemail Central Servers. A Global
Voicemail Central Server carries no voice traffic and coordinates
mailbox creation and updates on regional and branch office systems.
When global voicemail is enabled for two subscribers on different
systems, they can communicate as if they were hosted on the same
system. See “Global Voicemail Integration” for more information.
Global Voicemail Integration should not be confused with Global
Messaging or the Global Directory feature.
22
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
■
Global Messaging – In a global messaging configuration, IP
Messaging is installed in only one regional office but not in branch
offices. All IP Messaging processing is done at the regional office.
At the regional office, IP Messaging is installed on a pair of redundant
servers that can be geographically separated. IP Messaging clients can
also be added to a regional office. See Client-Server Configurations in
“Single-Site Systems” for more information.
At each branch office, IP telephony software is installed on a single
server.
See “System Configurations” for more information on configuration
capacities and requirements. Refer to the VCX Installation Guide and
the VCX Administration Guide for installation instructions and general
information on VCX and IP Messaging hardware and software
requirements.
Regional Offices with no Branch Offices
All regional offices are self-contained but interconnected. Each office runs
two IBM X306 servers using the IP Telephony and Messaging
configuration and supports up to 500 users. One of the offices also has a
Call Records Server that runs on a separate IBM X346 server and provides
billing-related information (call detail reports) to all of the offices.
System
Configurations
IP Messaging can be installed in different system configurations according
to the features required and the number of subscribers that must be
supported. The system configuration determines which server
configuration is required.
Multi-site, client-server, and redundant server configurations are
supported only on VCX systems.
Single Office
Configurations
Three supported configurations are available for a single office and each
supports a different number of users.
500 Users
This configuration provides 33 voice mail ports and is based on two IBM
X306 servers running the IP Telephony and Messaging software
configuration.
The Call Records Service is enabled on the primary server only.
System Configurations
23
1,500 Users
This configuration provides 75 voice mail ports and is based on two IBM
X346 servers running the IP Telephony and Messaging software
configuration.
The Call Records Service is enabled on the primary server only.
5,000 Users
This configuration provides 200 voice mail ports and is based on four
servers:
■
Two IBM X306 servers that run the IP Telephony software
configuration. The Call Records Service is enabled on the primary
server only.
■
Two IBM X346 servers that run the IP Messaging configuration.
Optional – IP Messaging can also be configured as a client-server setup.
One to twenty IBM X306 servers can be configured as IP Messaging
clients. This option provides expanded load capacity. See Client-Server
Configurations in “Single-Site Systems” for more information.
Multi-Site
Configurations
Multi-site configurations can be configured in two ways:
■
Multiple regional offices, all of which are self-contained but
interconnected. Each office runs two IBM X306 servers using the IP
Telephony and Messaging configuration and supports up to 500 users.
One of the offices also has a Call Records Server that runs on a
separate IBM X346 server and provides billing-related information (call
detail reports) to all of the offices.
■
Multiple regional offices, each of which supports several branch
offices. Each branch office supports between 200 and 500 users.
One of the regional offices contains:
■
■
■
Two IBM X346 servers running the Call Server configuration
One or two IBM X346 servers running the IP Messaging
configuration. The number of servers depends on whether the
branch offices are configured to have their own IP Messaging or
obtain that service from the regional office.
One IBM X346 server running the Authentication and Directory
Server configuration.
24
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
■
■
■
One IBM X346 server running the Call Records Server
configuration.
(Optional) – One to twenty IBM X306 servers configured as IP
Messaging clients. See Client-Server Configurations in “Single-Site
Systems” for more information.
(Optional) – One to two IBM X306 servers configured as Global
Voicemail Central Servers. See “Global Voicemail Integration” for
more information.
The other regional office contains:
■
■
■
■
■
IP Messaging
Configuration Tools
Two IBM X346 servers running the Call Records Server
configuration.
One or two IBM X346 servers running the IP Messaging
configuration. The number of servers depends on whether the
branch offices are configured to have their own IP Messaging or
obtain that service from the regional office.
One IBM X346 server running the Authentication and Directory
Server configuration.
(Optional) – One to twenty IBM X306 servers configured as IP
Messaging clients. See Client-Server Configurations in “Single-Site
Systems” for more information.
Each branch office contains a single IBM X306 server that runs either
the IP Telephony and Messaging configuration or the IP Telephony
configuration. The IP Telephony and Messaging configuration enables
each branch office to have its own (local) IP Messaging. The IP
Telephony configuration requires that each branch office obtain IP
Messaging services from the regional office.
Once IP Messaging has been installed, the next step is to create
subscriber accounts and assign telephone extensions to subscribers.
These configuration steps are described in the VCX Administration Guide.
After a subscriber is assigned a telephone extension, you can create a
voicemail box for that extension and configure IP Messaging options.
When an administrator creates a user account and assigns a telephone
extension to that account, the administrator can specify that an IP
Messaging mailbox be automatically created for the user. The mailbox
number will be identical to the user’s telephone extension.
IP Messaging Configuration Tools
25
You have the following IP Messaging configuration options:
■
Use the IP Messaging Application utility (AppMon) through the
Call Builder Graphical User Interface (GUI).
This option requires a Linux, Solaris, or Windows system with an
X-Windows environment. You then use Secure Shell (ssh) to log in
directly to the IP Messaging system and run the Call Builder GUI using
xattach.
■
■
■
See “System Requirements” for system access requirements.
See Chapter 6-8 for detailed configuration information. Each
chapter describes a different configuration task such as creating or
editing a Class of Service, and creating or editing subscriber
profiles and mailboxes.
Use the IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface through a web
browser.
The web interface provides a subset of the configuration and
management features available through the Call Builder GUI.
However, you can enable basic IP Messaging operation through the
web interface by completing the following tasks:
■
■
Identify the voicemail access number and the Music on Hold (MOH)
number. See “System Configuration”.
Create subscriber mailboxes. See “Creating Mailboxes”.
You can use the IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface for many
other tasks, but you must use the Call Builder GUI for other tasks such
as setting up an Auto Attendant.
See “Accessing the Web Provisioning Interface” for information on
accessing and using the web interface.
You can allow subscribers to access the IP Messaging Web Provisioning
interface to modify their profiles and mailbox attributes. Subscribers do
not have access to features that affect the system or other subscribers.
The IP Messaging Application utility is for administrators only and does
not allow subscriber access.
An IP Messaging system can be managed as an SNMP device through the
3Com Enterprise Management System (EMS). As an SNMP device, an IP
Messaging system can send traps for significant system events such as
startup and shutdown. See the Enterprise Management Suite User Guide
for more information.
26
CHAPTER 1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2
CALL BUILDER
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Call Builder Description
■
System Requirements
■
Installing Cygwin/X
■
Starting Call Builder
■
Application Utility (AppMon)
■
Accessing Voicemail Administration
■
Process Monitor Utility
■
Message Utility
■
Stopping Call Builder
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Call Builder
Description
3Com® IP Messaging provides services that enable users to contact each
other and access information in a customized way. IP Messaging is based
on an application creation and runtime environment called Call Builder.
Call Builder supports the development and deployment of voice,
facsimile, and e-mail messaging applications. These applications are
written in a scripting language interpreted by Call Builder through
commands that execute functions. You can develop and debug
applications by using a text-based graphical user interface (GUI) driven by
the Call Builder engine.
Call Builder includes three utilities that are briefly described in this
chapter: the Application utility (AppMon), Process Monitor utility, and the
Message utility.
28
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
System
Requirements
All software (including Call Builder and IP Messaging) is installed on
systems running VCX Linux. Run Call Builder using one of the following
options:
■
Remotely, through a Linux or Solaris system. The system must include
an X-Windows environment. You then use Secure Shell (ssh) to log in
to the IP Messaging system and run Call Builder using xattach.
■
Remotely, through a Windows system. The system must include an
X-Windows environment such as Cygwin/X. You then use Secure Shell
(ssh) to log in to the IP Messaging system and run Call Builder using
mattach or xattach. See “Installing Cygwin/X” for information on
installing and configuring Cygwin/X on a PC.
Call Builder requires the Apprentice font to display properly. This font is
included in the IP Messaging installation (/usr/app/fonts/apprfont.pcf).
The Apprentice font must be installed on the system that will display Call
Builder.
You can also access IP Messaging remotely through the IP Messaging
Web Provisioning interface. This interface provides a subset of the
configuration and management features available through Call Builder.
See Chapter 15 for more information.
Installing Cygwin/X
This section describes how to install and configure one of many possible
X-Windows environments, Cygwin/X, on a Personal Computer (PC)
running a Windows operating system.
Cygwin/X creates an X-Windows environment on a Windows PC. This
allows an application (in this case, 3Com® Corporation’s Call Builder
application running on VCX Linux) to be displayed on the remote PC.
For more information on Cygwin/X, go to the Cygwin/X web site,
http://x.cygwin.com/. This web site includes a link for downloading
Cygwin/X software and also includes a link to the Cygwin/X User’s Guide.
Chapter 2 of the Cygwin/X User’s Guide describes how to install the
software. Cygwin/X files are organized in categories. It is critical that you
install all the required files. Steps 15 and 16 in the guide describe the
Cygwin Select Packages window.
Installing Cygwin/X
29
Follow these steps to select the required files in this window:
1 Scroll down the list of packages and expand the Net Default category.
a Select the inetutils package.
b Select the openssh package.
2 Scroll down and expand the X11 Default category.
3 Scroll down and select the X-startup-scripts package.
4 Scroll down and select the X-start-menu-icons package.
5 Within the X11 Default category, select the xorg-x11-base package.
6 Click Next to install the selected packages on your PC.
7 Continue with the installation as described in Chapter 2 of the Cygwin/X
User’s Guide.
8 See “Configuring Your PC” to complete the X-Windows configuration.
Configuring Your PC
Once Cygwin/X is installed, you need to edit a batch file and install a
required font on your PC.
To edit the batch file:
1 Open the following batch file in a text editor (for example, Notepad):
C:/cygwin/usr/X11R6/bin/startxwin.bat
2 Enter the following command at the end of the file:
run xhost +
3 Save the file and exit the editor.
You start Cygwin/X by launching the startxwin.bat file. You can either
double-click on the file name or you can create a shortcut icon for the file
on your desktop.
Installing the
Apprentice Font
To install the required font, you must copy a font file on your IP
Messaging system to a Cygwin font directory on your PC. You must use a
secure copy utility for this task; for security reasons, the IP Messaging
does not allow ftp access. You can use the scp utility included with
Cygwin.
To copy the required font file to your PC:
1 On your PC, start Cygwin/X by launching the startxwin.bat file.
30
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
2 The general syntax for the scp command is:
scp root@<source-IP-address>:/path/file.ext /target
To copy the font file from your IP Messaging system, enter the following
command:
$ scp root@<IPM-IP-address>:/usr/app/fonts/apprfont.pcf
/cygwin/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/misc
For <IPM-IP-address>, enter the IP address of your IP Messaging system.
3 At the prompts, enter the root password.
The scp utility copies the file to your PC.
4 Enter the following commands to rehash the fonts database:
$ mkfontdir /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/misc
$ xset fp rehash
You can now start any of the Call Builder application utilities (app, mon,
or msg). See “Starting Call Builder”.
Setting Environment
Variables
To complete Cygwin/X installation, you must add search path elements to
the Windows PATH variable. Set these variables as follows:
1 Right-click on My Computer and select Properties.
2 Click on the Advanced tab and press the Environment Variables
button.
3 Scroll down in the System Variables field and double-click on Path.
The Edit System Variable dialog box is displayed.
4 Enter the following items at the end of the Variable Value field:
c:\cygwin\bin;C:\cygwin\lib;C:\cygwin\etc;C:\cygwin\usr;C:\c
ygwin\var;C:\cygwin\usr\local\bin;C:\cygwin\usr\X11R6\bin;
5 Reboot your system.
Starting Call Builder
Starting Call Builder
31
This section describes how to launch the Call Builder utilities.
To run one of the Call Builder application utilities:
1 Start an X-Windows session by launching the startxwin.bat file.
You can change the font size in the Cygwin/X window by holding down
the Ctrl button, clicking the right mouse button, and selecting a font size
option.
2 Enter the following command to log in to your IP Messaging system as
app:
ssh -Y -l app <IPM-IP-address>
For <IPM-IP-address>, enter the IP address of your IP Messaging system.
The -Y switch enables trusted X11 forwarding. Trusted X11 forwardings
are not subjected to the X11 SECURITY extension controls. The -l switch
specifies the login ID.
3 Enter the password for app at the prompt. The default password is nice.
A message might appear that says
Warning; No xauth data; using fake authentication data for
X11 forwarding.
This warning message can be ignored.
4 Enter one of the following commands to start a Call Builder application
utility (you can run multiple utilities at the same time):
xattach app — starts the Application utility.
xattach mon — starts the Process Monitor utility.
xattach msg — starts the Message utility.
Message utility functionality is duplicated on the main AppMon screen.
To go directly to the IP Messaging utility, type vmlogin at the prompt and
enter the appropriate username and password.
Application Utility
(AppMon)
The Application utility is a runtime environment-monitoring program that
displays multichannel information. Each channel represents an IP
Messaging executable program that is running. The Application utility
displays IP Messaging activities and updates the display for each new
32
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
activity. The Application utility is the launch point for the interface used to
configure and manage IP Messaging.
To run the Application utility:
1 Launch AppMon. See “Starting Call Builder”.
The Application Utility screen displays (Figure 1). All IP Messaging
functions appropriate to the attached process are now available.
The Application Utility screen is divided into several areas: Voice and
Channel screen, Message Window, and Intelligent Mirroring Status. If an
error occurs, it is displayed in red.
Figure 1 Application Utility Screen
To end the attach session, select Close from the Application Utility
pull-down menu (top left corner of screen). You can also press Shift and
F2 or Alt and F4. This disconnects the X-Windows session from the
attachment process. The process continues to run.
Application Utility (AppMon)
33
If you use the Exit System option on the App System menu, calls and
script processes running on that machine terminate. The scripts processes
restart, but calls do not.
Voice and Channel
Screen
The Voice and Channel screen (Figure 2) provides a real-time status of
current voice or local channel activity and shows the number of voice and
local channels installed on the system. You can monitor the status of call
activity when sending and receiving calls on the Voice Processor channels
and when running local background tasks.
Figure 2 Voice and Local Channel Screen
34
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
IP Messaging automatically identifies the number of installed voice and
fax ports and displays them in this window. As you add more voice ports,
the system expands the window to accommodate the new ports. Local
channels appear under the voice channels.
Local channels are for background tasks and are identified with an LC
instead of a channel number. They are highlighted when a local channel
is being used.
Message Window
Screen
The purple window is the Message window. Programmer-defined
messages are written to this message window using the message and
message commands. Figure 3 shows a sample message window.
Figure 3 Message Window Screen
Intelligent Mirroring
Status
This status window is used for primary and secondary server
configurations. The name and operating status of each server is displayed
(Figure 4).
Application Utility (AppMon)
35
Figure 4 Intelligent Mirroring Status
Error Messages
Error messages appear in wide, red windows on the App window. You
can remove these error messages by clicking them with the left mouse
button. Figure 5 shows a sample error message screen.
Figure 5 Error Messages Screen
Application Utility
Menu Options
Figure 6 shows the menu options at the top of the Application utility
window.
Figure 6 Application Utility Menu Bar
Table 3 lists the options on the menu.
Table 3 Options on the Application Utility Menu
Menu Item
Description
App System
Contains system-wide features.
Reports
The Reports section is not enabled on the current version of IP
Messaging.
Utilities
Contains the utilities to maintain system-wide tasks such as table
maintenance, clock display, and counts check.
This menu item also includes the option that launches the IP
Messaging provisioning interface.
Scripts
Displays a drop-down menu used to access scripting options.
36
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
Table 3 Options on the Application Utility Menu (continued)
Menu Item
Description
Documents
Displays the Document menu used to create documents from a
collection of pages, maintaining broadcast fax lists, and initiating
broadcast fax jobs.
This option is not available in this release.
Network
This window monitors inter-system communications between
multiple Call Builder-based systems.
This option is valid only if multiple Call Builder-based systems are
installed.
Shell
A DOS-only menu option that is non-functional in VCX Linux
environments.
Each menu option has a corresponding drop-down menu. To see the
drop-down menu, click the menu option with the left mouse button. To
select an item from the drop-down list, point and click it. To close the
menu, press Cancel.
App System Menu
Figure 7 shows the App System drop-down menu.
Figure 7 App System drop-down menu
Table 4 lists the options on the App system drop-down menu.
Table 4 App System Menu Options
Menu Option
Description
Cancel
Closes the drop-down menu.
Application Utility (AppMon)
37
Table 4 App System Menu Options (continued)
Menu Option
Description
View System
Displays current system information such as version number,
space remaining on the hard drive, and the number of installed
voice and fax ports.
Rec Sys Msg
Records the standard system recordings such as the number,
months, and days of the week.
This works only in an analog development environment and is
not intended for customer use.
System Setup
Displays the system configuration screen used to set the
voice/fax port options.
Exit System
Shuts down the system and terminates Call Builder and all active
calls.
If you use the Exit System option under the App System menu in
the App window, the calls and script processes running on that
machine terminate. The script processes restart, but the calls do
not.
App Config
Lets you edit the Call Builder Configuration file. Call Builder
reads this file when the system starts up. You can set
system-wide configuration options, start developer applications,
and add items to the Utilities menu.
Key Mapping
Allows you to create macros that execute a series of commands
with one keystroke.
Reports Menu
This option is not supported in this release.
Utilities Menu
Figure 8 shows the options on the Utilities drop-down menu. Use the
Utilities Menu option to maintain system-wide tasks.
38
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
Figure 8 Utilities Menu Options
Table 5 lists the options on the Utilities drop-down menu.
Table 5 Utilities Menu Options
Menu Option
Description
Cancel
Closes the drop-down menu.
Table Maint
Accesses the Call Builder database.
Disp Clock
Displays the current date and time.
Monitor Com
Enables you to view data across serial ports. This feature is not
enabled in this release
VM Admin
Enables you to view and provision IP Messaging configuration
parameters. Requires a user name and password for access. See
“Accessing Voicemail Administration”.
Counts Chk
Displays and verifies message counts for system mailboxes.
Speak Util
Places an outbound call to a phone so that the system speaks can
be reviewed or recorded.
Port Util
Displays the port configuration window that enables you to
change inbound port parameters.
Scripts Menu Options
Figure 9 shows the options on the Scripts drop-down menu. Use this
option to develop scripts on the Call Builder window.
Application Utility (AppMon)
39
Figure 9 Scripts Menu Options
Table 6 lists the options on the Scripts drop-down menu.
Table 6 Scripts Menu Options
Option
Description
Cancel
Closes the drop-down menu.
Edit Script
Displays a windows-based list of scripts to edit. To create a new
script, enter a new name.
Spawn Script
Runs a user-developed script on a local channel (runs a script as a
background task).
Run Script
Executes a script on a voice channel instead of a local channel.
Flush Scripts
Clears out cached scripts and speaks.
Import Text
Takes a text file from the /usr/app/app.dir/scripts directory and
creates an executable script from it. Then, the system puts it into
the /usr/app/im/app.dir/message directory with the other
executable scripts.
Document Menu Options
This option is not supported in this release.
Network
Figure 10 shows the Network window that you use to monitor
inter-system communication when multiple Call Builder base systems are
connected to create a large system (larger than 120 ports).
40
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
Figure 10 Network Window
Shell
This option is not supported in this release.
Accessing Voicemail
Administration
To access the IP Messaging provisioning interface:
1 Start the Application utility. See “Application Utility (AppMon)”.
2 From the command line, type vmlogin to directly access Voicemail
Administration. If you already have AppMon open, select VM Admin
from the Utilities pull-down menu.
3 Enter the required username and password.
The Main menu appears, as shown in Figure 11.
The Local Office Admin feature only appears on systems that are
configured as Global Voicemail Central Servers.
Global Voicemail is supported only on VCX systems.
4 To select an option, select it and then press Enter.
Accessing Voicemail Administration
41
Figure 11 Main Menu
Table 7 lists the options on the Main menu.
Table 7 Main Menu Options
Option
Description
Subscriber Profile
Add or modify the parameters for a system subscriber.
Class of Service
Define a set of parameters for a group of subscribers.
Administrator Profile
Add and change system administrator parameters,
including the access permission levels for each
administrator.
Reports
Generate and view call processing and status reports.
Company
Define a group of subscribers who belong to an
organization or company.
Send User Groups
Define a group of subscribers to whom a specific user can
send messages.
System Status
View the number of free megabytes, active calls, media
service units (MSUs), and the number of calls made during
the current hour.
System Configuration
View and edit information for system parameters.
Pager Templates
Define templates and protocols for pagers.
Time Zones
View, add, or modify time zone data for the system.
Auto Attendant
Define the menu structure for the Auto Attendant user
interface and to configure custom Auto Attendants.
42
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
Table 7 Main Menu Options (continued)
Option
Description
Distribution Lists
Create, store, and access lists and view, create, and modify
system lists.
Local Office Admin
Create, edit, and delete regional and branch IP Messaging
systems. This feature only appears on servers configured
as Global Voicemail Central Servers.
(supported on VCX only)
VPIM
Process Monitor
Utility
Set up the Voice Profile for Internet Mail (VPIM). VPIM is
an industry-standard protocol (rfc3801) that allows
subscribers to exchange (send, receive, and forward) voice
messages between different voice mail systems. IP
Messaging supports VPIM, Version 2.
The Process Monitor utility is a runtime environment-monitoring program
that verifies what processes exist for your system. The Process Monitor
utility displays a list of system processes, central processing unit (CPU)
usage, and the size of each process. You can view, stop, and start Call
Builder processes. For example, you can stop and start IP Messaging from
within the Process Monitor.
To run the Process Monitor:
1 Launch the Process Monitor utility. See “Starting Call Builder”.
The Process Monitor screen appears (Figure 12).
Process Monitor Utility
43
Figure 12 Process Monitor Screen
Table 8 lists the columns on the Mon window.
Table 8 Columns on the Process Monitor Screen
Column Name
Description
Program
The name of the process being monitored
Days
The number of days that this program has been running since
the last start
hh:mm:ss
The length of time that this program has been running since the
last start
CPU
The percent of CPU currently being used by the named program
Size
The amount of memory used by the named program
Procs
The number of times that the initialization procedure has been
run: the number of processes currently running
Restarts
The number of times this program was terminated and restarted
since the last reboot.
Table 9 lists the control buttons on the Process Monitor screen.
CAUTION: The system is not being monitored in Edit mode. A process
that terminates does not restart until you return to the Process Monitor.
44
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
.
Table 9 Control Buttons on the Process Monitor Screen
Button Name
Descriptions
Edit
Displays the Edit System Procedures Window.
Caution: Do not use the Edit button without consulting
3Com.
Start
Stops and restarts every process, including IP Messaging.
Stop
Stops all processes, but keeps the Process Monitor running.
SysDown
Stops all Call Builder processes and terminates the Process
Monitor.
To end the attach session, select Close from the Process Monitor
pull-down menu (or press Shift and F2 or Alt and F4). This disconnects
your console or xterm window from the attachment process, but the
process continues to run.
Message Utility
The Message utility is a runtime environment-monitoring program that
monitors the interprocess communicators (IPC) packet activity between
communicating processes. A running log of these messages is found in
/usr/app/gen.app.out.
To run the Message utility:
1 Launch the Message utility. See “Starting Call Builder”.
The Message utility screen appears (Figure 13).
Figure 13 Message Utility Screen
The Message utility’s functionality is duplicated in AppMon.
Stopping Call Builder
45
To end the attach session, select Close from the Process Monitor
pull-down menu (or press Shift and F2 or Alt and F4). This disconnects
your console or xterm window from the attachment process, but the
process continues to run.
Stopping Call
Builder
To stop Call Builder on any machine, attach to the Process Monitor (Mon)
and click Stop.
This stops all processes running on that machine except for the Process
Monitor. The SysDown button stops all processes running on that
machine and then terminates the Process Monitor (Figure 12).
If you use the Exit System option under the App System menu in the App
window, all calls and script processes running on that machine terminate;
the script processes restart, but the calls do not. You should stop Call
Builder only from the Mon process (Process Monitor) to completely stop
the system.
46
CHAPTER 2: CALL BUILDER
3
MAINTENANCE
This chapter covers these topics:
■
About VCX Passwords
■
System Startup
■
IP Messaging Shut Down and Restart
■
Using EMS to Change IP Messaging System Status
■
IP Messaging Backup and Restore
■
Managing Archived Messages
■
Enabling Secure Copy and Secure Shell Commands
■
Network Time Protocol (NTP) Configuration
■
Manual Switchover
■
Verifying Server Synchronization
■
Managing Log and CDR Files
■
CODEC Overview
■
Voice Prompt Overview
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
48
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
About VCX
Passwords
The commands you execute to perform the maintenance tasks described
in this chapter require logging in to a server using the appropriate VCX
system account. The username and default password for each account is
shown in Table 10.
Table 10 VCX System Accounts
Username
Default Password
root
pvadmin
oracle
oracle
tomcat
tomcat
cworks
cworks
vcx
vcx
app
nice
During the VCX installation procedure, the installer has the option to
change the default password for each account. For security reasons,
3Com® strongly recommends that installers change the default
passwords. 3Com also recommends that customers change passwords
regularly. Consult with your installer for the current passwords.
These passwords can be changed after the initial installation by running
the vcx-reconfigure script. See the VCX Maintenance Guide for more
information.
CAUTION: Do not use operating system commands or utilities to change
these passwords. The vcx-reconfigure script changes the password
where necessary in VCX scripts and configurations. Operating system
commands and utilities do not.
System Startup
IP Messaging starts automatically or manually:
■
Automatic startup — IP Messaging is configured to start automatically
when the system on which IP Messaging is installed is booted. This
may be a VCX system that includes other VCX components or it may
be a standalone IP Messaging system used in conjunction with an NBX
call processor.
■
Manual startup — You can manually stop and start the Call Builder
runtime engine, including IP Messaging, through the command line
interface or through the Process Monitor if necessary. However, you
should not use this method as a routine way of starting the system.
System Startup
49
After the Call Builder runtime engine starts, voice messaging, fax services,
and control interfaces are enabled.
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Determining if IP
Messaging is Running
IP Messaging consists of multiple processes, including app, cw_ipums,
and e-mail. You can determine if IP Messaging is currently operational
through the command line, by running the Process Monitor, or by
monitoring the system status in 3Com’s Enterprise Management Suite
(EMS) software.
The following command indicates whether IP Messaging and the Process
Monitor are running (note that you should be logged on as app):
-bash-2.05b# su - app
yak:/usr/app>ps -fu app
Figure 14 shows a possible response to this command.
Figure 14 Process Monitor and IP Messaging Status - Running
In Figure 14, lines 4, 5, and 9 (app, cw_ipums, and e-mail) indicate that IP
Messaging is running. Line 2 (mon) indicates that the Process Monitor is
running.
Figure 15 shows the results of the ps -fu app command and indicates
that IP Messaging and the Process Monitor are not running.
50
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
Figure 15 Process Monitor and IP Messaging Status - Not Running
IP Messaging Shut
Down and Restart
This section describes how to shut down and restart IP Messaging. These
instructions apply to all configurations (standalone, client, and server).
To shut down IP Messaging:
1 Log in to the IP Messaging system as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 You can stop IP Messaging processes using one of the following options:
■
Enter the following command at the system prompt:
stopmon
or
■
Navigate to the scripts directory and run the S60ums script:
/opt/3com/VCX/scripts/rc3.d/
./S60ums stop
Depending on your installation configuration, this directory can
contain scripts you can use to stop, start, and check the status of
other processes (for example, the call processor). Each script,
including IP Messaging, takes the following arguments:
stop — Stops the process.
start — Starts the process.
status — Shows the status of the process.
or
IP Messaging Shut Down and Restart
■
51
Access the Call Builder interface by starting an X-Windows session.
See “System Requirements”.
Click Stop on the Process Monitor screen (Figure 12).
Either option stops all IP Messaging processes, but keeps the
Process Monitor running.
or
■
Access the EMS client. See “Using EMS to Change IP Messaging
System Status”.
If calls are active during shutdown of an IP Messaging server, those calls
are disconnected.
3 To shut down all IP Messaging processes and the Process Monitor, click
SysDown on the Process Monitor screen.
To restart IP Messaging:
1 Log in to the IP Messaging system as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 You can restart IP Messaging processes using one of the following
options:
■
Enter the following command at the system prompt:
startmon start
or
■
Navigate to the scripts directory and run the S60ums script:
/opt/3com/VCX/scripts/rc3.d/
./S60ums start
or
■
If the Process Monitor is running, access the Call Builder interface
by starting an X-Windows session. See “System Requirements”.
Click Start on the Process Monitor screen (Figure 12).
or
■
Access the EMS client. See “Using EMS to Change IP Messaging
System Status”.
52
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
You can also restart IP Messaging processes and the Process Monitor by
rebooting the IP Messaging system.
Using EMS to
Change IP
Messaging System
Status
You can use the EMS application to start and stop an IP Messaging server:
1 Launch the EMS client.
The EMS client software works in conjunction with EMS server software.
You can install the client and server software on the same system or on
different systems.
2 In the EMS client’s Explorer window, select an IP Messaging server from a
system’s equipment tree. Figure 16 shows an example of a Region 1 IP
Messaging server.
Figure 16 IP Messaging Server Shutdown using the EMS Client
3 Right-click on the name of the IP Messaging server that you want to start
or stop.
4 Select Maintenance from the right-click menu and start or stop the
server by selecting Graceful Restart or Graceful Shutdown.
IP Messaging Backup and Restore
53
For more information on using the EMS application, refer to the
Enterprise Management Suite User Guide and the Enterprise
Management Suite Getting Started Guide.
IP Messaging
Backup and Restore
This section describes how to back up and restore IP Messaging data.
Data backup and message archival are two distinct operations.
■
An IP Messaging backup is a snapshot of the current state of an IP
Messaging system and includes subscriber profiles, subscriber
messages, and other system configuration data.
■
IP Messaging message archival copies all messages (and only
messages) to an external archival server for long-term storage.
For more information on managing archived messages, see “Managing
Archived Messages”.
Backing Up IP
Messaging Data
This procedure describes how to back up provisioned IP Messaging data
such as configured subscriber profiles and system access numbers. User
mailbox data (voice mail, fax, and e-mail messages) is also backed up.
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
The backup script requires that IP Messaging be in an idle state and not
taking calls before the backup can be executed. There is no command to
put IP Messaging in an idle state. In this context, “idle state” simply
means that you should perform the backup during off-peak hours.
However, do not shut down IP Messaging before the backup.
Redundant servers and Intelligent Mirroring are supported only on VCX
systems. On an NBX system, you only need to back up a single IP
Messaging server.
During installation, the installer configures IP Messaging on a pair of
redundant servers and enables Intelligent Mirroring. One server is
designated the Primary; the second server is designated the Secondary.
One of the two servers is in active mode; the other server is in standby
mode.
Data is mirrored in real time along with background processes that
provide various services in real time. If the active server fails, the
background processes on the Standby server take over and start
providing services.
54
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
When you back up an IP Messaging system, you should back up either
the Primary server or the Secondary server. Then you can restore the
backup to both the Primary and Secondary servers. You can also back up
both the Primary and Secondary servers and restore the individual back
ups to their respective servers, but the first back up and restore method is
recommended.
To backup IP Messaging data, follow these steps:
1 Log in to your IP Messaging server as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 At the prompt, enter the following command:
/usr/app/gen/backupums
This command creates the following tgz files in the directory
/opt/3comdata/umsdata/backup/DATE/, where DATE is the date the
backup script (backupums) is run in the format yyyymmdd.
■
doc.tgz
■
speak.vox.tgz
■
msgm0.tgz
■
msgm1.tgz
■
msgm2.tgz
■
msgm3.tgz
■
msgm4.tgz
■
msgm5.tgz
■
msgm6.tgz
■
msgm7.tgz
■
msgm8.tgz
■
msgm9.tgz
■
pg.tgz
■
table.tgz
■
vmcdr.tgz
■
vmlog.tgz
IP Messaging Backup and Restore
Scheduling Regular IP
Messaging Backups
55
Use the standard Linux cron service to schedule backups of IP Messaging
data.
When IP Messaging is installed and configured, the configuration
procedure asks if daily IP Messaging backups should be enabled. If
enabled, the procedure asks the installer for the IP address of the backup
server.
To schedule a IP Messaging backup, edit the crontab file:
1 Log in to your IP Messaging system as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 Enter the following command to edit the crontab file:
crontab -e
3 Add a line similar to the following:
0 3 * * * /usr/app/gen/backupums >>
/usr/app/backup/backup.log 2>&1
This command runs the backupums command every day at 3:00 a.m.:
■
0 — Specifies minutes.
■
3 — Specifies the hour.
■
* — Specifies the day (* means every day).
■
* — Specifies the month (* means every month).
■
■
* — Specifies the day of the week (* means every day of the
week).
/usr/app/gen/backupums >> /usr/app/backup/backup.log
2>&1 — Specifies the command to run.
Type info crontab at the system prompt for more information on
crontab.
Restoring IP
Messaging Data
You can use this procedure in this section to restore the IP Messaging
data created by the backup script (backupums).
CAUTION: IP Messaging should be shut down before restoring IP
Messaging data. If IP Messaging is active, the script performs a shutdown
before restoring the data.
56
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
Redundant servers and Intelligent Mirroring are supported only on VCX
systems.
During installation, the installer configures IP Messaging on a pair of
redundant servers and enables Intelligent Mirroring. One server is
designated the Primary and the second server is designated the
Secondary. One of the two servers is in active mode and the other server
is in standby mode.
Data is mirrored in real time along with background processes that
provide various services in real time. If the active server fails, the
background processes on the Standby server take over and start
providing services.
When you back up an IP Messaging system, you should back up either
the Primary server or the Secondary server. Restore the back up to the
Primary and Secondary servers. You can also back up both the Primary
and Secondary servers and restore the individual back ups to their
respective servers, but the first back up and restore method is
recommended.
Bring up the Primary server first, followed by the Secondary server.
To restore IP Messaging data, follow these steps:
1 Log in to the IP Messaging server as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 At the prompt, enter the following command:
/usr/app/gen/restoreums DIRECTORY
DIRECTORY specifies the location of the tgz files listed in the previous
section. For example, /opt/3comdata/umsdata/backup/06_16_04 is the
location for 06_16_04 files.
3 To restart IP Messaging, enter the following command:
startmon start
This restarts all the IP Messaging processes.
IP Messaging Backup and Restore
Restoring Backup
Files from an External
Location
57
This procedure describes how to restore IP Messaging files using a secure
copy command. It is good practice to save backup files to a location other
than an IP Messaging server for safekeeping.
The IP addresses and file names used in this procedure are used for
reference purposes.
To retrieve these files and restore a server to normal operation:
1 Log in to the IP Messaging server (either primary or secondary) as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 Shut down IP Messaging services on both the primary and secondary
servers. See “IP Messaging Shut Down and Restart” for more
information.
You will need the login ID and password for the external server. In this
example, the external server has an IP address of 192.168.10.150.
The backup files are on 192.168.10.150 in a directory called
20070628094357, which is located in /opt/vcx/backups/.
3 Log onto the primary IP Messaging server as app and enter this
command:
scp -r root@192.168.10.150:/opt/vcx/backups/20070628094357
/opt/3comdata/umsdata/backup/
The backup directory is copied from the external server to the primary IP
Messaging server and includes all the files in the backup directory.
4 Navigate to the directory where the backup files are located. In this
example, the backup directory name is 20070628094357 and
10.230.63.7 is the address of the secondary IP Messaging server that you
want to copy files to.
5 Enter the following command at the prompt:
scp -r 20070628094357 app@10.230.63.7:/opt/3comdata/umsdata/
The 20070628094357 directory is created on the secondary server and
the backup files are copied into that directory. As each file is transferred,
there are transfer messages that confirm the operation.
6 Restore the backup files to both the primary and secondary servers. See
“Restoring IP Messaging Data”for details on how to restore these files.
7 Switch to root login (root, pvadmin) and reboot the IP Messaging servers.
58
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
Managing Archived
Messages
This section describes how to manage archived messages and describes
the differences between message archival and data backup.
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native Telephone User Interface
(TUI).
Data Backup
An IP Messaging backup creates a file that includes subscriber profiles,
current subscriber messages, and other IP Messaging configuration data.
If an IP Messaging backup operation is run multiple times, the backups
can include duplicate messages.
A backup may not include deleted messages if the messages have already
been purged (see “Message Archival”).
Backup operations are performed to preserve the current state of an IP
Messaging system.
When a backup is restored, all subscriber profiles, their messages, and IP
Messaging configuration data are restored. Subscribers can then access
their restored messages.
Message Archival
An archive is a cumulative backup of all subscriber messages (voice,
e-mail, and fax) only, and is typically written to an external archiving
server for long-term storage.
Messages are archived only once (there is no duplication).
Even though a subscriber can delete messages through the TUI or
through an e-mail client, all messages are archived because IP Messaging
archives messages before they are purged out of the system.
Message archiving is usually enabled when IP Messaging is installed and is
done for regulatory or legal purposes.
When archived messages are restored, they are not restored to subscriber
mailboxes. Only system administrators or subscribers with system
privileges can listen to archived messages.
Managing Archived Messages
59
See “IP Messaging Backup and Restore” for more information on
managing backup and restore operations.
Implementing
Message Archival
IP Messaging message archival is implemented as a standard Linux cron
service.
Message archival must be configured during the installation of IP
Messaging software, because it cannot be enabled later. The installation
procedure prompts the installer for the following information:
■
The IP address of an external archival server
■
The username required for access to the archival server
■
The password associated with the username
■
The directory on the archival server where messages will be archived
The installation procedure uses this information to create a cron job. By
default, this cron job runs a file named ums_arch.pl at 3:00 AM and
12:00 PM (noon). However, you can run the file manually at any time by
following this procedure:
1 Log in to your IP Messaging system as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 Enter the following command:
/usr/app/gen/ums_arch.pl
IP Messaging uses secure ftp (sftp) to transfer the archive tar file to the
external archival server. If the server is not available (for example, because
of network problems), the archive tar files are created in the
/usr/app/archival directory and are transported to the archival server the
next time ums_arch.pl runs.
You can also use Linux crontab commands to change the default cron job
run times:
1 Log in to your IP Messaging system as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
60
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
2 Enter the following command to edit the crontab file:
crontab -e
3 Edit the line (or lines) that specify when ums_arch.pl is run. The format is
similar to the following:
0 3 * * * /usr/app/gen/ums_arch.pl >> <external server>
This command runs the backupums command every day at 3:00 a.m.:
■
0 — Specifies minutes.
■
3 — Specifies the hour.
■
* — Specifies the day (* means every day).
■
* — Specifies the month (* means every month).
■
■
* — Specifies the day of the week (* means every day of the
week).
/usr/app/gen/ums_arch.pl >> <external server>— Specifies
the command to run and the destination of the output.
Type info crontab at the system prompt for more information on
crontab.
Intelligent Mirroring is supported only on VCX systems.
When Intelligent Mirroring is enabled, each IP Messaging server in the
mirrored system archives its own messages independent of the other
server. There is no duplication of archived messages.
Retrieving Archived
Messages
Retrieving archived messages typically copies a subset of messages from
the archival server to the IP Messaging system where they can be
reviewed by an administrator. You can filter the messages to be retrieved
according to sender, receiver, or a date range.
CAUTION: If you want to use an existing IP Messaging system to listen to
archived messages, you must perform an IP Messaging backup before
retrieving the archived messages. After listening to the archived
messages, you must restore the backup to return the IP Messaging
system to where it was before the archived messages were retrieved. See
“IP Messaging Backup and Restore” for more information.
Managing Archived Messages
61
To configure the retrieval of archived messages:
1 Set up mailbox system privileges (SysPv). See Table 13 in “Creating a
Subscriber Profile”. Only subscriber mailboxes with system privileges can
retrieve and listen to archived messages.
2 Configure a mailbox extension that is dialed to listen to archived
messages. See “Configuring the Message Archival Access Number”.
To retrieve and listen to archived messages:
1 Log in to your IP Messaging system as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 Connect to the archival server using the username and password
configured when message archiving was set up during IP Messaging
installation.
3 Copy the tar files from the appropriate archival server directory (also
configured when message archiving was set up) to the /tmp/archival
directory.
The tar filenames contain a date range. If you are interested in messages
between a certain date range, copy those files to IP Messaging system.
4 Enter the following command:
/usr/app/gen/ums_arch_retrv.pl
You can add input filters to the command, such as sender, receiver, or
date range. The ums_arch_retr.pl command will provide help if no
parameters are supplied. The retrieval script asks for the following
information:
ibm-1:/usr/app/gen>ums_arch_retrv.pl
Please Enter the Receiver
Please Enter the Sender
Please Enter the starting date (mm/dd/yyyy)
Please Enter the ending date (mm/dd/yyyy)
The sender is the sender of an archived message and the receiver is the
recipient of an archived message. If these values are specified, then only
matching archived messages are retrieved. The sender/receiver fields are
optional.
The starting and ending date fields are mandatory fields.
62
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
5 Stop and restart IP Messaging. See “IP Messaging Shut Down and
Restart”.
6 Dial the archival number that was set up to listen to archived messages.
All archived messages are played in sequence.
This number must be set up in advance and must also be configured as a
voicemail access number. See “Configuring an IP Messaging Voicemail
Access Number”and “Configuring the Message Archival Access Number”
for more information.
Enabling Secure Copy and Secure Shell Commands
Enabling Secure
Copy and Secure
Shell Commands
63
IP Messaging uses shell scripts to synchronize servers. These scripts use
the Secure Copy (scp) and Secure Shell (ssh) commands. For these
commands to work properly in this environment, you must configure
each IPM server so that the commands do not prompt for a password.
Primary and secondary server configurations are used only on the VCX
system.
Perform these steps on the Primary and Secondary IP Messaging servers:
1 Log in to the IP Messaging system as app.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 To create the private and public keys, enter this command:
ssh-keygen -t dsa
3 When you are prompted for a key location, press Enter to accept the
default.
4 When you are asked for a passphrase, press Enter to leave the
passphrase blank.
Perform these steps to copy the key from one server to another:
1 On the Primary IP Messaging server, copy the public key to the Secondary
IP Messaging server using this command:
cat ~app/.ssh/id_dsa.pub | ssh app@<IP address of Secondary IPM server> "cat - >>
~app/.ssh/authorized_keys"..
2 On the Secondary IP Messaging server, copy the public key to the Primary
IP Messaging server using this command:
cat ~app/.ssh/id_dsa.pub | ssh app@IP address of Primary IPM server>"cat - >>
~app/.ssh/authorized_keys"..
64
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
Network Time
Protocol (NTP)
Configuration
Intelligent Mirroring requires that the clocks on the two systems be
synchronized to within 1 second.
3Com recommends that you use an external NTP server to maintain time
synchronization with Universal Time.
Intelligent Mirroring is supported only on VCX systems.
NTP Server Configuration is configured through NetSet™ for the NBX
system. See the NBX Administrator’s Guide or the NetSet online help for
more information.
Configuration
To configure Network Time Protocol on the two systems:
1 On the Primary IP Messaging server, create the /etc/ntp.conf file.
2 Edit the file and add these lines:
server 127.127.1.1
fudge 127.127.1.1 stratum 8
peer <IP address of Secondary IPM server>
The IP address 127.127.1.1 designates the local oscillator (clock). This
entry is required. If no external NTP server is configured or available, the
two systems use the local oscillator. The fudge command sets the local
oscillator to stratum 8 in order to allow the two systems to use a lower
stratum server (7 or lower) if one is available. By default, the system uses
this drift file: /etc/ntp/drift.
3 On the Secondary IP Messaging server, create the /etc/ntp.conf file.
4 Edit the file and add these lines:
server 127.127.1.1
peer <IP address of Primary IPM server>
5 On the Primary IP Messaging server, su to root and execute these
commands:
/etc/init.d/ntpd stop
/etc/init.d/ntpd start
Manual Switchover
65
6 On the Secondary IP Messaging server, su to root and execute the same
commands:
/etc/init.d/ntpd stop
/etc/init.d/ntpd start
Optionally, you can add any number of additional server entries in the
ntp.conf file.
Verification
To verify that the NTP service is properly configured, run this command:
ntpq -p
Any user can run the ntpq command.
The output from this command shows the state of all of the NTP
servers with which the local system is communicating.
Manual Switchover
You can manually switch either server to the active or standby state,
provided that you have root privileges.
Manual switchover is required only on VCX systems.
1 Log in to the IP Messaging system as app. See “Application Utility
(AppMon)”.
If you are logged in as another user, use the following command to
switch to app:
su - app
2 Launch AppMon with this command:
xattach app
See “Application Utility (AppMon)”.
3 Select Scripts > Spawn Scripts from the AppMon pull-down menu. The
Spawn Scripts dialog box is displayed (Figure 17).
66
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
Figure 17 Spawn Scripts Dialog Box
4 Select one of these two items from the drop-down list to command the
system to switch state:
■
vssu_active
■
vssu_stanby
5 In the Intelligent Mirroring Status window, verify that the state changes
appear immediately.
6 In the Message window, verify that the messages indicate the progress of
the switchover.
Example:
The following message window sequence is typical when you command
the active server to go to standby mode:
../app_ss.c:137 Request to become standby
../app_ss.c:193 Remote end has requested to become active
Shutdown from msg4
This side is standby
VSSI_STNDBY vm_nanch=29028
Verifying Server Synchronization
Verifying Server
Synchronization
67
You can verify that the databases and the file systems on the Primary and
Secondary Servers are synchronized.
Primary and Secondary IP Messaging server configurations are supported
only on VCX systems.
Database
To verify database synchronization, at the command line, enter this
command:
tblcmp
If the databases are synchronized, you see this message:
Tables are identical
If the databases are not synchronized, you see a list of the records that
are different.
The synchronization of the Primary and Secondary servers is a real-time
activity. The tblcmp utility gives accurate results only on an idle system
(one that is not processing telephone calls).
To re-synchronize the databases:
1 On the active server, at the command line enter this command:
xattach app
2 In the screen that appears, click Scripts/Spawn vssu_sync.
3 In the blue Tables window that appears, click the SS button to select all
the tables that are synchronized with Intelligent Mirroring.
4 Page down until you see checked boxes that indicate that the associated
tables are selected for synchronization.
5 Click the UD button to synchronize the selected tables.
The standby server is updated and restarted.
68
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
File System
To verify that the file systems are synchronized, follow the procedures in
this section.
At the command line on both the Primary and Secondary Servers:
1 Enter this command:
diffmsg
If there are many files on the system, the diffmsg utility may take some
time to complete operation.
When the diffmsg utility stops, the system displays these two file counts:
■
Files to copy: — The number of files that exist on the other server
but do not exist on the local server.
■
Files to remove: — The number of files that exist on the local server
but do not exist on the other server.
If the value of files to copy is 0 (zero), then the file system is synchronized
from the perspective of the local server.
2 If the value of files to copy is not 0 (zero), then enter the command:
diff2rcp
This command creates a shell script (/usr/app/app.dir/diffmsg.rcp) that
you can run from the command line to copy the missing files from the
other server.
3 If the value of files to remove is not 0 (zero), then run this command on
the local server:
diffmsg
and run this command on the other server:
diff2rcp
To run the synchronization command line utilities, both servers must have
secure shell information configured (see “Enabling Secure Copy and
Secure Shell Commands”).
Managing Log and
CDR Files
VCX software writes data to various log files and call information to Call
Detail Records (CDRs). IP Messaging software also writes call information
to CDRs. As part of your routine VCX server maintenance schedule, you
should examine the directories containing these files and purge older files
to maintain sufficient disk space.
Managing Log and CDR Files
69
You should monitor the following applications and services:
Tomcat and IP
Messaging Log File
Maintenance
■
Tomcat and IP Messaging log files
■
Accounting service for CDR collection
Files in the tomcat directory (/opt/3com/VCX/tomcat/logs/) you should
monitor include:
■
catalina.out files, for example, catalina.2006-07-10.log
■
localhost_access_log files, for example,
localhost_access_log.2006-08-08.txt
There is currently no mechanism in place to roll over these files or limit file
size. You can either move the older versions of these files to another
server for storage or delete them.
You should closely monitor the following IP Messaging log file:
■
ums_cbipi.log located in the /usr/app/cbipi/ directory
This file grows indefinitely and, if it reaches the operating system limit,
can prevent IP Messaging from taking calls. Growth rate depends on
the call load on the system. Restarting IP Messaging does not reset the
file—you must either move ums_cbipi.log to another server for
storage or delete the file.
■
Additional IP Messaging files you should periodically examine include:
■
/usr/app/gen/app.out
■
/usr/app/gen/eml_client.out
■
/usr/app/gen/cpy4.out
Each of these files resets after a restart of IP Messaging. Consequently,
these files will not grow too large unless the system is extremely busy
or the system runs without a restart for a long period of time
(months).
CDR File Maintenance
Storage of CDRs is not an issue if your VCX system includes a dedicated
server running the Call Records service. In this case, the Call Records
service off loads CDRs from each configured Accounting service. If your
VCX system does not include a Call Records service, CDRs continually
accumulate on each server running the Accounting service.
70
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
If your VCX system does not include a Call Records service, you can
configure the Accounting service to be self-cleaning by editing the
Accounting service configuration file or modifying the appropriate SNMP
MIB variables.
To modify the Accounting service configuration file:
1 Log in to the server running the Accounting service using the root
account.
2 Enter the following command:
cd /opt/3com/VCX/acctxml/conf/
3 Use an editor to open the following file:
acctxmlconfig.xml
4 In the <CONFIGURATION_INFO> section, locate the
<BES_CDRFILE_CONFIG> subsection and find the following variables:
AUTO_CLEAN_IF_NO_LATEST_UPDATE="N"
AUTO_CLEAN_IF_NO_LATEST_UPDATE_INTERVAL="96"
The first variable determines whether or not CDRs are purged if the
Accounting service has not received notification from the Call Records
service within the time period (96 hours) specified by the second variable.
By default, the variable AUTO_CLEAN_IF_NO_LATEST_UPDATE is set to N. If
you have Call Records service configured to collect CDRs from the
Accounting server, do not change this setting. The Call Records service
will purge CDRs from the Accounting server after collecting them.
If you do not have Call Records service, change this setting to
AUTO_CLEAN_IF_NO_LATEST_UPDATE="Y" to enable self-cleaning on the
Accounting service.
The variable AUTO_CLEAN_IF_NO_LATEST_UPDATE_INTERVAL is set to 96
hours (four days) by default. A smaller value initiates the self-cleaning
more often. A larger value allows the CDRs to remain on the Accounting
server longer.
5 Save your changes.
You can also configure the Accounting service to be self-cleaning by
modifying the itbes_xml_cdr.mib variables:
■
itbesCdrAutoCleanIfLatestStale
itbesCdrAutoCleanIfLatestStalePeriod
CODEC Overview
CODEC Overview
71
Before voice traffic can be transmitted over a digital network, the audio
waveform, an analog signal, must be encoded into a digital format. The
digitized audio is packetized and delivered over the network to a
destination. It is then decoded back into a voice waveform. Software
called a CODEC converts the audio information between digital and
analog formats.
Digitized audio formats have different properties. Each format represents
a compromise between bandwidth and audio quality. High quality audio
typically requires more network bandwidth. Compressing the digitized
audio data can conserve bandwidth with little compromise in audio
quality. However, compression requires increased processing overhead
when encoding and decoding the audio information. Too much
processing overhead can introduce delay.
IP Messaging can operate with either the G.711u CODEC or the G.729a
CODEC.
Each CODEC includes a set of language prompts. By default, IP
Messaging operates with the G.711u CODEC and US English language
prompts.
Each set of language prompts is available with the G.711u CODEC or the
G.729a CODEC and is constructed as an RPM Package Manager package.
For example, IP Messaging provides the following two RPMs for UK
English:
■
IPMSG-UK-EN-G711u-SPEAK-1-1.i386.rpm
■
IPMSG-UK-EN-G729a-SPEAK-1-1.i386.rpm
If you want to enable a set of language prompts that are compatible with
the currently operating CODEC, run the add_language utility as described
in “Adding a Set of Language Prompts” (also see the MB Language field
description in Table 13).
IP Messaging supports only one CODEC at a time.
■
If you want your IP Messaging system to operate with a different
CODEC (for example, switch from the default G.711u CODEC to the
G729a CODEC), you must run the change_codec utility as described
in “Changing CODECs”.
72
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
■
Changing CODECs
If you want to convert custom recorded prompts and saved voice mail
from one CODEC to another, you must run the codec_data_convert
utility, as described in “Converting Prompts and Messages to a
Different CODEC”.
When you change the CODEC used on an IP Messaging system, you must
make the change on both the primary IP Messaging server and the
secondary IP Messaging server.
Redundant servers are supported only on VCX systems.
CAUTION: If you configure an existing IP Messaging system to use a
different CODEC, all custom prompts and voice mail messages saved in
the previous CODEC format will be lost. To avoid this loss, run the
codec_data_convert utility before running the change_codec utility. See
“Converting Prompts and Messages to a Different CODEC”.
The following example assumes the IP Messaging system is operating
with the default CODEC (G.711u) and the default set of language
prompts (US English). The steps in the example install the G.729a CODEC
and enable UK English language prompts.
1 Log in as root on the primary IP Messaging server.
2 Enter the following command to switch to the IP Messaging installation
directory:
cd /opt/installtemp
If you have upgraded your IP Messaging system, new files are located in
/opt/installtemp/upgrade_6_0_x_y, where x and y represent the
specific software upgrade.
3 Enter the following command to install the G.729a CODEC:
vcx-install IPMSG-UK-EN-G729a-SPEAK-1-1.i386.rpm
4 Enter the following command to switch to the directory containing the
add_language and change_codec utilities:
cd /usr/app/app.dir
5 Enter the following command to run the add_language utility:
./add_language
6 Enter the appropriate response to the prompt to add UK English language
prompts.
CODEC Overview
73
7 Enter the following command to run the change_codec utility:
./change_codec g729a
8 Stop and restart IP Messaging by entering the following commands:
/opt/3com/VCX/scripts/rc3.d/
./S60ums stop
./S60ums start
9 Log in to the secondary IP Messaging server and repeat steps 2 through
8.
Note that steps 5 and 6 may be optional. If, in the example, you were
changing to the G.729a CODEC with US English language prompts, steps
5 and 6 would be unnecessary because the US English prompts are
already enabled.
Converting Prompts
and Messages to a
Different CODEC
IP Messaging supports only one CODEC at a time and operates with the
G.711a CODEC by default.
If you want to switch to a different CODEC (for example, switch from the
default CODEC to the G729a CODEC), you can run the change_codec
utility. However, if you run the change_codec utility on an IP Messaging
system on which custom prompts have been recorded and voice mail
messages have been saved in the previous CODEC format, those prompts
and messages will be lost. To preserve existing custom prompts and voice
mail messages, run the codec_data_convert utility before running the
change_codec utility.
Redundant servers are supported only on VCX systems.
When you convert custom prompts and voice mail messages to a
different CODEC, you should run the codec_data_convert utility on both
the primary IP Messaging server and the secondary IP Messaging server.
The following example assumes the IP Messaging system is operating
with the default CODEC (G.711u) and the default set of language
prompts (US English). The steps in the example install the G.729a CODEC
and convert any existing custom prompts and voice mail messages to the
G.729a CODEC format.
74
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
IP Messaging must not be actively processing calls while the
codec_data_convert utility is running. The IP Messaging server must be in
an idle state. There is no command to put IP Messaging in an idle state. In
this context, “idle state” simply means that you should perform the codec
conversion during off-peak hours. However, do not shut down IP
Messaging before performing this conversion.
1 Log in as root on the primary IP Messaging server.
2 Enter the following command to switch to the IP Messaging installation
directory:
cd /opt/installtemp
3 Enter the following command to install the G.729a CODEC:
vcx-install UMS-UK-EN-G729a-SPEAK-1-1.i386.rpm
4 Enter the following command to switch to the directory containing the
codec_data_convert utility:
cd /usr/app/app.dir
5 Enter the following command to run the codec_data_convert utility:
./codec_data_convert g711u g729a
If the utility runs successfully, it returns a list of converted files and the
total number of files processed. If the utility fails to run successfully, it
returns an error message and stops further processing.
6 Log in to the secondary IP Messaging server and repeat steps 2 through
5.
Voice Prompt
Overview
This section mentions VCX components as part of a software build, but it
also applies to the NBX system.
VCX is assembled from independent components. For example, IP
Messaging and each set of language-specific voice prompts are
considered separate components.
A VCX assembly, as defined by a VCX Software Bill of Materials (VSBOM)
configuration file, is constructed from a specified version of each
component. Each component is constructed as an RPM Package Manager
package and is installed by the script in a version-specific location.
Voice Prompt Overview
75
IP Messaging voice prompts are available in multiple languages. Each
language and CODEC combination is provided in an RPM file. For
example, IP Messaging provides the following two RPMs for UK English:
■
IPMSG-UK-EN-G711u-SPEAK-1-1.i386.rpm
■
IPMSG-UK-EN-G729a-SPEAK-1-1.i386.rpm
There are two general steps required to assign a voice prompt language
to a mailbox:
1 Run a script to add the prompts to your IP Messaging system. See
“Adding a Set of Language Prompts”.
2 Use the IP Messaging Administrator interface to assign an installed set of
prompts to a IP Messaging mailbox. See “Creating a Subscriber Profile”.
In addition to the languages supported in the current release, 3Com
Corporation may develop voice prompts for other languages and make
these prompts available through a partner site. If other languages
become available, you can download and install the appropriate RPM.
See “Downloading Language Prompts”.
Adding a Set of
Language Prompts
You must add a set of language prompts on both the primary IP
Messaging server and the secondary IP Messaging server.
Redundant servers are supported only on VCX systems.
To add a set of language prompts on the primary IP Messaging server,
follow these steps:
1 Log in as root on the primary IP Messaging server.
2 Enter the following command, substituting the appropriate numbers for x
and y based on the current software version that is running on your
system:
cd /usr/app/app.dir
3 Enter the following command to run the add_language script:
./add_language
76
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
4 Answer the questions to add the prompts that you want.
If the add_language command does not display the language you want
to add, ensure that the RPM for that language is available and has been
installed. Change to the /opt/installtemp directory and check the list
of language RPMs.
■
■
If the RPM for the language you want to add is not listed, see the
next section, “Downloading Language Prompts”.
If the RPM for the language is listed, you must install it. See step 4
in the next section, “Downloading Language Prompts”.
5 Stop and restart IP Messaging by entering the following commands:
/opt/3com/VCX/scripts/rc3.d/
./S60ums stop
./S60ums start
Log in to the secondary IP Messaging server and install the same set of
language prompts by repeating steps 2 through 5.
Downloading
Language Prompts
3Com makes voice mail prompts available in other languages at partner
sites.
If you want to add voice prompts in additional languages, you must
download and install the appropriate RPM file on both the primary IP
Messaging server and the secondary IP Messaging server.
To download a language RPM file from a partner site to a primary IP
Messaging server, follow these steps:
Redundant servers are supported only on VCX systems.
1 Log in as root on the primary IP Messaging server.
2 Access the site hosting the language RPM file.
3 Download the language RPM file and place it in this directory:
/opt/installtemp
Example: The file that contains the UK English prompts and is compatible
with a G711u CODEC is IPMSG-UK-EN-G711u-SPEAK-1-1.i386.rpm. This
file name is used in the remaining steps of this procedure. Select the file
name that applies to the language and CODEC that you want. The
version numbers within the file (-1-1 in this example) will change over
time.
Voice Prompt Overview
77
4 Enter these commands:
cd /opt/installtemp
vcx-install IPMSG-UK-EN-G711u-SPEAK-1-1.i386.rpm
5 Follow the instructions in “Adding a Set of Language Prompts” to install
the prompts.
Log in to the secondary IP Messaging server and download the same set
of language prompts by repeating steps 2 through 5.
78
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
4
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM
ADMINISTRATOR PROFILE
This chapter describes how to create, modify, and delete administrator
profiles. The root administrator is also able to change their own profile
except for the default root username.
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Configuring the
Administrator
Profile
This section describes the Administrator Profile option. Use this option to:
■
create new users with administrator permissions
■
change existing administrator parameters
■
delete existing administrators (root admin only)
The administrator user has management privileges and must be defined
first.
Please note that only root administrators should be allowed to delete
other admin profiles and that this permission must not be set for anyone
other than the root administrator.
Creating a New
Administrator Profile
To create a new profile:
1 Select Administrator Profile from the Main menu.
The Administrator Profile screen appears (Figure 18).
80
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR PROFILE
Figure 18 Administrator Profile Screen
2 Type in a new login ID and press Enter. The following message appears:
Administrator Not Found -- Add? (Y/N)
3 Enter Y. The cursor moves to the Password field and the Perm and Del
buttons appear on the screen.
4 Type in a password for the new administrator and press Enter.
The cursor moves to the next field.
5 Fill in the fields on the screen as necessary. For example, you do not have
to fill in the Phone Number field or the Pager Number field.
6 Press Exit and save your changes by typing Y.
7 Press Exit again to return to the Main menu.
Table 11 lists the fields on the Administrator Profile screen.
Table 11 Fields on the Administrator Profile Screen
Field
Description
Login ID
1 to 15 character alpha-numeric login identifier
Note: The root administrator is not allowed to change the
default value of root for their Login ID. All other fields can be
modified.
Password
1 to 15 character alpha-numeric password
Last Name
The administrator's last name; maximum of 15 letters
First Name
The administrator's first name; maximum of 15 letters
Configuring the Administrator Profile
81
Table 11 Fields on the Administrator Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Phone Number
The administrator's 10-digit telephone number
Pager Number
The administrator's 10-digit pager number
Multi-login
Enables multiple, concurrent login sessions for this
administrator
Inactive
Disables the active account
Password Days
Number of days that a password is valid
Table 12 lists the buttons on the Administrator Profile screen.
Table 12 Buttons on the Administrator Profile Screen
Setting Permissions
Button
Description
Perm
Sets administrator permissions for various system functions.
Del
Deletes an administrator profile.
Setting permissions grants or limits privileges to administrators. You can
set an administrator’s permissions to less than a full set of privileges. To
set permissions for an administrator profile:
1 Select Administrator Profile from the Main menu.
2 Type in the administrator’s login ID. Any fields that were previously set are
filled in.
3 Click Perm (permissions). This button does not appear on the
Administrator Profile screen until you enter a value in the Login ID field
The Administrator Permissions screen appears (Figure 19).
82
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR PROFILE
Figure 19 Administrator Permissions Screen
4 Check the boxes of the functions you want to authorize for an
administrator. For example, you can deny access to the Class of Service
option by leaving the Class of Service box unchecked when you create a
new administrator.
For administrators other than the root administrator, do not enable the
Administrator Profile checkbox. If this checkbox is enabled, then any
administrator is allowed to delete other admin profiles.
5 Press Exit twice and type Y to enable the permissions and save your
changes.
Modifying an
Administrator Profile
To modify an administrator’s profile:
1 Select Administrator Profile from the Main menu.
The Administrator Profile screen appears (Figure 18).
2 Type in the administrator’s login ID and press Enter. The other fields
cannot be changed until the login ID is entered.
The system populates the fields with this administrator’s information and
the Perm and Del buttons appear.
3 You now have the option of changing:
■
fields on the Administrator Profile screen. See steps 5 through 7 of
“Creating a New Administrator Profile”.
Configuring the Administrator Profile
83
The root administrator is not allowed to change the default value of root
for their Login ID. All other fields can be modified such as the default
password of secret.
■
administrator permissions. See “Setting Permissions”.
For administrators other than the root administrator, do not enable the
Administrator Profile checkbox. If this checkbox is enabled, then any
administrator is allowed to delete other admin profiles.
4 Click Exit. The system prompts you to save changes.
5 Enter Y and then press Enter.
6 Select Exit to return to the Main menu.
Deleting an
Administrator Profile
To delete an administrator profile:
1 Select Administrator Profile from the Main menu.
The Administrator Profile screen appears (Figure 18).
Only the administrator logged in as root is allowed to delete admin
profiles.
2 Type in the administrator’s login ID and press Enter.
The system populates the fields with the administrator information and
the Perm and Del buttons appear.
3 Click Del. The system displays the following message:
Delete This Administrator? (Y/N)
4 Enter Y and press Enter. The system deletes the administrator profile.
5 Click Exit to return to the Main menu.
84
CHAPTER 4: CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR PROFILE
5
PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER
PROFILE
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Creating a Subscriber Profile
■
Modifying a Subscriber Profile
■
Setting Delivery Options
■
Setting up the Password
■
Provisioning a Subscriber Alias
■
Provisioning FMFM
■
Changing Profile Settings
■
Integrating a Subscriber Mailbox with an E-Mail Application
■
Deleting a Subscriber Profile
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Creating a
Subscriber Profile
Creating a subscriber profile associates a subscriber mailbox with a set of
attributes. These attributes can be defined in a Class Of Service (COS) or
defined for an individual subscriber. When the same attribute appears in
both subscriber profile and the COS associated with the profile, the value
for the profile attribute is used.
When an administrator creates a user account and assigns a telephone
extension to that account, the administrator can specify that an IP
Messaging mailbox be automatically created for the user. The mailbox
number will be identical to the user’s telephone extension.
If you attempt to create a mailbox for this user and specify the user’s
extension for the mailbox number, IP Messaging responds with the
message “mailbox already exists.” You must coordinate mailbox creation
86
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
with the telephony system administrator. By default, mailboxes that are
automatically created by the administrator are assigned to COS 102. You
can change the subscriber’s assigned COS by editing mailbox settings.
To create a new subscriber profile:
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Main menu.
2 Type a mailbox number in the text box and press Enter. The following
message displays:
Subscriber XYZ Not Found - Add? (Y/N)
To access an existing profile, type in the mailbox number or select it from
the drop-down menu.
3 Type Y and press Enter.
The system prompts you for the Class of Service.
4 Enter a Class of Service identifier.
You can also press F1 to see a drop-down list of existing Classes of
Service. Double-click the desired Class of Service from the COS List
drop-down menu.
5 Select a company or division name from the drop-down menu. The
following message displays:
You’ve Selected: ABC Company (Y/N)
6 Type Y to accept the company/division name.
The Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 20) for the new mailbox appears. If
the account already exists, the information for the account appears
automatically.
To access an existing profile, type in the mailbox number or select it from
the drop-down menu.
Creating a Subscriber Profile
Figure 20 Subscriber Profile Screen
Table 13 lists the fields on the Subscriber Profile screen.
Table 13 Fields on the Subscriber Profile Screen
Field
Description
Mailbox Number
The subscriber’s mailbox number.
First Name
Subscriber’s first name (maximum of 11 alpha-numeric
characters).
Last Name
Subscriber’s last name (maximum of 11 alpha-numeric
characters).
Admin Update
Displays the time and date of the last change made to this
subscriber’s file by a system administrator.
User Last Login
Displays the time and date of the last login to this mailbox.
87
88
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 13 Fields on the Subscriber Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
MB Language
Specifies the language used for mailbox voice prompts for this
subscriber.
The administrator can configure the voice prompt language
for each mailbox. The subscriber cannot change the language
used for his or her mailbox.
The default language is US English. To assign another
language, you must:
1 Install the language. See “Adding a Set of Language
Prompts” for details.
2 In the IP Messaging Provisioning interface:
■
Configure information for the company that employs the
subscribers. See “Creating a Company Profile”.
■
On the Company/Division Profile - Permission screen,
ensure that Soft is enabled for the Language parameter.
See “Setting Permission Levels”.
■
Assign the subscriber to the company using the Company
and Division fields (see below).
Class of Service
The Class of Service identifier. Lists COS 101 - 102 and any
custom Classes of Service that have been defined.
Menu Style
Select a menu style for the Telephone User Interface (TUI)
from the drop-down list. Different styles provide different
menu prompts for users when they use the voice mail system.
The supported styles are cti (the 3Com® native style) and ftl
(the traditional Octel style).
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI. If you
select ftl, do not enable any of the Email, POP3, or IMAP
options on this screen. Also, ignore the LIFO (Rev Order)
options if you select ftl.
Send Msg Order
To define the order of preference for sending a message,
select from the drop-down list of the combinations,
Destination (Dst), Record (Rec) and Options (Opt) for Send.
Note: Send Msg Order is supported only on the 3Com®
Native TUI.
Creating a Subscriber Profile
89
Table 13 Fields on the Subscriber Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Message Arrival
When a subscriber is logged into voice mail and a new
message arrives, there are three notification options that can
be selected from the drop-down list.
FMFM Feature
■
subscriber is notified when he/she returns to the Listen
Menu.
■
subscriber is notified when he/she returns to the Main
menu.
■
subscriber is notified when he/she returns to either the
Main menu or the Listen menu.
■
subscriber is not notified.
Enables Find Me Follow Me (FMFM).
■
Mailbox Only — IP Messaging creates a mailbox for the
subscriber but FMFM is not enabled.
■
FMFM + Mailbox — IP Messaging creates a mailbox for
the subscriber and enables FMFM.
Notes: FMFM is supported only on the 3Com® Native TUI.
Do not use Find Me Follow Me if two-stage dialing is
configured for your gateway. Find Me Follow Me cannot
handle waiting for a dial tone to be asserted and a call will
not connect to the PSTN.
Review Options
When checked, the following options are active during
message review:
Sender: The sender of the message
Time: The time the message was received
Save: For how long the message is saved
Del: Enables or disables the ability to review deleted
messages in the system. When the field is checked, Del is
enabled.
Alias: Enables creation of an alias that allows another device
to point to the original user mailbox.
90
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 13 Fields on the Subscriber Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
MB (Mailbox) Send
Media
Check one or more of the following boxes to enable the
following options during message review for the subscriber
using this profile:
■
Vmail — Enables the subscriber to send voice mail
messages.
■
Phone — Enables CMD (call message delivery).
■
Fax — Enables fax printing.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
■
E-mail — Enables the subscriber to send e-mail messages
through the mailbox using the TUI.
■
POP3 — Enables IP Messaging to act as a POP3 e-mail
server. Once POP3 is enabled, a link for External E-Mail is
added to the IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface and
subscribers can configure their external e-mail accounts.
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com® Native TUI.
MB (Mailbox)
Receive Media
Check one or more of the following boxes to enable the
following options during message review for the subscriber
using this profile:
■
Vmail — Enables the subscriber to receive voice mail
messages.
■
Phone — Enables message reception via personal
greeting.
■
Fax — Enables reception of fax messages.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
■
E-mail — Enables the subscriber to receive e-mail
messages through the mailbox using the TUI.
■
POP3 — Enables message retrieval using a standard POP3
e-mail client such as Outlook Express.
■
IMAP — Enables message retrieval using a standard IMAP
e-mail client such as Outlook.
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com® Native TUI.
Creating a Subscriber Profile
91
Table 13 Fields on the Subscriber Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Options
MWI: Message Waiting Indicator — When checked, this
activates the Message Waiting function and indicator light on
the subscriber's telephone or stutter dial tone.
SysPv: System Privilege — When the System Privileges field is
checked, it allows a subscriber to send system messages. For
example, a message can be sent to every subscriber with a
specific Class of Service (Class Of Service users group). System
messages are not counted in the total number of messages in
a mailbox. Therefore, they will not be purged by default when
a mailbox is full.
Also allows the mailbox to retrieve archived messages. See
“Managing Archived Messages”.
Noti: Notification — Checking this box will enable the
Message Notification features for this mailbox. See
“Provisioning the Notification Feature” for more information.
You can also use Message Notification when you set up Find
Me Follow Me for a subscriber. See “Provisioning FMFM”.
Note: The Message Notification feature will not be available
to this subscriber if this box is not checked.
Urev: Unreviewed Messages — If this box is checked, the
Auto Attendant informs the subscriber of the number of
reviewed and unreviewed messages in the subscriber's
mailbox. If this box is not checked, the Auto Attendant
informs only the total number of messages in the mailbox.
Tutor: Run Tutorial — This field determines if the Tutorial will
run the first time that the subscriber accesses his or her
mailbox. This field will be cleared by default after the Tutorial
is run successfully.
Send User Group
Select the SUG (Send User Group) configuration from the
drop-down list of available SUG. Send User Group refers to
the group of persons, entities, divisions or classes of such to
which this subscriber can send messages.
Company
Select the Company from the drop-down list of Companies,
to which this particular subscriber belongs. The Company
profile displayed on the drop-down list is defined in the
Company Administration Setup. See Chapter 7.
Division
Select the Division of the Company from the drop-down list
of Divisions, to which this particular subscriber belongs. The
Divisions displayed on the drop-down list is defined on the
Company Administration Setup. See Chapter 7.
92
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 13 Fields on the Subscriber Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
LIFO
(Rev order) Sets up the order (Last In First Out) in which
messages are reviewed.
■
Old — If this box is checked, the old messages (saved and
deleted messages in the mailbox) can be reviewed in the
Last In First Out order and if unchecked, FIFO (First In First
Out) order.
■
New — If this box is checked, the new messages (reviewed
and unreviewed messages in the mailbox) can be reviewed
in the Last In First Out order and if unchecked, FIFO (First
In First Out) order.
■
Email — If this box is checked, e-mail messages
downloaded from an external e-mail server (see “Linking a
Mailbox to an External Email Account”) can be reviewed in
the Last In First Out order and if unchecked, FIFO (First In
First Out) order.
Note: LIFO is supported only on the 3Com® Native TUI.
Table 14 lists the functions of the buttons on the Subscriber Profile
screen.
Table 14 Buttons on the Subscriber Profile Screen
Button
Description
Rule
Determines what happens to a caller based on a particular event (such
as a busy signal). See “Provisioning FMFM”.
Delv
Message delivery options for the subscriber profile. See “Setting
Delivery Options”.
Pass
Changes password for a subscriber. See “Setting up the Password”.
Alis
Creates an alias for a subscriber. See “Provisioning a Subscriber Alias”.
Noti
Parameters that define how (schedule type and timeframe) a subscriber
is notified when a message is received in the mailbox. See “Provisioning
FMFM” and “Provisioning the Notification Feature”.
Prof
Summarizes all the parameters and values associated with a subscriber
profile. See “Changing Profile Settings”.
Delt
Deletes a subscriber profile and its parameters. See “Deleting a
Subscriber Profile”.
Exit
Prompts you to save any changes (if any were made) or presents the
Mailbox Entry screen.
Modifying a Subscriber Profile
Modifying a
Subscriber Profile
93
The Subscriber Profile administration screens allow you to modify the
options for an existing subscriber profile.
To access an existing subscriber profile:
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Main menu.
2 Type in a mailbox number or click the drop-down menu to see the list of
existing mailboxes.
The Mailbox Entry screen appears (Figure 21). This screen lists mailbox
numbers.
If you leave the mailbox text entry box empty, you can select one of the
buttons displayed at the bottom of the screen. See Table 15 for a
description of button functions.
3 Specify a mailbox and press Enter.
If the selected mailbox includes submailboxes (as shown in Figure 21), the
submailboxes appear in a separate box. You can select either the main
mailbox or one of its submailboxes. After selecting a mailbox or
submailbox and pressing Enter, the Subscriber Profile screen appears
(Figure 20).
Figure 21 Mailbox Entry Screen
Table 15 lists the functions of the buttons on the Mailbox Entry screen.
94
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 15 Buttons on the Mailbox Entry Screen
Button
Description
Impt
Import one or more subscriber mailboxes from a properly provisioned,
tab-delimited text file with the Import Utility. By default, the file is
stored in /usr/app/app.dir. See “Importing Subscriber Information” for
more information on importing subscriber mailboxes.
Expt
Export the configuration settings of one or more subscriber mailboxes
to a text file. You can use this feature to backup mailbox settings or to
migrate mailboxes to a different system. By default, the exported file is
saved in /usr/app/app.dir. See “Exporting Subscriber Information” for
more information on exporting subscriber mailboxes.
Rang
With the Rang button, you can create a range of new mailboxes or
delete an existing range of mailboxes based on a specific Class of
Service or by selecting a range of numbers.
Select the Class of Service from a drop-down list for this range of
mailbox numbers after selecting the Create or Delete function.
When you select Delete, the system prompts you to delete by Class of
Service or by selecting a range of numbers.
Rnum
Select Rnum to rename the current mailbox number.
UnLg
Select UnLg to log a subscriber off a mailbox. This feature is useful in
an emergency where a subscriber is not able to login to a mailbox for
any reason like the system access to this mailbox is hung up or another
person was logged to this mailbox for a long time and did not log off.
You can look at a subscriber profile for current activity on this mailbox
before logging out or unlogging a mailbox.
Exit
Importing Subscriber
Information
Click Exit to return to the previous menu.
The Import Utility (Impt button) is designed to accept an import file
format that is compatible with a simple Excel spreadsheet that has been
exported as a tab-delimited text file. The spreadsheet is formatted with
column headings in a single row. Importable mailbox data is located in
the rows under the headings.
The column headings are case-insensitive keywords that describe the data
in the fields below. If a field is populated, then the feature corresponding
to the column heading will be provisioned by using the data in the field.
Column headings may be in any order and unsupported column headings
are ignored. The rows above the column heading row may contain titles,
notes or any other extraneous information, but the rows following the
column heading row must only contain import data.
Modifying a Subscriber Profile
95
Several column heading types have optional parameters available that
must appear in the next column to the right under the appropriate
column sub-heading. Some column headings such as Alias can appear
multiple times so that multiple values can be provisioned for the same
mailbox.
The supported column headings are listed in Table 16.
Table 16 Imported File – Supported Headings
Heading Name
Description
Mailbox
Required field. 3 to 15 digit mailbox number to be imported.
Family mailbox sub-mailboxes may be specified using the
main mailbox number followed by an underscore and the 1
to 3 digit sub-mailbox number. (i.e. 7035551212_3).
COS
Optional field. 1 to 4 digit COS to use when creating a
mailbox. If the COS does not exist, then it will be created
using default values which can be changed later and pushed
out to all the mailboxes. If COS is not specified, then new
mailboxes use default COS 102.
Company
Optional field. Name of company used when creating a
mailbox. If not specified, then the Unassigned Company is
used.
Division
Optional field. Name of Division used when creating a
mailbox.
Firstname
Optional field. Alpha-numeric string with length up to 20
characters. Greater than 20 characters is truncated.
Lastname
Optional field. Same requirements as Firstname.
Password
Optional field. Must be all numeric digits of 4 to 15 digits in
length. If not specified, then the password will be the last 4
digits of the mailbox or the mailbox number itself if only 3
digits.
Language
Optional field. 2 character language prefix. If not specified,
then the language defaults to the language specified in the
Company used to create the mailbox.
Operator
Optional field. 0 to 15 digit operator extension number. If
not specified, then the operator extension will default to the
value specified in the Company used to create the mailbox.
96
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 16 Imported File – Supported Headings (continued)
Heading Name
Description
SiteName
Optional field that is only valid for Global Voicemail Central
Servers. Up to an 11 character hostname that specifies the
local office that a mailbox is hosted on. If the sitename refers
to a valid local office, then the mailbox has Global Voicemail
enabled and is automatically created on the specified local
office. If the sitename is not a valid local office, then the
mailbox is created as a local mailbox on the Central Server
and has Global Voicemail disabled.
Alias
Optional field with multiple occurrences allowed. 0 to 44
character alpha-numeric string; greater than 44 characters is
truncated. Aliases must be unique system wide. Non-unique
aliases are ignored.
Pager
Optional field with multiple occurrences allowed. 0 to 44
digit pager number; greater than 44 characters is truncated.
Each occurrence of the pager heading will create a pager
notification procedure with the specified pager number.
Template
Optional sub-heading for the immediately preceding pager
column. 0 to 18 character alpha-numeric string; greater than
18 characters is truncated. If the named template does not
exist, then it is created using the "Default" template. If not
specified, then the pager notification procedure will use the
"Default" template.
SMDIMWI
Optional field with multiple occurrences allowed. 3 to 15
digit phone number which is typically the same as the
mailbox number. This field provisions MWI over an SMDI
serial port link only.
Link
Optional sub-heading for the preceding SMDIMWI column.
Single digit specifying the number of the SMDI link to send
MWI packets to. If not specified, it defaults to link 0.
NBXMWI
Optional field with multiple occurrences allowed. 3 to 17
digit NBX extension number that is typically the same as the
mailbox number. This field will enable MWI and create an
nbxmwi notification procedure. NBXMWI must be enabled
on the system and an NBX server must be defined.
Otherwise, this field will be ignored. Specifying the NBX
extension number as -1 will remove any existing nbxmwi
notification procedures for an update import.
NBXServer
Optional sub-heading for the preceding NBXMWI column.
The named NBX server must already be provisioned on the
system. Otherwise, it will be ignored and the default will be
used. The default is the oldest NBX server provisioned on the
system.
Modifying a Subscriber Profile
97
Table 16 Imported File – Supported Headings (continued)
Heading Name
Description
NBXPass
Optional sub-heading for the preceding NBXMWI column.
This field specifies the password to use when sending MWI
to the NBX server. Normally, password checking for MWI is
disabled on NBX systems, so the default is NULL.
Note: If both NBXServer and NBXPass are specified,
NBXServer must be the first column after NBXMWI.
UMServer
Optional field with one occurrence allowed. Alpha-numeric
string specifying the name of the IMAP server to synchronize
with this mailbox. Specifying this field creates an external
e-mail account that is enabled for synchronization,
background polling, and polling at login with a polling
interval of 1 minute. If the mailbox already has an external
e-mail account that has synchronization enabled, then this
entry will be ignored. The next three sub-fields are optional,
but if they are left blank, then account synchronization will
not occur until all the required information is provided.
UMEmail
Optional sub-heading for the preceding UMServer column;
e-mail address of an account on an external e-mail server.
This information can be populated by the mailbox owner
using a web interface.
UMUser
Optional sub-heading for the preceding UMServer column;
username for accessing the external e-mail account. This
information can be populated by the mailbox owner using a
web interface.
UMPass
Optional sub-heading for the preceding UMServer column;
password for accessing the external e-mail account. This
information can be populated by the mailbox owner using a
web interface.
To import subscriber information:
1 Copy a tab-delimited text file to the /usr/app/app.dir on your IP
Messaging server. The filename must not be longer than 8 lowercase
characters. A sample file is shown in Figure 22.
Use the sftp command to copy the text file to /usr/app/app.dir. FTP is
disabled on IP Messaging servers for security reasons.
98
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Figure 22 Sample Tab-Delimited File
Mailbox
COS
Company
Division
Firstname
Lastname
2000
200
3Com
2001
200
3Com
China
Jane
Doe
John
Smith
2002
200
3Com
Engineering
Jim
Jones
2003
200
3Com
Sales
Sam
Baker
2004
202
Unassigned
Nicole
Stevens
2 Verify that the ownership (file permissions) of the file is set to app. Only
administrators and the file owner can change file ownership.
Use the chown command to change ownership. For example, if you
need to change ownership on the file sample.txt, the command would be
chown app:cti sample.txt
3 Select Subscriber Profile from the Main menu.
4 Click Impt.
5 Type the name of the tab-delimited text file in the Enter the import
filename field. The Import Utility will start processing the subscriber
information. If a mailbox listed in the text file already exists, the importing
process will pause and the following prompt will appear:
Mailbox <mailbox number> exists!
Update/Overwrite/Renum/Skip/Cancel (U/O/R/S/C)?
■
Update will only set the parameters specified in the import file. All
other subscriber profile settings will be left intact.
■
Overwrite will delete the existing mailbox, including all messages,
and create a new mailbox with the specified number.
■
Renum will prompt you to enter a different mailbox number instead
of the one specified in the file.
■
Skip will skip this mailbox and make no changes to the existing
mailbox.
■
Cancel will cancel the entire import and return to the mailbox entry
screen.
6 Several of the options will be followed by a second prompt such as:
Update One or update All (O/A)?
Modifying a Subscriber Profile
99
■
Selecting One will update (or overwrite or skip) the current mailbox. If
another mailbox exists that is also listed in the import file, the import
will pause again.
■
Selecting All will update (or overwrite or skip) the current mailbox and
any remaining mailboxes in the import file.
7 When the import file has been completely processed, a summary is
displayed:
Import complete, X lines processed.
Summary: Y mailboxes imported.
8 Click the OK button to return to the mailbox entry screen.
Exporting Subscriber
Information
The Export Utility (Expt button) is outputted as a tab-delimited text file
and is compatible with Excel.
Export subscriber information as follows:
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Voicemail Administration menu.
2 Press the Expt button.
The system displays the following message:
Enter the range for export, Minimum Mailbox Number:
3 Type in the lowest mailbox number that you want to export and press
Enter. For this example, 631100 is the minimum mailbox number.
The system displays the following message:
Enter the range for export, Maximum Mailbox Number:
4 Type in the highest mailbox number you want to export and press Enter.
For this example, 631102 is the maximum mailbox number.
The system displays the following message:
Enter the export filename:
5 Type in a filename that is no longer than 8 lowercase characters and press
Enter. For this example, test is the filename.
The system displays the following message:
Export Succeeded!
Summary: 5 mailboxes have been exported to file test.
The exported file is copied to /usr/app/app.dir on your IP Messaging
server.
6 Press OK to exit back to the main screen.
100
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
A sample of the exported file is shown in Figure 23.
Figure 23 Exported Subscriber Information
Setting
Delivery Options
The Delivery Options allow you to specify a second delivery destination
for a subscriber’s messages. If you have configured a subscriber to receive
voice, fax, and e-mail messages on the Subscriber Profile screen
(Figure 20), you can specify that all e-mail messages also be sent to a
second e-mail address for that subscriber.
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Main menu.
2 Select a subscriber number from the Mailbox Entry screen.
3 Click Delv to access the Delivery Options screen (Figure 24).
Figure 24 Delivery Options Screen
4 Fill in the fields as required. See Table 17 for Delivery Options field
descriptions.
Setting Delivery Options
101
Table 17 Fields on the Delivery Options Screen
Field
Description
Maximum Retries
The maximum number of times that IP Messaging attempts
to deliver a voice or fax message before declaring the
delivery unsuccessful.
Retry Interval (sec)
The time (in seconds) between delivery attempts.
Voice AutoDelivery
Voice message notification is automatically delivered to the
voice number entered in the Voice Number field. The voice
message will also be sent to the mailbox configured on the
Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 20).
Fax AutoDelivery
Fax message notification is automatically delivered to the
fax number entered in the Fax Number field or to the
printer selected in the Printer Name field. The fax message
will also be sent to the mailbox configured on the
Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 20).
Automatically sending fax message notification directly to a
printer requires setting up one or more printers in a VCX
Linux environment. See Appendix A for information.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
E-mail AutoDelivery
E-mail notification is automatically delivered to the e-mail
address entered in the E-mail Address field. The e-mail
message will also be sent to the mailbox configured on the
Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 20).
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
After Delivery
Digits Allowed
Specifies the action taken on auto-delivered messages. The
options are:
■
Leave New — A voice message will be delivered to the
voice number listed on the Delivery Options screen and
placed in the new messages folder in the mailbox.
■
Save — A voice message will be delivered to the voice
number listed on the Delivery Options screen and
placed in the saved message folder in the mailbox.
■
Delete — A voice message will be delivered to the
voice number listed on the Delivery Options screen and
placed in the deleted messages folder in the mailbox.
The maximum number of digits allowed for either the voice
or fax Auto Delivery number for any outbound dial.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Voice Number
The number to which a voice message delivery notification
will be sent.
Fax Number
When enabled, allows you to enter the number to which a
fax message delivery notification will be sent.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
102
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 17 Fields on the Delivery Options Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Printer Name
Allows you to select a printer to which a fax message is
delivered and printed.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Line Group
This designates a specific line or lines to which the message
is sent.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Line Turnaround
Turns on detection of a fax receive tone and enables the
sending of faxes that have not already been sent to be
printed.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
CNG Tone
Turns on the automatic detection of a fax send tone
(Comfort Noise Generator) and allows receipt of the fax.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Urgent voice msg only
Turns on the auto delivery feature only for the messages
marked urgent.
Cover Sheet
Accepts a maximum of 44 characters for each line and a
maximum of six lines to serve as a cover sheet for a fax
message.
Add or change the message delivery criteria on the
Message Delivery screen and click on Exit to log those
changes and move on.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Fax Printing Options
This release of IP Messaging provides three fax printing options:
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
■
You can enable Fax AutoDelivery on the Delivery Options screen and
specify a fax machine as the destination. Enter the fax number in the
Fax Machine field. Incoming faxes will be automatically sent to and
printed at the specified fax machine.
■
You can enable Fax AutoDelivery on the Delivery Options screen and
specify a printer as the destination. Enable the Printer Name field and
select a printer from the drop-down list. Incoming faxes will be
automatically sent to and printed at the specified printer. Configuring
a printer in the VCX Linux environment is described in Appendix A.
■
You can enable your mailbox to receive e-mail messages. Incoming
faxes will be embedded as TIFF image attachments. You can then use
the e-mail account associated with the mailbox to view the message,
Setting Delivery Options
103
open the TIFF attachment, and print the fax. See “Sending Faxes as
TIFF Attachments”.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Sending Faxes as TIFF Attachments
To enable fax delivery as a TIFF image in an e-mail message:
1 Enable the following options on the Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 20),
for the MB Receive Media field:
Fax
POP3 or IMAP (select the protocol used by your e-mail system)
2 Click the Srvs button (on the System Configuration screen) to access the
System Servers screen (Figure 78). Identify IP Messaging as the Reply
Server (ReplySv). This step is optional. If you do not configure this server
type, the From field of the e-mail message containing the fax shows
<phone_number/mailbox_number> only instead of
<phone_number/mailbox_number@reply_server>.
3 Configure an e-mail account (in Outlook Express, Outlook, or Lotus
Notes) for the mailbox.
4 Create an IMAP or POP3 account that points to your IP Messaging
mailbox. Set the incoming mail server (IMAP or POP3) to be the IP
Messaging IP address or domain name.
You can choose to either use the IP Messaging as your outgoing server
(SMTP) or a third party server.
5 Configure a third-party SMTP server to allow subscribers to send e-mail
messages to external destinations. If you configure IP Messaging as your
only SMTP server, subscribers can send e-mail messages to other IP
Messaging subscribers only.
104
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Defining a Fixed Text
Message
You can set the system to display a fixed message at the top of every
e-mail message you send.
To define a fixed text message:
1 Click Ftxt on the Delivery Options screen.
2 Type a message in the textbox.
3 Click Save and then click Exit to return to the Subscriber Profile screen.
To delete a fixed text message:
1 Click Ftxt on the Delivery Options screen.
2 Click Delt to delete the fixed text message. The system asks you:
Delete file? (Y/N)
3 Type Y to delete the file and click Exit to return to the Delivery Options
screen.
Setting up the
Password
The Pass button enables you to change the current password for this
mailbox. The subscriber must then change the system password on the
next call to the mailbox.
1 Click Pass on the Subscriber Profile screen.
The Enter New Password text box appears.
2 Type in the new password and press Enter. The system prompts you to
reenter the password.
3 Type in the password again and press Enter to exit to the Subscriber
Profile screen.
Provisioning a
Subscriber Alias
Use the Alis button to create an alias for a subscriber. An alias is an
alternative identifier for a mailbox.
Aliases can only be configured by administrators.
An alias provides the ability to define multiple devices that point to a
single mailbox. IP Messaging is then made aware of the subscriber's
identity even when that subscriber calls from another phone. The alias
type can include telephone numbers, e-mail addresses and names. Each
alias can have its own password, personal greeting, and auto login
defined by the subscriber.
Provisioning a Subscriber Alias
105
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
For example, suppose that a subscriber has the following office phone,
cell phone, home phone, and a preferred e-mail address information:
■
12345 (office)
■
15554445562 (cell)
■
19996587234 (home)
■
myname@xyz.com (e-mail)
The administrator configures all the numbers and the e-mail address as
aliases of mailbox number 5678 on IP Messaging. Consequently, all voice
mails for the different phone numbers and e-mail for the specified
address are associated with mailbox 5678. The subscriber can retrieve
messages from any configured alias using regular mailbox features like
password, personal greeting, and auto login. If you do not change these
settings, the default settings apply (those used for the parent mailbox).
1 Click Alis on the Subscriber Profile screen.
2 Type in an alias in the Enter Alias text box and press Enter.
The system prompts you to confirm addition of the new alias:
Alias 123 not found. Add? (Y/N)
3 Enter Y.
The Alias screen appears (Figure 25).
106
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Figure 25 Alias Screen
4 Fill in the fields as required. See Table 18 for Alias Screen field
descriptions.
5 Click Exit and type Y to save the alias.
You can use options on this screen to merge or split an alias mailbox. See
“Merging Mailboxes”.
Table 18 Profile Fields on the Alias Screen
Field
Description
Alias Entry
The name of the new alias.
Alias Type
Associates the alias with these types of mailbox numbers for
the subscriber: mobile phone, fixed phone, e-mail, fax, or
LDAP login number.
Notes: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Provisioning a Subscriber Alias
107
Table 18 Profile Fields on the Alias Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Language
Selects the language used for mailbox voice prompts for this
subscriber alias.
Note: There are no choices here unless additional languages
are installed.
The default language is US English. To assign another
language, you must:
1 Install the language. See “Adding a Set of Language
Prompts” for details.
2 In the IP Messaging Provisioning interface, go to the
Company/Division Profile - Permission screen and ensure
that Soft is enabled for the Language parameter. See
“Setting Permission Levels”.
Merging Mailboxes
Auto-Login
Eliminates the need to enter a password to access this
mailbox.
Voice Recognition
Enables the auto-speech recognition feature. Not supported
in this release.
Language
Uses the voice prompt language associated with the alias.
Uncheck this box to use the voice prompt language
associated with the subscriber profile.
Password
Selects a different password for this alias mailbox. Uncheck
this box to use the password associated with the subscriber
profile.
Name Annc (Name
Announcement)
Selects a different name announcement when a caller dials
this alias. Uncheck this box to use the name announcement
associated with the subscriber profile.
Persnl Grt (Personal
Greeting)
Selects a different personal greeting message for this alias.
Uncheck this box to use the personal greeting message
associated with the subscriber profile.
You can merge alias mailboxes. This saves time and reduces errors.
To merge the current mailbox:
1 Click Merg on the Subscriber Profile - Alias screen.
2 Select an alias from the drop-down list (or type it in the text box) and
press Enter. The system confirms the merge action:
The mailbox has been merged into Mailbox XYZ.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to merge another mailbox.
108
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Splitting a Mailbox
To split an alias mailbox:
1 Select an alias mailbox from the drop-down list (or type it in the text box)
and then click Splt. This separates the alias mailbox from its parent and
creates a new mailbox based on the alias configuration.
2 The system confirms that the split is successful.
Sharing a Mailbox
You can use the alias Merg option to enable two subscribers with
different extensions to share a single mailbox.
Merging Two Mailboxes
When the administrator assigns a phone extension to a subscriber
account, IP Messaging can use this information to automatically create a
voice mailbox associated with the phone extension. This is the default
action. The administrator can also choose to not have the mailbox
automatically created.
Two subscribers that have their own phone extension and mailbox can
share a single mailbox. For example, you have two extensions (1000 and
1003) and IP Messaging has automatically created mailboxes for each.
While editing the Subscriber Profile for extension 1000, you can use the
alias Merg option to merge mailbox 1003 with mailbox 1000. This results
in the following:
■
A call to externsion1000 hears 1000's personal greeting and can leave
a message.
■
A call extension 1003 hears 1003's personal greeting and can leave a
message.
■
Extension 1000 can press the MSG button, enter the password for
extension 1000's mailbox, and access messages left for both extension
1000 and extension 1003.
■
Extension 1003 can press the MSG button, enter the password for
extension 1003’s mailbox, and access both sets of messages.
■
You can no longer access the Subscriber Profile for extension 1003
because you have merged it with the Subscriber Profile for extension
1000. If you enter 1003 on the Mailbox Entry screen (Figure 21), the
Subscriber Profile screen for extension 1000 appears.
Provisioning a Subscriber Alias
109
To merge two mailboxes:
1 Access the subscriber profile of the mailbox you want to merge with a
second mailbox. In the previous example, you would access the
subscriber profile for mailbox 1000.
2 Click Alis and then click Merg on the Alias screen.
3 Select an alias from the drop-down list (or type it in the text box) and
press Enter. In the previous example, you would select 1003. The system
confirms the mailboxes have been merged.
By default, the merged mailbox (in this case, 1003) retains the password,
name announcement, and personal greeting set up for mailbox 1003.
You can modify these defaults on the Alias screen.
4 With the merged mailbox (1003) selected on the Alias screen, press
Enter.
An Alias screen similar to Figure 26 appears.
Figure 26 Alias Screen for Merged Mailbox
Notice that the check boxes for the password, name annc, and persnl
grt fields are selected by default.
■
■
To change the password used by the extension (1003) with the
merged mailbox, click the Pass button.
To specify that extension 1003 use the same password as extension
1000 to access the merged mailbox, clear the check box for the
password field.
110
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
■
To specify that callers to the merged mailbox (1003) hear the name
announcement and personal greeting set up for mailbox 1000,
clear the check boxes for the name annc and persnl grt fields.
Aliasing an Extension with a Mailbox
As described in “Merging Two Mailboxes”, when the administrator
assigns a phone extension to a subscriber account, IP Messaging can use
this information to automatically create a voice mailbox associated with
the phone extension. However, the administrator can also choose to not
have the mailbox automatically created. This section describes how to
merge an extension that has no associated mailbox with an extension
that does have a mailbox.
For this discussion, assume that extension 1000 has a mailbox and
extension 1003 does not. The goal is create an alias for extension 1003
that allows it to share 1000’s mailbox. This results in the following:
■
A call to externsion1000 hears 1000's personal greeting and can leave
a message.
■
A call extension 1003 hears 1003's personal greeting and can leave a
message.
■
Extension 1000 can press the MSG button, enter the password for
extension 1000's mailbox, and access messages left for both extension
1000 and extension 1003.
■
Extension 1003 can press the MSG button, enter the password for
extension 1000’s mailbox, and access both messages.
With the configuration described in “Merging Two Mailboxes”, two
existing mailboxes were merged into one mailbox. Therefore,
extension 1003 could use its own password to access the merged
mailbox.
In this case, extension 1003 does not have a mailbox, but it does have
access to 1000’s mailbox. Therefore, extension 1003 can use 1000’s
password to access the mailbox.
To grant an extension access to another extension’s mailbox:
1 Click Alis from the Subscriber Profile screen of the extension with the
mailbox (in this example, 1000).
2 Type in the extension (in this example, 1003) of the subscriber who will
share mailbox 1000 and press Enter.
Provisioning FMFM
111
The system prompts you to confirm addition of the new alias.
3 Enter Y.
The Alias screen appears. See Figure 25.
4 Select Fixed Phone from the Alias Type drop-down list and press Enter.
5 Click Exit.
The system prompts you to save your changes.
6 Enter Y.
The Alias screen appears.
Provisioning FMFM
The Find Me Follow Me (FMFM) feature enables a caller to contact a
subscriber regardless of location, day, time, or network access device.
Find Me Follow Me works across the PSTN, wireless, VoIP, and Intelligent
networks and supports basic and advanced contact methods.
Find Me Follow Me is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Do not use Find Me Follow Me if two-stage dialing is configured for your
gateway. Find Me Follow Me cannot handle waiting for a dial tone to be
asserted and a call will not connect to the PSTN.
Simple FMFM allows you to control which callers can reach you. You
configure simple FMFM by creating a list of access numbers The system
attempts to reach you by dialing each number, in sequence, from first to
last.
Advanced FMFM allows you to create a list of rules with priorities, filters,
and action procedures assigned to them. You can also create a list of
locations that the system uses to reach you.
■
Rules determine what happens to a caller based on a particular event
such as a busy signal. The call’s disposition is based on the procedure
associated with the rule. For example, the procedure might play a
recorded message or send a caller to a mailbox. The procedure can
have an associated filter so that the procedure is only executed if
specific criteria are met. For example, if a call is marked urgent, then a
procedure might be executed.
You can define multiple rules and assign each rule a priority, which
determines when a rule is applied.
112
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
■
Location settings define your current location so the system can
forward an incoming call that satisfies the FMFM rule settings to your
location.
This section describes how to set up advanced FMFM. See Chapter 17 for
information on setting up simple FMFM through the IP Messaging Web
Provisioning interface.
To define a new rule for FMFM features for this mailbox:
1 Click Rule on the Subscriber Profile screen.
2 Enter a rule name in the text box or select from an existing defined rule
from the drop-down list.
3 Press Enter.
The Find Me Follow Me Rule screen appears (Figure 27).
Figure 27 FindMeFollowMe Rule Screen
4 Select an event from the Event drop-down list and press Enter.
Table 19 lists the FMFM Events.
Table 19 FMFM Events
Event
Description
Call busy
Call forward busy occurs when someone enters the system as a
result of the subscriber being busy at the dialed number.
Provisioning FMFM
113
Table 19 FMFM Events (continued)
Event
Description
Call no-answer
Call forward no-answer occurs when someone enters the
system as a result of the subscriber not answering at the dialed
number.
Contact Request
Contact request or calling party identification available occurs
when someone enters the system directly looking for the
subscriber or when a subscriber is logged into the system
requesting contact with another subscriber. This event is
specifically for the case where the calling party identification is
not available.
Login Mailbox
Login Mailbox occurs when a subscriber enters the system and
logs into his / her mailbox.
Logout Mailbox
Logout mailbox occurs when a subscriber leaves the system by
logging out of his / her mailbox.
Message Receive
Message receive occurs when someone enters the system by
reaching the subscribers voice mail message store.
5 Select the priority for an event from the Priority drop-down list and press
Enter. Table 20 lists the FMFM Priorities.
Table 20 FMFM Priorities
Event
Description
Current
When an incoming call event is assigned this priority, execute the
procedure associated with the current registered location of the
subscriber.
Only this rule
When an incoming call event is assigned this priority, follow the
action specified by the defined procedure for this rule. The
procedure can be defined by selecting from a set of pre-defined
actions from the System Administrator setup screens for the
Subscriber Profile.
High
When an incoming call event is assigned this priority, follow the
action specified by the defined procedure for this rule. This can
be set to forward the incoming call to a registered location
because of the high priority setting.
Medium
When an incoming call event is assigned this priority, follow the
action specified by the defined procedure for this rule. This can
be set to forward the incoming call to the subscriber's office
location and either talk to the subscriber or leave a message
depending on if the subscriber is available at this location.
Low
When an incoming call event is assigned this priority; follow the
action specified by the defined procedure for this rule. This can
be set to forward the incoming call to the subscriber's mailbox.
114
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 20 FMFM Priorities (continued)
Event
Description
Not this rule
This temporarily disables the rule execution, but the rule setting
remains.
6 Select a predefined procedure from the Procedure drop-down list and
press Enter. If no procedures are defined, create a new procedure by
clicking Proc. See “Defining a New Procedure”.
7 Click Save and return to the Subscriber Profile screen.
Defining a New
Procedure
To define a procedure for a specific event:
1 Click Proc on the Find Me Follow Me Rule screen (Figure 27).
The Notification Procedure Administration screen appears (Figure 28).
This screen displays the available message notification media.
2 Check the desired media types.
Figure 28 FMFM Notification Procedure Administration Screen
3 Type the name for the new procedure in the text box and press Enter.
The Edit Notification Procedure screen appears (Figure 29).
Provisioning FMFM
115
Figure 29 Edit Notification Procedure Screen
4 Select the required message notification medium from the Select Type
drop-down list.
Table 21 lists the all the possible notification media types.
Media types will not appear on the drop-down list unless they are
enabled on the previous screen (Figure 28).
Table 21 Notification Media Types
Field
Description
SMS Text Message
A text message can be sent from a PC to a mobile
phone as a Short Message Service (SMS) message.
SMS
Subscriber will be notified with a short message about
an incoming call on the subscriber's pager or mobile
phone depending on the SMS profile set for this
subscriber by the administrator.
Voice
Subscriber will be notified by a voice message about a
received message
E-mail
Subscriber will be notified via e-mail about a received
message.
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native
TUI.
SIP Notify
Notification can be sent to a specified machine and
port. This also offers a choice of three different data
formats for notification.
116
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 21 Notification Media Types (continued)
Field
Description
Auto Copy Fwd
Forwards an incoming message to the e-mail address
specified.
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native
TUI.
Pager
Subscriber will be notified via a pager about a received
message
SMDI MWI
Subscriber is notified via a Message Waiting Indicator
on a phone or cell phone.
Inband MWI
Subscriber is notified via a Message Waiting Indicator
on a phone or cell phone.
ANSI TCAP Wireless
Not supported.
ANSI TCAP Landline
Not supported.
ETSI ISUP Landline
Not supported.
ETSI TCAP Landline
Not supported.
ETSI TCAP Wireless
Not supported.
Message Present
Determines whether a message will be presented in
the specified interface based on the filter settings.
Note: This is not an actual notification type. Currently
only TUI is a valid selection.
Internet Alert
Registers a subscriber to receive Internet Notification
to their registered computer.
Extensive SMS
SMS Notification with more detailed information.
Auto Foldering
Determines the subscriber's message folder in which
to deposit the message. The subscriber's message
folders have to be set up to enable this operation
Live Call
Places a call to either the number specified or the
location specified by the Location ID
Disconnect
Plays a disconnect message (if recorded) and hangs
up. By default, it says, “Thank you for calling,
goodbye.”
Take Message
Allows the caller to leave a message.
IS41C Direct MWN
N/A
Blind Notify
Sends a Message Waiting Indication to a SIP Proxy
server.
Note: Blind Notify must be enabled when an NBX call
processor is used with an IP Messaging server.
NBX MWI
Sends a Message Waiting Indication to a 3Com NBX
system.
Provisioning FMFM
117
The medium you select generates other the fields on the screen. For
example, if you select Voice, the screen generates a Phone # text box.
5 From the State drop-down list, select one of the following:
■
■
■
Select Active to activate a selected notification procedure for a
specific mailbox.
Select Inactive to deactivate a selected notification procedure for a
specific mailbox.
Select Linked to execute another notification procedure if the
procedure you are configuring fails to execute.
Select the procedure to be linked from the drop-down list of
defined procedures in the Link field.
6 Check the Queue selection box to enable notification queueing.
■
If enabled and the system receives a notification outside its configured
schedule, the notification is queued until the schedule becomes active
again.
■
If disabled and the system receives a notification outside its configured
schedule, the notification is not queued and not delivered.
7 Enter the number of times IP Messaging will attempt to send the message
notification in the Atmpts text box.
8 Enter the time in minutes that IP Messaging will wait between
notification attempts in the Intrvl text box.
9 Select a filter from the down-down list. If no filter exists, go to “Setting
Filter Parameters”.
10 Click Done. This message appears:
Save Changes? (Y/N/ESC)
11 Enter Y.
12 Click Exit several times to return to the Subscriber Profile screen.
Setting Filter
Parameters
Set filter parameters as follows:
1 Click Filt on the Notification Procedure Administration screen (Figure 29).
A filter defines the rules for following a notification procedure. For
example, you can create a filter that sends a notification only if the calling
party is identified by a preselected number or mailbox.
118
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
2 Type in a filter name on the next screen and press Enter. The Filter
Administration screen appears (Figure 30).
Figure 30 Filter Administration Screen
3 Select from the drop-down lists to set the new parameters for this filter.
Table 22 lists the filter component selection.
Figure 31 shows the Filter Administration Values screen with sample
information filled in.
Figure 31 Filter Administration Values
Provisioning FMFM
119
Table 22 Filter Components
Filter
Description
Message Type
Incoming calls can be filtered by selecting Normal or Urgent,
which will make this notification effective only for messages
marked ‘Normal’ or ‘Urgent’ respectively. If the notification is
required for all messages, then select All from the drop-down list.
The filter criteria for the incoming caller (sender), incoming call
media, incoming e-mail message subject, or other alias mailbox
call recipients can be set by selecting an operator in the Op
column. This equates the criteria to a specified value of the
criteria in the Value column.
Notes: The Value field does not appear until a filter operator (==
or <>) is selected from a drop-down list. See Figure 31 for an
example of how this screen appears with configured information.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Sender
You can filter an incoming call according to sender criteria by
selecting == or <> or All in the Op column. Specify the sender's
number or mailbox or specify a group of senders in the List or
Grp field.
Click List to display a drop-down list of predefined distribution
lists for this mailbox.
Click Grp to display a drop-down list of predefined address
groups that include the names of selected persons from the
subscriber address book. Create this group by selecting Profile/
Options from the Subscriber Profile screen, then select Addr
(Address Book) and Grp (Group)
A List contains only one destination telephone number, e-mail
address, or pager number. A group contains the name of a
person and associated telephone numbers, pager numbers, or
e-mail addresses.
Select the appropriate operator:
<> — Selects only the numbers not listed in the Value column or
the selected List or Group.
== — Selects only the numbers listed in the Value column or the
selected List or Group.
All — Selects any incoming caller. No filter is assigned for the
incoming call sender.
120
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 22 Filter Components (continued)
Filter
Description
Media Type
Select the incoming call media type from a drop-down list: voice,
fax, or e-mail.
Select the appropriate operator:
<> — Use any media except the specified media.
== — Use only the specified media.
All — Use any media.
Notes: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
E-Subject
Incoming e-mail messages can be filtered depending on the
e-mail subject by specifying a subject in the Value column.
For example, you can specify Bulk Mail in the value column and
selecting <> so that only e-mails other than bulk mails will be
notified.
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Recipient
Additional recipients for the message notification can be selected
from a drop-down list of alias numbers or alias mailbox numbers
for this mailbox. Select == or <> depending on whether the
message notification should be forwarded to the selected alias
numbers or if notification should be sent to all alias numbers
except the selected alias number. Select All to send the
notification to all listed alias numbers.
4 Create a notification schedule for the notification procedure that is using
the filter. See “Setting the Notification Schedule”.
Setting the
Notification Schedule
You can enable schedule notification for a particular date, day of the
week, range of days, and range of hours.
The Notification Schedule screen is accessed by clicking Schd on the Filter
Administration screen (Figure 30).
The Filter Default Schedule screen appears (Figure 32).
The DEF option filter is represented by a solid green line and applies to
every day from midnight (upper left) to midnight (lower right).
You can modify the default schedule for any day of the week. For
example, if you modify the Tuesday schedule, this modified Tuesday
schedule overrides the default schedule for all Tuesdays.
You can also modify the default schedule for a specific date (Day of Yr).
For example, if you modify the schedule for Friday, June 16, 2006, the
Provisioning FMFM
121
modified schedule for that date overrides both the default schedule and
the day of the week schedule for that date.
Figure 32 Filter Default Schedule Screen
As you set schedules, the system might display Implicit Schedule or
Explicit Schedule. An implicit schedule is a default schedule that is active
at all times. An explicit schedule is one that has different times set from a
default schedule. For example, if you have 2 AM to 3AM enabled but all
other times are disabled, then you have specified an explicit schedule.
Configuring the Filter for the Default Schedule
When the default schedule for a filter is configured for the first time, it
applies to all days of the week. After you configure the default schedule,
you can override it by modifying the settings for any day of the week or
any specific date.
Configure the filter for a default schedule by first disabling the filter for
the entire day:
1 Click DEF.
2 Click Edit.
3 Click the Disable checkbox.
4 Click once on the time bar to the right of 12am in the upper left corner of
the time line.
A bar with two arrow heads appears in that time slot.
122
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
5 Click once on the time bar to the left of 12am in the lower right corner of
the time line.
All three sections of the time line turn gray, indicating that the filter is
disabled for the entire day.
6 Click the Enable checkbox and verify that an X appears in it.
You can now enable the filter for the desired times. To enable the filter
for a specific time period:
1 Click once on the time line for the beginning of a time period and then
click once on the time line for the end of a time period.
Verify that the portion of the line between the beginning and end of the
time period turns green, which means it is enabled.
2 Repeat step 1 for any additional time periods you want to enable.
3 Delete a time period you have created by first clicking the Disable
checkbox and repeating step 1.
If you decide to enable additional time periods after deleting a time
period, make sure the Enable box is checked off.
4 Make any additional changes and when you are satisfied with the Default
Schedule filter, click Done.
The system prompts you to save your changes.
5 Type Y to save the default schedule filter.
Configuring a Message Notification Filter for a Day of the Week
Configure a filter for a day of the week as follows:
1 Click the day of the week that you want to configure (MON-SUN).
The schedule for that day appears. It is initially the default schedule that
was previously defined.
2 Click Edit.
3 Disable any portion of a currently enabled time period as follows:
a Click the Disable check box and verify that an X appears in the box.
b Click once on the time line at the beginning of the time period you
want to disable.
c Click once on the time line at the end of the time period you want to
disable.
Provisioning FMFM
123
Verify that the time period is now gray, which indicates that it is
disabled.
4 Enable any portion of a currently disabled time period as follows:
a Click the Enable check box and verify that an X appears in the box.
b Click once on the time line at the beginning of the time period you
want to enable.
c Click once on the time line at the end of the time period you want to
enable.
Verify that the time period is now green, which indicates that it is
enabled.
5 Make any additional changes and when you are satisfied with your day of
the week schedule, click Done.
If this is the first time you have edited the schedule, the system prompts
you to create the schedule. If this is a previously created schedule, the
system prompts you to save your changes.
Configuring a Message Notification Filter for a Specific Date
Configure a filter for a specific date as follows:
1 Click Add Date (next to Day of Yr).
The Month, Day, and Year fields appear.
2 Type in the month (01 - 12) and press Enter.
3 Type in the day (01 - 31) and press Enter.
4 Type in the year (2006, or some other year).
5 Click Edit.
6 To update the schedule using a copy of the default schedule or a
previously configured day of the week schedule, click Copy and select
the desired entry from the drop-down list.
You may need to press Edit more than once to display the Copy button.
7 Disable any portion of a currently enabled time period as follows:
a Click the Disable check box and verify that an X appears in the box.
b Click once on the time line at the beginning of the time period you
want to disable.
c Click once on the time line at the end of the time period you want to
disable.
124
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Verify that the time period is now gray, which indicates that it is
disabled.
8 Enable any portion of a currently disabled time period as follows:
a Click the Enable check box and verify that an X appears in the box.
b Click once on the time line at the beginning of the time period you
want to enable.
c Click once on the time line at the end of the time period you want to
enable.
Verify that the time period is now green, which indicates that it is
enabled.
9 Make any additional changes and when you are satisfied with your
specific date schedule, click Done.
If this is the first time you have edited the schedule, the system prompts
you to create the schedule. If this is a previously created schedule, the
system prompts you to save your changes.
Changing Profile
Settings
To enter or change parameters for the subscriber profile:
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Main menu.
2 Select a mailbox number from the drop-down menu (or type it in the text
box) on the Mailbox Entry screen.
3 Click Prof on the Subscriber Profile screen.
The Subscriber Profile 2 screen appears (Figure 33).
Changing Profile Settings
125
Figure 33 Profile Screen
Table 23 lists the fields on the Subscriber Profile screen.
Table 23 Fields on the Subscriber Profile Screen
Field
Description
Max Record Time (seconds)
Per Message
Maximum seconds allowed for each message.
All Messages
Maximum seconds allowed for all messages.
Name Announcement
Maximum seconds allowed for a name
announcement.
Personal Greeting
Maximum seconds allowed for a personal
greeting.
Warning
Maximum seconds allowed for warning. This is
the number of seconds before the end of the
allotted message time, when the system displays
the seconds left before termination.
All Messages in kb
Maximum size allowed in kilobytes for all
messages.
Max Count Parameters
Max Fax Pages
Maximum number of fax pages allowed for this
mailbox subscriber.
Distribution Lists
Maximum number of distribution lists allowed.
New Messages
Maximum number of new messages allowed.
Entries Per List
Maximum number of entries per list allowed.
126
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 23 Fields on the Subscriber Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Saved Messages
Maximum number of saved messages allowed.
Personal Greetings
Maximum number of personal greetings allowed.
Max Messages
Maximum number of messages allowed to be
stored in this mailbox.
Entry Attempts
Maximum number of entry attempts allowed.
Retention Parameters (days)
New Messages
Number of days new messages will be saved.
Saved Messages
Number of days saved messages will be saved.
Deleted Messages
Number of days deleted messages will be saved.
Password Life
Number of days the password is valid.
Other
Min Password Len
Minimum number of characters in a password.
Max Password Len
Maximum number of characters in a password.
Min Message Len
Minimum length of the message in seconds.
Max Future Deliv
Maximum number of days to schedule a future
delivery.
4 Click one of the following buttons to continue profile configuration:
■
Opts — Displays mailbox setup options for the subscriber. See
“Configuring Mailbox Options”.
If you enable a personal address book for the mailbox, you can
create address book entries. See “Configuring Personal Address
Book Entries”.
■
■
■
■
Opt2 — Displays additional mailbox setup options for the
subscriber. See “Configuring Additional Mailbox Options”.
CalP — If your environment includes multiple call processors (for
example, at multiple remote sites), you can configure IP Messaging
to act as a single, centralized voicemail system by recognizing the
call processors at the remote sites. See “Identifying a Call Processor
for a Subscriber”.
Drpt — Allows a subscriber to make outgoing calls from a
mailbox. See “Configuring Delivery Reports and Call Bridging
Options”.
POP3 — Links the subscriber's mailbox to other POP3 (Post Office
Protocol) mailboxes. See “Linking a Mailbox to an External Email
Account”.
Changing Profile Settings
127
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Configuring Mailbox
Options
Click Prof > Opts on the Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 33) to
configure the mailbox options shown in Figure 34.
Figure 34 Subscriber Profile Mailbox Options
Table 24 lists the mailbox setup options.
Table 24 Fields on the Mailbox Setup Screen
Field
Description
Multiuser Mailbox Settings
Max Sub-Mailboxes
A maximum of 999 submailboxes is allowed;
the typical range is 1 to 10.
Existing Sub-Mlbxes
Displays the number of current active
sub-mailboxes.
Sub-Mbx Monitor
Allows the Root mailbox to monitor the sub
mailboxes / partitions.
Auto Forward
Messages left in the root mailbox will be
auto-forwarded to each of the active partitions
and deleted.
Voice Form Mailbox Settings
Form Mailbox
Check to enable this mailbox to function as a
Form Mailbox.
Transcription Mbx
Check to enable this mailbox to function as a
Transcription Mailbox.
128
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 24 Fields on the Mailbox Setup Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Auto Attendant Level Settings Note: These settings apply only if an Auto
Attendant is configured for this mailbox.
CallBack Number
If this box is checked, the Auto Attendant TUI
will prompt the caller to enter a call back
telephone number.
Recording Prompt
If this box is checked, the Auto Attendant TUI
will prompt the caller to record a message after
the prompt.
Back to Attendant
If this box is checked, the caller will be provided
with an option to go back to the Auto
Attendant menu after recording a message.
Busy Greetings
If this box is checked, this subscriber will have
the option to record a Busy Greeting Message
to be played at a specified time range.
Extended Absence
If this box is checked, this subscriber will have
the option to record an Extended Absence
Greeting Message to be played at a specified
time range.
Changing Profile Settings
129
Table 24 Fields on the Mailbox Setup Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Other Option Settings
Reply Attachment
The available drop-down list of options include:
All, Selective, and None.
All — The original message will be attached to
the reply message and there will be no prompt
to provide an option for this attachment.
Selective — There will be a prompt for each
reply that asks if the original message needs to
be attached to the reply.
None — There will be no prompt and the
original message will not be attached to the
reply.
Message on Demand
Enables or disables the Message on Demand
option for this subscriber. You must also check
this box to enable Auto Attendant
configuration through the Telephone User
Interface (TUI).
■
If the Auto Attendant is configured for this
mailbox, the user will hear Auto Attendant
configuration prompts through the TUI.
■
If the Auto Attendant is configured for a
different mailbox but this mailbox is
included in the defined range of mailboxes
for an Auto Attendant, the user will hear
Message On Demand configuration prompts
through the TUI.
See Chapter 11 for information on Auto
Attendant configuration.
Node Level of MOD
Note: This entry is enabled only if the Message
On Demand option is checked.
Enter the number of node levels required for
this subscriber's Message On Demand Menu
tree setup.
Personal Adr Book
Enables or disables the personal address book
feature for this mailbox. Enabling this option
causes the Addr button to appear on this
screen. See “Configuring Personal Address
Book Entries” for more information.
Login w/o passcode
Enables or disables the capability to log in to
the mailbox without a password.
Prompt for Mailbox
Enables a prompt that asks the subscriber to
enter a mailbox number.
130
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 24 Fields on the Mailbox Setup Screen (continued)
Field
Select Language
Description
When enabled, allows the subscriber to select
the language used for IP Messaging voice
prompts when the subscriber sets up his or her
mailbox.
This option appears only if you have installed
voice prompts in more than one language. See
“Adding a Set of Language Prompts”.
Operator Extension
Allows you to specify the telephone number for
the operator. When specified, a caller can press
[0] before or after leaving a message to transfer
the call to the operator.
Notification Admin
Check this box to enable the subscriber's
Message Notification option.
Delivery Report
Enable or disable the Delivery Report option for
this subscriber by checking or un-checking this
box. If you enable this option, you can
configure Delivery Reports when you click the
Drpt button. See “Configuring Delivery Reports
and Call Bridging Options”.
Information Only
Checking this box prevents callers from leaving
messages by setting this mailbox as information
only. After enabling this option, the subscriber
must record a new personal greeting to record
an appropriate message that callers hear when
the subscriber does not answer the phone.
No Search By Name
If this box is checked, the search mailbox by
name (Name Directory) option will be disabled.
Changing Profile Settings
131
Configuring Personal Address Book Entries
When you select Personal Adr Book option on the Mailbox Setup
options screen (see “Changing Profile Settings”), the Addr button
appears.
1 Click Addr to add entries for the Personal Address Book for this mailbox.
2 Type a name in the text box and press Enter. The following message
displays:
Create Entry <Name>? (Y/N)
3 Type Y and press Enter.
The Personal Information screen appears (Figure 35).
Figure 35 Personal Address Book Entry Screen
4 Type data in the appropriate fields.
The E-mail Address field is available only if you selected the e-mail option
on the Subscriber Profile Options.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
5 Click Note to display a screen on which you can enter any additional
information related to this address entry.
6 Click Comp to enter company information.
7 Click Save to save the new information in the Personal Address Book.
8 Add any additional entries as instructed in steps 2-7.
132
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
9 When you are finished adding entries, click Exit to return to the
Subscriber Profile screen.
Configuring
Additional Mailbox
Options
Click Opt2 on the Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 33) to configure
additional mailbox options (Figure 36).
Figure 36 Mailbox Options Setup 2 Screen
Table 25 lists the fields on the Mailbox Options Setup 2 screen.
Table 25 Fields on the Mailbox Options Setup 2 Screen
Field
Description
Global Voicemail
Enables this subscriber’s mailbox for global voicemail. This
mailbox then becomes accessible to all other regional and
branch offices. This feature is available on Global
Voicemail Central Servers and regional and branch
offices.
Note: Global voicemail is supported only on VCX
systems.
Folders
Default message folders can be created by checking the
appropriate boxes:
Saved
Saved messages can be stored in this folder.
Deleted
Deleted messages can be stored in this folder.
Sent
Sent messages can be stored in this folder.
Drafts
Drafts of messages can be stored in this folder.
Changing Profile Settings
133
Table 25 Fields on the Mailbox Options Setup 2 Screen (continued)
Field
Email Address
Description
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
If the mailbox is configured to send and receive e-mail
messages, replies to messages are typically sent back to
the mailbox.
An e-mail address entered in the Email Address field to
identify a mailbox must be unique on that IP Messaging
server. Two mailboxes on the same IP Messaging server
cannot share an e-mail address.
If you want replies to your messages to go to a
destination other than your IP Messaging mailbox, specify
a different destination by entering an e-mail address in
the Email Address field.
E-mail addresses are not assigned by default. This field
must be populated by the System Administrator or the
mailbox subscriber.
Other Options
Auto Play Disabled
A checked box enables the Auto Play feature for this
mailbox. Toggle through the Auto Play options with
continuous clicks.
Auto Play Disabled (default) is active when the box is
not checked.
Auto Play Full plays all unreviewed messages without
providing any review options. This feature plays the first
message and continues to the next message without any
interruptions.
Auto Play with Review plays all unreviewed messages
and provides review options. It plays the first message
and stops before playing the next message and presents
the subscriber with a review options menu.
Purge Deleted
Messages
Purges deleted messages from the mailbox. Deleted
messages are not saved in the Deleted Messages folder
for this mailbox. Once a message is deleted, it cannot be
retrieved.
MSgsm Format
Checking this box will compress the audio wave file
attachments to the e-mail messages following the
Microsoft GSM (Global System for Mobile)
communications standards. This will result in smaller file
sizes while sending or receiving e-mail messages with
audio wav files.
Name Dial 3 tries
Checking this box will allow three tries for dial by name
calls from this mailbox. This is applicable only for sending
messages from this mailbox. After three tries, it will exit
the system.
134
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 25 Fields on the Mailbox Options Setup 2 Screen (continued)
Field
Description
No Tel Num in SBN
(Search By Name)
If checked here, will not identify this mailbox owner's
telephone number and will include only the name in the
directory so that any caller request a directory search will
hear only the name and not the telephone number for
this mailbox.
MWI Off When No
New
Message Waiting Indication (MWI) remains off if there are
no new messages in the mailbox.
No Print Opts Menu
This disables the Print Options menu.
FMFM Advanced
Setup
Note: FMFM is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Allows advanced FMFM configuration, by the subscriber,
through the TUI and the IP Messaging Web Provisioning
interface. For the current release, 3Com recommends
that you do not enable this option. Advanced FMFM
setup is complex and should be performed, by the
administrator, through the Call Builder Application utility
(this interface). See “Provisioning FMFM” in this chapter.
See Chapter 17 for simple FMFM configuration options.
Mbx Full Level
Sets limits in 5% increments between 55-95 percent full.
When the maximum disk space is reached, the system
sends a warning message to the mailbox.
FMFM Call Intercept
Note: FMFM is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Checking this box enables the Find Me Follow Me (FMFM)
Call Intercept feature. This feature enables the system to
prompt the caller to record a name. Then the system calls
the subscriber and announces the caller by name. The
subscriber can then either accept or reject the call. This
ensures that all calls are screened for calling party
identification before contact with the subscriber. See
“Provisioning FMFM” for more information on
configuring FMFM.
Time Zone
Identifying a Call
Processor for a
Subscriber
Selects the time zone for this subscriber from a
drop-down list.
Each telephone is associated with a call processor that enables a
subscriber to make call to and receive calls from other devices. Call
processor software is typically located at the same site as the phones that
use that call processor.
IP Messaging software may be co-located with a call processor. However,
in some distributed multi-site systems, call processors may be located at
branch sites and IP Messaging software may be located at a regional
office. By identifying the remote call processors in IP Messaging, you can
Changing Profile Settings
135
enable a single, centralized voicemail system to provide services to
subscribers provisioned on different call processors.
Redundant pairs are supported only on VCX systems.
Call processors are deployed in redundant pairs. The primary call
processor is active and handles all calls. The secondary call processor is in
standby mode and only handles calls if the primary call processor fails.
You can configure IP Messaging to recognize call processors at three
levels:
■
System — When IP Messaging software is installed and configured,
the installer is prompted to specify the IP addresses of a primary and
secondary call processor.
■
COS — You can specify the IP addresses of a primary and secondary
call processor for a Class of Service. You can also configure this
information through the IP Messaging Web provisioning interface. See
Chapter 16.
■
Subscriber — You can specify the IP addresses of a primary and
secondary call processor for an individual subscriber as described in
this section. You can also configure this information through the IP
Messaging Web provisioning interface. See “Editing Mailboxes”.
Identifying call processors in a COS or in a subscriber profile is optional.
■
If not identified in a COS or subscriber profile, IP Messaging uses the
system-wide primary and secondary call processors identified during
installation.
■
If you identify primary and secondary call processors in a COS but not
in a subscriber profile, IP Messaging uses those call processors for all
subscribers assigned to use the COS.
■
If you identify primary and secondary call processors in a COS and in a
subscriber profile, IP Messaging uses the call processors identified for
the subscriber in the profile.
To identify call processors for a subscriber profile:
1 Click Subscriber Profile on the Main menu.
The Enter Mailbox screen appears.
2 Type in a mailbox number (or select it from the drop-down menu) and
press Enter.
136
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
The Subscriber Profile screen appears.
3 Click Prof.
The Subscriber Profile 2 screen appears.
4 Click CalP.
The Call Processor Options screen appears (Figure 37).
Figure 37 Subscriber Profile Screen Call Processor Options
5 Enter the following information:
■
SIP DDD — Enter the default dialing domain for all subscribers
configured to use the call processors you will specify in the next two
fields.
■
CallP 1 — Enter the IP address of the primary call processor.
■
CallP 2 — Enter the IP address of the secondary call processor.
6 Click Exit.
Configuring Delivery
Reports and Call
Bridging Options
On the Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 33), click Drpt to access the
Delivery Report Setup and Call Bridging Options setup screen (Figure 38).
■
Delivery Report Setup enables users to generate delivery reports on
messages that they send to other users on the system. The Delivery
Report option must be enabled on the Mailbox Setup Options screen
(see “Configuring Mailbox Options”). If not, the Delivery Report Setup
half of the screen is blank.
Changing Profile Settings
■
137
Call Bridging Options allow subscribers to make outgoing calls from
their mailbox or listen to voicemail messages as they are being
recorded. See “Call Monitor” for more information on the Call
Monitor feature.
Figure 38 Delivery Report Setup and Call Bridging Screen
.
Table 26 lists the fields on the Delivery Report Setup and Call Bridging
Options screen.
Table 26 Delivery Report Setup /Call Bridging Options Fields
Field
Description
Report Option
Sets parameters that enable users to generate delivery
reports on messages that they send to other users on the
system.
All
Automatic delivery reports for all messages. The delivery is
automatic, but the subscriber will still be prompted.
Selective
After sending a message, the subscriber will have the
option of generating either a fax or a voice delivery report
by indicating such a choice at the Send Message Menu.
None
Delivery reports will not be an option.
Occurrence
Sets the frequency of report generation.
Final Report
Generates one report for all messages.
Each Dest
Generates reports for each message destination.
Report Media
Voice
Sets the media type for a report.
Selects Voice message reports.
138
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 26 Delivery Report Setup /Call Bridging Options Fields (continued)
Field
Fax
Description
Selects Fax delivery reports.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Report Style
Sets a report style.
Receipt
Indicates that the receiver listened to the message.
Non-receipt
Indicates that the receiver did not listen to the message.
Summary
Summarizes the message delivery as the number of
receivers who have listened or not listened to this
message.
Detail
Provides the date and time the message was received by
each receiver.
Expiration Time
This report provides the status of the message after the
set time in days, hours, and minutes.
Report Destination
Delivers the report to the subscriber's mailbox. Otherwise,
the system prompts you to enter the report destination
telephone or fax number.
Call Bridging Options
Monthly Time
Specifies the maximum minutes per month a subscriber
may spend on any outdial.
Time Left
Time period (in minutes) left for bridged calls until the end
of the current month.
Warning Time
Alerts the subscriber of the time left (in minutes) for any
bridged calls from this mailbox.
Transfer Digits
Number of digits a subscriber is allowed to outdial on
bridged calls.
Call Monitor
Enables the Call Monitor feature. Subscribers can listen to
incoming voicemail messages as they are recorded (a
one-way bridge), interrupt the voicemail message and
speak directly to the caller (a two-way bridge), or return to
their voicemail session.
Note: Both subscribers must be connected to the same IP
Messaging server for Call Monitor to work correctly.
See “Call Monitor” for more information.
Changing Profile Settings
139
Table 26 Delivery Report Setup /Call Bridging Options Fields (continued)
Field
Auto Attendant
Description
Enables subscribers to return to an Auto Attendant when
they press 00 from the Main menu or when callers press
#.
The Auto Attendant to which a subscriber or caller is
returned depends on the option selected for this field and
the value specified for the Default Auto Attendant field
on the System Configuration screen (see Table 45 in
Chapter 9).
■
system_default — The owner of the mailbox or
callers to the mailbox hear the Auto Attendant
specified for the Default Auto Attendant field on
the System Configuration screen. This can be the
default IP Messaging Auto Attendant or an
administrator-defined Auto Attendant (see Chapter 11
for configuration details).
■
no_return — System does not provide a prompt to
return to the Auto Attendant.
■
An administrator-defined Auto Attendant — In this
case, the owner of the mailbox or callers to the
mailbox hear the specified Auto Attendant and not the
Auto Attendant specified on the System Configuration
screen.
Call Monitor
The Call Monitor feature allows users to listen as a caller leaves a message
and even lets them connect directly to the caller. Users must be logged
into their mailbox through the TUI.
When a call is forwarded to the user’s voice mailbox, the user’s voicemail
session is interrupted. The user is then given an opportunity to monitor
the caller as they leave a message (one-way bridge) or connect to the
caller directly (two-way bridge) and interrupt the recording in process.
This works in a manner that is similar to an answering machine, where
you can listen to a message and pick up the phone before the caller
hangs up. In the same way, an interrupted recording can also be left as a
message in the user’s mailbox.
If a user isn’t logged in when the call occurs and the call forwards to
voicemail, the user can still bridge to the caller after entering their
password or start a call monitor session immediately when a password
isn’t required.
140
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Subscribers and callers must be connected to the same IP Messaging
server before a Call Monitor session can be initiated. For example, if the
user is connected to a Primary IPM server and the caller is connected to
the Secondary IPM server, then a Call Monitor event will not occur.
Call Monitor only supports one session at a time per user. If a second
caller starts to leave a message while the user is involved in a call monitor
session, then the event is queued until the current monitor session ends.
If the second caller is still leaving a message, then a new monitor session
begins. If there are multiple callers leaving messages simultaneously when
the user logs into their mailbox, the call that has been in progress for the
longest period will generate the call monitor session. Other calls in
progress are unavailable for call monitor unless the user hangs up from
his current session and logs back in.
Call Monitor events that occur while the user is bridged to a live outdial
or a Find Me Follow Me session are queued and processed after the
bridged call is ended.
Provisioning Call Monitor for a Subscriber Profile Provision Call
Monitor as follows:
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Main menu.
2 Type in the mailbox number or select it from the drop-down list.
3 Select Prof on the Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 20).
The Subscriber Profile 2 screen appears (Figure 33).
4 Select Drpt.
The Delivery Report Setup and Call Bridging Options setup screen
(Figure 38) appears.
5 Click the Call Monitor checkbox to enable Call Monitor.
6 Type Y when the system asks you to save changes.
Call Monitor can only be enabled in AppMon through the Subscriber
Profile or through a COS. However, if Call Monitor is enabled for a COS
and a subscriber profile with that COS is created in Web Provisioning,
then that subscriber will have Call Monitor enabled.
Call monitor is supported only on the 3Com Native Telephone User
Interface.
Changing Profile Settings
Linking a Mailbox to
an External Email
Account
141
You can configure a mailbox to link to external email accounts that use
the Post Office Protocol (POP3) or Internet Message Access Protocol
(IMAP).
On the Subscriber Profile screen (Figure 33), click POP3 to link the
subscriber's mailbox to other Post Office Protocol (POP3) or Internet
Message Access Protocol (IMAP) mailboxes (external e-mail carrier).
E-mail is only supported on the 3Com Native TUI. If you (or another
administrator) have selected the ftl option for the Menu Style COS
parameter (see Table 28), you should not configure any e-mail options.
To configure a mailbox for a subscriber:
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Main menu.
2 Type in the mailbox number or select it from the drop-down list.
3 Select Prof > POP3.
4 Type a session name and press Enter. The system asks:
Create Session: cti? (Y/N)
5 Type Y and press Enter to confirm the session creation.
The Email Session cti is created and the POP3 screen appears (Figure 39).
Figure 39 POP3 Screen
Table 27 lists the fields on the POP3 screen.
142
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
Table 27 Fields on the POP3 Screen
Field
Description
E-mail Address
Enter the e-mail address for the subscriber on this remote
e-mail server.
Server Name
The name of the server if the system has a Domain Name
Server (DNS). Otherwise, enter the IP address of the mail
server.
User Name
The name of the subscriber
Password
E-mail access password for this remote e-mail server.
Note: If the password is changed on the remote e-mail
account and is not changed in IP Messaging, then IP
Messaging sends a message to the external e-mail account
and informs them that their password in IP Messaging is
incorrect and needs to be changed.
Confirm
Enter the password a second time to confirm it.
Poll Interval
Enter the required hours and minutes. The polling interval
represents the time interval between retrieving (or updating)
e-mail messages from this remote e-mail server.
Protocol
POP3 and IMAP are the currently supported protocols.
Toggle between POP3 and IMAP by clicking on this field.
Poll at Login
Check this box to retrieve e-mail messages from this remote
e-mail server every time the subscriber logs in via GUI
(Graphic User Interface) or TUI (Telephone User Interface).
Synchronize
Check this box to synchronize the IPM message store with
an external e-mail message store.
Note: When synchronization is first enabled for a subscriber
with an external e-mail account, messages that already exist
in the external e-mail account are not synchronized with the
IP Messaging store. New messages that arrive after
synchronization is enabled will be synchronized.
Delete msg from
server
Check this box to delete the e-mail message from the
remote e-mail server when messages are deleted in the
subscriber IP Messaging mailbox.
Vmail Only
Check this box to enable partial (one-way) synchronization
with an external email account.
Voicemail messages on the IP Messaging server are
synchronized with a subscriber’s external email account. For
example, if messages are saved on the IP Messaging server,
they are also marked as saved on the external email account.
Conversely, external e-mail account messages are NOT
synchronized with the IP Messaging server. If new messages
are received by the external email account, they are ignored
by the IP Messaging server and cannot be reviewed through
the TUI.
Integrating a Subscriber Mailbox with an E-Mail Application
143
6 Click Save to save the mail configuration options.
If you want to delete a saved email configuration, select it from the email
session list and click the Delt button on the External Email Setup screen.
Integrating a
Subscriber Mailbox
with an E-Mail
Application
You can make a subscriber mailbox accessible to standard e-mail clients.
IP Messaging functions as a POP3 or IMAP e-mail server. This allows an
e-mail client to retrieve voicemail messages embedded as WAV file
attachments in e-mail messages. The subscriber can then access the
e-mail account and listen to the WAV attachment using any media player.
E-Mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
IP Messaging supports the following third-party e-mail applications:
■
Microsoft Outlook Express
■
Microsoft Outlook
■
IBM Lotus Notes
To enable voicemail message delivery as a WAV file attachment in an
e-mail message, configure the following parameters for a subscriber:
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Main menu.
2 Type in a mailbox number or select it from the drop-down list and press
Enter.
3 Enable the following MB Send Media and MB Receive Media options
on the Subscriber Profile screen (see Figure 20 and Table 13):
■
Email
■
POP3
■
IMAP (Receive only)
4 Enable the Personal Adr Book (optional) on the Mailbox Options Setup
screen (Prof > Opts). See “Configuring Personal Address Book Entries”,
Figure 34, and Table 24.
IP Messaging can display a sender's information in the e-mail application’s
preferences if you populate the sender's information in the subscriber’s
Personal Address Book (PAB). The subscriber can also create entries in a
PAB through the IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface. See “Personal
Address Book”.
144
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
IP Messaging can also use a PAB entry when it constructs the From: field
in a voicemail message retrieved as an e-mail. See “Constructing From:
Field Information”.
5 Configure the Email Address field (optional) on the Mailbox Options
Setup 2 screen (Prof > Opt2) if you want to use a different e-mail address
in the subscriber’s outgoing e-mail. See Figure 36 and Table 25.
If your e-mail system uses IMAP, check the appropriate message folders
(Saved, Deleted, Sent, Drafts).
6 Configure system servers (optional) by selecting System Configuration
> Srvs. See Figure 78.
Identify IP Messaging as the Reply Server (ReplySv; see Table 46). This
setting enables the system to extract the proper sender information of
the voice message. If you leave it blank, the From: field of an e-mail
containing a voice message shows <phone_number/mailbox_number>
only instead of <phone_number/mailbox_number@reply_server>.
Consequently, the subscriber cannot reply to the message.
7 Configure an e-mail account (in Outlook Express, Outlook, or Lotus
Notes) for the mailbox.
Create an IMAP or POP3 account that points to your IP Messaging
mailbox. Set the incoming mail server (IMAP or POP3) to be the IP
Messaging domain name.
You can choose to either use the IP Messaging as your outgoing server
(SMTP) or a third party server. Configure a third-party SMTP server to
allow subscribers to send e-mail messages to external destinations. If you
configure IP Messaging as your only SMTP server, subscribers can send
e-mail messages to other IP Messaging subscribers only.
Constructing From:
Field Information
When IP Messaging forwards a voicemail message as a WAV file
attachment in an e-mail message, IP Messaging can identify the voice
mail sender in the From: field of the e-mail message.
IP Messaging constructs the From: field based on what it knows about
the sender. The available information depends on whether or not the
recipient has a Personal Address Book (PAB) entry for sender.
Integrating a Subscriber Mailbox with an E-Mail Application
145
If the voicemail sender’s phone number is in the recipient’s PAB, IP
Messaging constructs the From: field using the following sequence:
■
If the e-mail address of the sender is available in the PAB, IP Messaging
uses the format first_name last_name <email_address>, based on
information in the PAB.
■
If the e-mail address of the sender is not available in the PAB and the
sender is an inside caller, the information IP Messaging uses depends
on whether the administrator has configured a value for the Reply
Server (ReplySv; see Table 46).
■
■
■
If Reply Server is configured, IP Messaging uses the format
first_name last_name <phone_number@reply_server>.
If Reply Server is not configured, IP Messaging uses the format
first_name last_name <phone_number>.
If the e-mail address of the sender is not available in the PAB and the
sender is an outside caller, IP Messaging uses the format first_name
last_name <phone_number>.
If the voicemail sender’s phone number is not in the recipient’s Personal
Address Book (PAB), IP Messaging constructs the From: field using the
following sequence:
■
If the sender is an inside caller and Reply Server is configured, IP
Messaging uses one of the following formats:
■
■
■
If the sender has a Subscriber Profile with values configured for
First Name and Last Name (see Table 13), IP Messaging uses the
format first_name last_name <phone_number@reply_server>.
If the sender has a Subscriber Profile but values are not configured
for First Name and Last Name, IP Messaging uses the format
<phone_number@reply_server>.
If the sender is an inside caller and Reply Server is not configured, IP
Messaging uses one of the following formats:
■
■
If the sender has a Subscriber Profile with values configured for
First Name and Last Name (see Table 13), IP Messaging uses the
format first_name last_name <phone_number>.
If the sender has a Subscriber Profile but values are not configured
for First Name and Last Name, IP Messaging uses the format
<phone_number>.
146
CHAPTER 5: PROVISIONING THE SUBSCRIBER PROFILE
■
Deleting a
Subscriber Profile
If the sender is an outside caller, IP Messaging uses the format
Unknown sender.
To delete a subscriber profile from the local IP Messaging server:
1 Click Delt (Delete) from the Subscriber Profile screen. The system
prompts you to confirm the deletion.
2 Type Y or N.
If you type Y, the system deletes the subscriber from the system.
PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Accessing the Class of Service Option
■
Message Delivery
■
Updating the Subscriber Records
■
Provisioning Permission Levels
■
Provisioning the Notification Feature
■
Provisioning the COS Profile
■
Creating a Class of Service
The system allows only one administrator to edit a Class of Service at a
time.
A Class of Service can be assigned permissions to not allow changes to its
parameter settings through the Class of Service or subscriber profile
settings.
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Accessing the Class
of Service Option
Class of Service (COS) is a set of parameters or general characteristics that
apply to a group of users (subscribers).
Defining a Class of Service eliminates entering duplicate profile
information for users. You can also generate reports based on a Class of
Service.
IP Messaging has three default Classes of Service: 100, 101, and 102.
Each default Class of Service has different default settings for features.
You can create a new COS, modify default Classes of Service, import a
COS from another system, export a COS to a file, reset a COS to its
148
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
default values, or initialize one or more mailboxes to a selected COS. See
“Creating a Class of Service”.
To manage Class of Service options, access the IP Messaging provisioning
interface. See “Accessing Voicemail Administration” and follow these
steps:
1 Select Class of Service from the Main menu.
The Class of Service Entry screen appears (Figure 40).
Figure 40 Class of Service Screen
2 Select a Class of Service from the drop-down list or type in the COS
number and press Enter.
The Class of Service Profile screen appears (Figure 41).
Accessing the Class of Service Option
149
Figure 41 Class of Service Profile Screen
3 Edit the fields as required. See Table 28.
Table 28 Fields on the Class of Service Profile Screen
Field
Description
Class of Service
Class of service identification
Menu Style
Select a menu style for the Telephone User Interface (TUI)
from the drop-down list. Different styles provide different
menu prompts for users when they use the voice mail
system. The supported styles are cti (the 3Com® native
style) and ftl (the traditional Octel style).
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI. If
you select ftl, do not enable any of the Email, POP3, or
IMAP options on this screen. Also, ignore the LIFO (Rev
Order) options if you select ftl.
Admin Update
Displays the date and time of the last update.
Send Msg Order
Establishes the order in which the subscriber is prompted
to record and send messages to other users.
■
Dst (Destination) — Prompts the subscriber for
message destination(s).
■
Rec (Record) — Prompts the subscriber to record a
message.
■
Opt (Options) — Prompts the subscriber for send
options.
Note: Send Msg Order is supported only on the 3Com
Native TUI.
150
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Table 28 Fields on the Class of Service Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Message Arrival
If a new message arrives when the subscriber's mailbox is
being accessed, there are three options available to notify
the subscriber of the new message.
■
Listen Menu — Notifies the subscriber when he/she
accesses the Listen menu
■
Main Menu — Notifies the subscriber when he/she
accesses the Main menu.
■
Both Menus — Notifies the subscriber when the/she
accesses the Listen and/or the Main menu.
■
None — The subscriber is not notified and the
message goes into the new message mailbox.
Note: If Call Monitor is enabled for this subscriber’s COS,
they will hear three beeps if they are logged into their
mailbox and will have the option of listening to their
caller’s message or speak directly to them. See
“Provisioning Call Monitor for a Class of Service”.
FMFM Feature
Lets you enable or disable the Find Me Follow Me (FMFM)
feature for this Class of Service from the drop-down list of
options.
■
Mailbox Only — IP Messaging creates a mailbox for
each subscriber but FMFM is not enabled.
■
FMFM + Mailbox — IP Messaging creates a mailbox
for each subscriber and enables FMFM.
Note: FMFM is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Review Options
Check the appropriate box to activate these options
during message review:
■
Sendr — Who sent the message.
■
Time — Provides the date and time stamp for the
message.
■
Save — How long the message will be saved.
■
Del — Provides a Deleted Message bin for the
subscriber.
■
Alias — Allows the subscriber to have alias mailbox
numbers that point back to the original mailbox; the
subscriber accesses messages using an alias login ID.
Accessing the Class of Service Option
151
Table 28 Fields on the Class of Service Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
MB (Mailbox) Send
Media
Check the appropriate box to activate the following
options during message review:
■
Vmail — Enables the subscriber to send voice mail
messages.
■
Phone — Enables CMD (call message delivery).
■
Fax — Enables fax printing.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
■
E-mail — Enables the subscriber to send e-mail
messages through the mailbox using the TUI.
■
POP3 — Enables IP Messaging to act as a POP3 e-mail
server.
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
MB (Mailbox) Receive
Media
Check the appropriate box to activate the following
options during message review:
■
Vmail — Enables the subscriber to receive voice mail
messages.
■
Phone — Enables message reception via personal
greeting.
■
Fax — Enables reception of fax messages.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
■
E-mail — Enables the subscriber to receive e-mail
messages through the mailbox using the TUI.
■
POP3 — Enables IP Messaging to act as a POP3 e-mail
client. This allows subscribers to retrieve messages
using a standard POP3 e-mail client such as Outlook
Express.
■
IMAP — Enables message retrieval using a standard
IMAP e-mail client such as Outlook.
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
152
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Table 28 Fields on the Class of Service Profile Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Options
Check the appropriate box to activate the following
options during message review:
■
MWI — If enabled, activates the Message Waiting
Indicator function (indicator light or stutter dial tone
on the subscriber’s phone).
■
SysPv — If enabled, gives the subscriber these system
privileges:
- Send messages to all users in a Class of Service.
- Send messages to all users in the system.
- Send messages as system messages; these messages
are not part of the mailbox count and therefore are
not purged from the system when the mailbox is full
- Create and edit system lists.
LIFO (Rev order)
■
Noti — Enables the message notification feature.
■
Urev — Enables the Auto Attendant to tell the
subscriber the total number of unreviewed messages
in the subscriber's mailbox. Otherwise, the Auto
Attendant gives only the total number of messages in
the mailbox.
■
Tutor — Activates the tutorial the next time the
subscriber accesses his/her mailbox (any mailbox in this
Class of Service). The system clears this field
automatically after the tutorial runs.
(Rev order) Sets up the order (Last In First Out) in which
messages are reviewed.
■
Old — If this box is checked, the old messages (saved
and deleted messages in the mailbox) can be reviewed
in the Last In First Out order and if unchecked, FIFO
(First In First Out) order.
■
New — If this box is checked, the new messages
(reviewed and unreviewed messages in the mailbox)
can be reviewed in the Last In First Out order and if
unchecked, FIFO (First In First Out) order.
■
Email — If this box is checked, e-mail messages
downloaded from an external e-mail server (see
“Linking a Mailbox to an External Email Account”) can
be reviewed in the Last In First Out order and if
unchecked, FIFO (First In First Out) order.
Note: LIFO is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Table 29 lists the buttons on the Class of Service Profile screen.
Accessing the Class of Service Option
153
.
Table 29 Buttons on the Class of Service Profile Screen
Button
Description
Delv
Delivery — Message delivery options for the Class of Service. See
“Message Delivery”.
Updt
Provides a list of features that can be activated on user records as a
class.
Perm
Permissions — Defines what can be seen or modified in the Class of
Service screens. See “Provisioning the COS Profile”.
Noti
Notification — Parameters that define how (schedule type and
timeframe) a subscriber is notified when a message is received in the
mailbox. See “Provisioning the Notification Feature”.
Prof
Profile — Summarizes all the parameters and values associated with
a Class of Service. See “Provisioning the COS Profile”.
Delt
Delete — Deletes the Class of Service and its parameters.
Exit
Exit — Prompts you to save any changes (if you made any) or
presents the Class of Service Entry screen.
154
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Message Delivery
This section describes the Message Delivery function.
To provision Message Delivery:
1 Click Delv (Delivery) on the Class of Service Profile screen (Figure 41).
The Delivery Options screen appears (Figure 42).
Figure 42 Class of Service Delivery Options Screen
2 Fill in the fields as required (see Table 30).
3 Click Exit to save the changes.
Table 30 Fields on the Delivery Options Screen
Field
Description
Maximum Retries
Specifies the number of times the system tries to deliver the
voice or fax message.
Retry Interval (sec)
Specifies the time (in seconds) between each message
delivery attempt.
Voice AutoDelivery
Check this box to enable the Voice message delivery feature
for this Class of Service. Voice message notification is
automatically delivered to the voice number entered in the
Voice Number field on the Delivery Options screen under the
Subscriber Profile option. See “Setting Delivery Options”.
Message Delivery
155
Table 30 Fields on the Delivery Options Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Fax AutoDelivery
Check this box to enable the Fax message delivery feature for
this Class of Service. Fax message notification is automatically
delivered to either a fax number (if you select Fax Number) or
printer (if you select Printer Name).
You specify the fax number or printer on the Delivery
Options screen under the Subscriber Profile option. See
“Setting Delivery Options”.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
E-mail Auto delivery
Check this box to enable the e-mail message delivery feature
for this Class of Service. E-mail message notification is
automatically delivered to the e-mail address entered in the
E-mail Address field on the Delivery Options screen under the
Subscriber Profile option. See “Setting Delivery Options”.
Note: E-mail is supported on the 3Com Native Interface only.
After Delivery
Select what you want the system to do after a message is
delivered:
Leave New — The system delivers the voice message to the
voice number listed on the Subscriber Profile screen (see
Figure 24) and also puts it into the subscriber’s mailbox as a
new message.
Save — The system delivers the voice message to the voice
number listed on the Subscriber Profile screen (see Figure 24)
and also puts it into the subscriber’s mailbox as a saved
message.
Delete — The system delivers the voice message to the voice
number listed on the Subscriber Profile screen (see Figure 24)
and also puts it into the subscriber’s mailbox as a deleted
message.
Digits Allowed
The maximum number of digits allowed for the voice or fax
Auto Delivery number. This controls the long distance calling
from a mailbox.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Fax Number
Enables automatic fax message notification delivery to a fax
number. See Fax Auto Delivery above.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Printer Name
Enables automatic fax message notification delivery to a
printer. See Fax Auto Delivery above.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
156
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Table 30 Fields on the Delivery Options Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Line Turnaround
Check this box to enable the detection of a fax receive tone.
This allows subscribers to dial into their mailbox from a fax
machine and print their faxes.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
CNG Tone
Comfort Noise Generation — Click this box to enable the
automatic detection of a fax send tone; this allows the
receipt of faxes.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Urgent voice msg
only
Updating the
Subscriber Records
Click this box to enable the Auto Delivery feature for voice
messages marked as urgent only.
After changes are made to the Class of Service subscriber profile, the
changes must be applied by updating the Class of Service records. Each
item listed on Update screen is an item that exists in the Class of Service
and Subscriber Profile screens. Select the item to be updated.
This option is used if additional changes need to be made to the Class of
Service after the initial Class of Service was defined.
To update the Class of Service records:
1 From the Class of Service Profile screen (Figure 41) click Updt (update) to
update subscriber records with current Class of Service changes.
The Class of Service Update User Records screen (Figure 43) appears. The
list on the right shows the fields that can be updated.
Updating the Subscriber Records
157
Figure 43 Update User Records Screen
2 Check the corresponding Updt box on the left.
3 Click the appropriate button at the bottom of the screen. See Table 31 for
button descriptions.
Click the Updt button to save the update before you click the Exit
button.
Table 31 Buttons on the Update Records Screen
Field
Description
Updt
Updates subscribers with the current Class of Service and uses the
values in the selected fields.
Sel
Selects all the fields in the list.
Dsel
Deselects all the fields in the list.
Exit
Closes this screen and displays the Class of Service screen.
158
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Provisioning
Permission Levels
To define the level of access for updating Class of Service and Subscriber
Profile screens, use the Perm (permission) button on the Class of Service
Profile screen (Figure 41). Each parameter in the drop-down list of
Permissions screens is a parameter that exists in the Class of Service and
Subscriber Profile screens.
By defining one of the four levels of access, a senior administrator can
define how other administrators may access and update these
parameters on the Class of Service and Subscriber Profile screens. These
settings determine the Class of Service parameters that can be changed
for a Class of Service.
To define the access level of the Class of Service records:
1 Click Perm to set the permission levels for the features for this Class of
Service group (Figure 44). The list on the right shows the fields for the
permissions.
Figure 44 Permissions Screen
2 Check the corresponding settings box on the left. Table 32 lists the
Permission Settings.
Table 32 Permissions Settings
Permission
Description
Hard
Check this box to hide the associated Class of Service parameter on
the Class of Service and Subscriber Profile screens.
Provisioning the Notification Feature
159
Table 32 Permissions Settings (continued)
Permission
Description
View
Check this box to display the associated Class of Service parameter
on the Class of Service and Subscriber Profile screens, but to
prevent the parameter from being edited.
Firm
Check this box to display the associated Class of Service parameter
on the Class of Service and Subscriber Profile screens and to allow
the parameter to be edited on the Class of Service screen only.
Soft
Check this box to display the associated Class of Service parameter
on the Class of Service and Subscriber Profile screens and to allow
the parameter to be edited on both the Class of Service and the
Subscriber Profile screens.
3 Click Exit to return to the Class of Service Profile main menu.
Provisioning the
Notification Feature
The Notification feature enables IP Messaging to inform users when
messages are deposited and retrieved from their mailboxes. You can set
up multiple standard notification methods and configure them on a
system-wide basis (Class of Service) or for individual mailboxes (by
modifying a subscriber profile. See Chapter 5.
IP Messaging supports the following standard notification methods:
■
Voice — Subscriber is notified by a voice message
■
E-mail — Subscriber is notified by an e-mail.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
Socket Connection (SIP notify) — Notification can be sent to a
specified machine and port. This also offers three data formats for
notification.
■
Auto Copy Fwd — Forwards an incoming message to the e-mail
address specified.
■
Pager — Subscriber is notified by a page. This also provides
customizable support for pager notification on a Class of Service or
subscriber basis
■
NBX MWI — Subscriber is notified through the 3Com NBX system.
To configure the notification feature:
1 From the Class of Service Profile screen (Figure 41), click Noti.
The Notification Procedure Administration screen appears (Figure 45).
160
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Figure 45 Notification Procedure Administration Screen
The Notification Procedure Administration screen shows the notification
types enabled by default for the current Class of Service. You select a
notification type on the next screen (Figure 46), but you can determine
which types are available by selecting or deselecting types on this screen.
See Table 21 in Chapter 5 for a description of the different notification
media types.
2 Type the name of a new Notification Procedure and then press Enter.
3 Enter the information for your procedure on the next screen (Figure 46).
For detailed information on Select Type pull-down types, see
“Provisioning FMFM”
Provisioning the Notification Feature
161
Figure 46 Class of Service Notification Screen
4 Click Filt and on the next screen (see Figure 47), set the parameters for
filters.
Figure 47 Filter Administration Screen
5 Click Schld to set a schedule for the filter. See “Setting the Notification
Schedule” for detailed information.
6 Click Exit to save the changes.
162
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Provisioning the
COS Profile
The Class of Service Profile screen defines mailbox parameters. The Profile
screen and other screens accessed from the Profile screen define mailbox
attributes such as capacity, how long messages are saved, password
attributes, Personal Address Book (PAB) management, and delivery
reports.
If your environment includes multiple call processors (for example, at
multiple remote sites), you can configure IP Messaging to act as a single,
centralized voicemail system by recognizing the call processors at the
remote sites. See “Identifying a Call Processor for a Subscriber”.
To set the COS profile:
1 From the Class of Service Profile main menu, click Prof.
The Class of Service Profile 2 screen appears (Figure 48).
Figure 48 Class of Service Profile 2 Screen
2 Fill in the fields as required. See Table 33 for COS Profile 2 field
descriptions.
Table 33 Fields on the COS Profile 2 Screen
Field
Description
Maximum Record Time (seconds)
Per Message
Maximum seconds allowed per message
All Messages
Maximum seconds allowed for storage of all
messages
Provisioning the COS Profile
163
Table 33 Fields on the COS Profile 2 Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Name Announcement
Maximum seconds allowed for a name
announcement
Personal Greeting
Maximum seconds allowed for a personal
greeting
Warning
Maximum seconds allowed for warning. This is
the number of seconds before the end of the
allotted message time, when the system displays
the seconds left before termination.
All Messages in kb
Maximum size allowed in Kilo Bytes for all
messages
Maximum Count Parameters
Distribution Lists
Maximum number of distribution lists allowed
New Messages
Maximum number of new messages allowed
Entries Per List
Maximum number of entries per list allowed
Saved Messages
Maximum number of saved messages allowed
Personal Greetings
Maximum number of personal greetings
allowed
Max Messages
Maximum number of messages allowed to be
stored in this mailbox
Retention Parameters (days)
Entry Attempts
Maximum number of entry attempts allowed
New Messages
Number of days new messages will be saved
Saved Messages
Number of days saved messages will be saved
Deleted Messages
Number of days deleted messages will be saved
Password Life
Number of days the password is valid
Other
Min Password Len
Minimum number of characters in a password
Max Password Len
Maximum number of characters in a password
Min Message Len
Minimum length of the message in seconds.
Max Future Deliv
Maximum number of days to schedule a future
delivery
3 To continue setting the parameters, click Opts.
The first Mailbox Options Setup screen appears (Figure 49).
164
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Figure 49 First Mailbox Options Setup Screen
4 Check the appropriate checkboxes. See Table 34 for Mailbox Setup
Screen field descriptions.
Table 34 Fields on the Mailbox Setup Screen
Field
Description
Multiuser Mailbox Settings
Max Sub-Mailboxes
A maximum of 999 submailboxes is allowed. The
typical range is 1 to 10.
Existing Sub-Mlbxes
Displays the number of current active
sub-mailboxes.
Sub-Mbx Monitor
Allows the Root mailbox to monitor the sub
mailboxes / partitions.
Auto Forward
Messages left in the root mailbox will be
auto-forwarded to each of the active partitions
and deleted.
Voice Form Mailbox Settings
Form Mailbox
Check to enable this mailbox to function as a Form
Mailbox.
Transcription Mbx
Check to enable this mailbox to function as a
Transcription Mailbox.
Auto Attendant Level Settings
CallBack Number
If this box is checked, the Auto Attendant options
for the TUI (Telephone User Interface) will prompt
the caller to enter a call back telephone number.
Provisioning the COS Profile
165
Table 34 Fields on the Mailbox Setup Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Recording Prompt
If this box is checked, the Auto Attendant TUI will
prompt the caller to record the message after the
prompt.
Back to Attendant
If this box is checked, the caller will be provided
with an option to go back to the Auto Attendant
menu after recording a message.
Busy Greetings
If this box is checked, this subscriber will have the
option to record a greeting to be played when the
subscriber’s phone is busy.
Extended Absence
If this box is checked, this subscriber will have the
option to record Extended Absence Greeting
Message to be played at a specified time range.
Other Option Settings
Reply Attachment
The available drop-down list of options are
All/Selective/None.
All: The original message will be attached to the
reply message and there will be no prompt to
provide an option for this attachment.
Selective: There will be a prompt for each reply
that ask if the original message needs to be
attached to the reply.
None: There will be no prompt and the original
message will not be attached to the reply
Message on Demand
Enables or disables the Message on Demand
option for this subscriber.
Node Level of MOD
NOTE: This entry is enabled only if the Message
On Demand option is checked.
Enter the number of node levels required for this
subscriber's Message On Demand Menu tree
setup.
Personal Adr Book
Enables or disables the personal address book
feature for this mailbox. When you check the
Personal Address Book checkbox, the Addr
(Address) button appears on the Subscriber Profile
screen. See “Configuring Personal Address Book
Entries”.
Login w/o passcode
Enables or disables the capability to log-in to the
mailbox without a password.
Prompt for mailbox
Enables the prompt for the mailbox number.
166
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Table 34 Fields on the Mailbox Setup Screen (continued)
Field
Select Language
Description
When enabled, allows the subscriber to select the
language used for IP Messaging voice prompts
when the subscriber sets up his or her mailbox.
This option appears only if you have installed voice
prompts in more than one language. See “Adding
a Set of Language Prompts”.
Notification Admin
Check this box to enable the subscriber's Message
Notification option.
Delivery Report
Enable or disable Delivery Report option for this
subscriber by checking or unchecking this box. See
below for more information.
Information Only
Checking this box will enable to set this Mailbox as
an INFORMATION ONLY Mailbox, where this
mailbox can contain only information messages
and cannot be used as a regular subscriber
mailbox with all the other features.
No Search By Name
If this box is checked, the search mailbox by name
(Name Directory) option will be disabled.
Provisioning the COS Profile
Delivery Reports
167
Configure delivery reports as follows:
1 Click Drpt to see Delivery Report Setup and Call Bridging Options.
The Delivery Report Setup and Call Bridging Options screen appears
(Figure 50).
Figure 50 Delivery Report Setup and Call Bridging Options Screen
2 Fill in the fields as required. Table 35 lists the Delivery Report field
descriptions.
Table 35 Fields on the Delivery Report Setup Screen
Field
Description
Report Option
By clicking on the down arrow, the administrator can
select from the following parameters that enable the
subscriber to generate delivery reports on messages
that he/she sends to other users on the system.
None
Delivery reports will not be an option.
All
Automatic delivery reports for all messages. The
delivery is automatic, but the subscriber is still
prompted.
Selective
After sending a message, the subscriber can generate a
fax or a voice delivery report by indicating a choice at
the Send Message Menu.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
168
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Table 35 Fields on the Delivery Report Setup Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Occurrence
Clicking on the down arrow allows a selection of Final
Report for a single report generated for all the
messages or Each Dest(ination) for generating a report
for each message destination.
Report Media
Clicking on the down arrow provides an option to
select Voice (for a voice message report) or Fax (to fax
the delivery report).
Report Style
Clicking on the down arrow allows selection of Report
Style options.
Receipt
Report indicates that the recipient listened to the
message.
Non-receipt
Report indicates that the recipient did not listen to the
message.
Summary
Report summarizes message delivery as the number of
recipient who listened to or did not listen to this
message.
Detail
Report gives the date and time of message receipt by
each recipient.
Expiration Time
Delivery Report gives the status of the message
delivered after the set time in days, hours, and
minutes.
Report Destination
Check Mailbox to deliver the report to the subscriber's
mailbox. If you do not check this box, the system
prompts you to enter the report destination telephone
or fax number.
Call Bridging Options
Monthly Time
Maximum Monthly Allowance call time. This indicates
the maximum time in minutes per month that a
subscriber may make outbound calls through IP
Messaging (available to the subscriber as TUI option 6
when the cti menu interface is enabled. See Table 28.
Time Left
Time in minutes left for bridged calls until the end of
the current month.
Warning Time
Time in minutes to warn the subscriber that this is the
time left for any bridged calls from this mailbox.
Transfer Digits
Number of digits that a subscriber is allowed to outdial
on bridged calls.
Provisioning the COS Profile
169
Table 35 Fields on the Delivery Report Setup Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Call Monitor
Enables the Call Monitor feature. Subscribers can listen
to incoming voicemail messages as they are recorded
(a one-way bridge), interrupt the voicemail message
and speak directly to the caller (a two-way bridge), or
return to their voicemail session.
Note: Both subscribers must be connected to the same
IP Messaging server for Call Monitor to work correctly.
See “Call Monitor” in Chapter 5 and “Provisioning Call
Monitor for a Class of Service” for more information.
3 To continue setting the parameters for the message, click OPT2.
The Mailbox Options Setup 2 screen appears (Figure 51).
Figure 51 Fields on the Opts Setup 2 Screen
4 Fill in the fields as required. See Table 36 for a description of the Options
Setup 2 fields.
170
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Table 36 Fields on the Options Setup 2 Screen
Field
Description
Global Voicemail
Enables global voicemail integration for a subscriber,
which ensures that a subscriber’s mailbox is accessible to
all remote and branch offices in an installation. This
feature is available on both Global Voicemail Central
Servers and servers in regional and branch offices.
Note: Global voicemail is supported only on VCX
systems.
Folders
Creates one or more IMAP folders, available through an
e-mail client when the appropriate box is checked:
Note: E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Saved
Saved messages can be stored separately in this folder.
Deleted
Deleted messages can be stored separately in this folder.
Sent
Sent messages can be stored separately in this folder.
Drafts
Draft messages can be stored separately in this folder.
Email Address
Specifies an e-mail address for an IMAP account.
Other Options
Speech Recognition
Not supported in this release.
Auto Play Disabled
Checking this box disables the Auto Play feature for this
mailbox.
The Auto Play feature starts playing all the unreviewed
messages in the subscriber's mailbox as soon as the
subscriber accesses his/her mailbox.
Purge Deleted
Messages
Checking this box purges the deleted messages from the
Deleted Messages folder. When a message is purged, it
cannot be retrieved.
MSgsm Format
Checking this box compresses the audio wave file
attachments to the e-mail messages using the Microsoft
GSM (Global System for Mobile) communications
standards. This result in smaller file size while sending or
receiving e-mail messages with audio wav files.
Name Dial 3 tries
Checking this box allow three tries for dial by name calls.
This applies only for sending messages from this mailbox.
No Tel Num in SBN
No telephone number in Search By Name (SBN) feature. If
checked, the system does not identify this mailbox
owner's telephone number and includes only the name in
the directory. When a caller requests a directory search,
he/she hears only the name of this mailbox owner.
MWI Off When No
New
Message Waiting Indication (MWI) remains off if there are
no new messages in the mailbox.
No Print Opts Menu
This disables the Print Options menu.
Provisioning the COS Profile
171
Table 36 Fields on the Options Setup 2 Screen (continued)
Field
Description
FMFM Advanced
Setup
Advanced setup is available.
Mbx Full Level
When the maximum disk space percentage is reached,
the system sends a warning message to the mailbox.
FMFM Call Intercept
Checking this box enables the Find Me Follow Me (FMFM)
call intercept feature. This feature enables the system to
prompt the caller to record a name. Then the system calls
the subscriber and announces the caller by name. The
subscriber can then either accept or reject the call. This
ensures that all calls are screened for calling party
identification before contact with the subscriber. See
Chapter 17 for more information on configuring FMFM.
Note: FMFM is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
5 Configure specific call processors for a COS by pressing CalP. The
instructions for identifying call processors is identical to the one for
individual subscribers. See “Identifying a Call Processor for a Subscriber”
for more information.
Provisioning Call Monitor for a Class of Service
Provision Call Monitor for a COS as follows:
1 Select Class of Service from the Main menu.
2 Type in the COS number or select it from the drop-down list.
3 Click Prof on the Class of Service Profile screen (Figure 41).
The Class of Service Profile 2 screen appears (Figure 48).
4 Click Drpt.
The Delivery Report Setup and Call Bridging Options setup screen
(Figure 50) appears.
5 Click the Call Monitor checkbox to enable Call Monitor.
6 Press Exit until the system asks:
Update Users’ Records? (Y/N)
7 Type Y and press Enter to save changes.
The COS Profile - Update User Records screen displays (Figure 52) with
the box next to Call Monitor checked.
172
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
Figure 52 COS Profile - Update User Records (Call Monitor)
8 Press Exit. The system asks:
Save Changes? (Y/N)
9 Type Y to save the changes and then press Enter and Exit to return to
the Main menu.
Call Monitor can only be enabled in AppMon through the Subscriber
Profile or through a COS. However, if call monitor is enabled for a COS
and a subscriber profile with that COS is created in Web Provisioning,
then that subscriber will have Call Monitor enabled.
Call Monitor is supported only on the 3Com Native Telephone User
Interface.
See “Call Monitor” in Chapter 5 for detailed information on how the Call
Monitor feature functions.
Creating a Class of Service
Creating a Class of
Service
173
IP Messaging provides three Classes of Service: 100, 101, and 102. You
can modify one of the provided Classes of Service or create a new one.
The maximum is 10,000 classes of service.
To create a Class of Service:
1 From the Main menu, click Class of Service.
The Class of Service Entry screen appears (Figure 53).
Figure 53 Class of Service Entry Screen
2 In the Enter Class of Service Number field, type a new Class of Service
number and then press Enter. The following message appears:
Class of Service <xxx> not found - Add? (Y/N)
If two subscriber profiles have the same Class of Service number, then
they should have the same Class of Service parameters. It is technically
possible to have the same Class of Service number but different profile
parameters because the subscriber profile can override the Class of
Service settings. However, this approach for managing subscribers is not
recommended.
3 Type y (yes) to confirm the addition of a Class of Service
4 Click Enter.
5 Select a default template or an existing Class of Service from the
drop-down list. The selected item is used as a base for the new Class of
Service.
174
CHAPTER : PROVISIONING CLASS OF SERVICE
6 Click Enter. The Class of Service Profile screen for the Class of Service you
selected appears.
7 Make changes as required. Click Exit when finished.
8 Click Exit again to return to the Main menu.
Table 37 describes the buttons on the Class of Service Entry screen.
Table 37 Class of Service Entry Screen Buttons
Button
Description
Impt
Imports a Class of Service that has been previously exported
to a file. The system prompts you to enter the path to the
exported COS.
Expt
Exports the selected Class of Service to a file. By default, the
exported file is saved to /usr/app/app.dir.
RSet
Resets the selected Class of Service to the default COS.
Init
Initializes the mailboxes based on the selected Class of
Service Profile.
6
REPORTS
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Accessing the Reports Screen
■
All Subscribers
■
NPA Subscribers
■
NPA-NXX Subscribers
■
Subscribers by Company/Division
■
All Classes of Service
■
ID Class of Service
■
Administrators
■
Message Time Stats
■
Port Usage Stats
■
Mailbox Usage Stats
■
Disk Usage by Message Type
■
Idle Mailboxes and Active Mailboxes
■
Call Processing By Mbx
■
Call Processing By Port
■
Initialized Mailboxes
■
Failed Login Attempts
■
System Information
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
176
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
Accessing the
Reports Screen
Select Reports from the Main menu to access reports. Figure 54 shows
the first 12 report types and Figure 55 shows the last 6 report types.
Figure 54 Report Types Screen (First 12 Options)
.
Figure 55 Report Types Screen (With Last 6 Options)
Generating a Report
Generating a
Report
177
Generate a report as follows:
1 Select a report type from the Report Types drop-down menu.
2 Press Enter or click GenR to generate a report.
3 The system will prompt you to enter S for a screen report or F to send the
report to a file:
■
To see the report on the screen, type S and press Enter. The system
displays the requested report.
■
To send the report to a file, type F and press Enter.
The system sends the report to a file and displays the report’s filename
in the following format:
<username>.<ext>
where username is the username you entered to access the
application and ext depends on the type of report generated. For
example, a Class of Service report is written to a file with the .cos
extension.
Some reports (such as Failed Login Attempts) will display the file path
after the report is generated.
Other reports, such as Port Usage Stats, give you the option of displaying
a list of all reports written to files by pressing the Hist button. Hist
provides the following options:
■
View - press V and select a report to view from the drop-down list.
■
Purge - press P and select a report to purge from the drop-down list.
■
Purge All - press A to delete all existing reports from the system.
The system can store only one report in a given file format (for example,
.cos). When you select F, the system overwrites any other report stored in
this file format.
178
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
Setting a Schedule
Some reports allow you to set up a report generation schedule. For
example, you can set up a report generation schedule for the Port Usage
Stats report.
To set up a report schedule:
1 Select a report on the Report Types menu.
2 Click Schd.
The AutoReport Schedule screen appears (Figure 56).
Figure 56 AutoReport Schedule Screen
3 Click the schedule period you want from the list and then press Enter.
Figure 57 shows the screen that appears and uses the Port Usage Stats
report as an example.
Setting a Schedule
179
Figure 57 Interval Setting Screen
4 E-mail the report by checking Email Report and entering an e-mail
address.
E-mail is supported on the 3Com® Native Telephone User Interface (TUI)
only.
5 Set a report interval as follows:
a Click SetI (Set Interval).
b Select a day from the drop-down list.
c Click the down arrow in the From field and select the starting time.
d Click the down arrow in the To field and select the ending time.
e Click AddI (Add Interval).
f To delete a selection, click Cncl (Cancel).
6 Click Done and Exit when you are finished. The system prompts you to
save your changes.
7 Type Y (yes), or N (no) or C (cancel), then press Enter. The previous screen
appears.
8 Click Exit. The Report Types menu appears.
See Table 41 in the “Port Usage Stats” section for a description of the
ClrA, SetI, and Hist buttons.
180
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
All Subscribers
To generate reports about all subscribers:
1 Click All Subscribers on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or press
GenR to generate a report.
2 Type S and press Enter to display the report on the screen.
Figure 58 shows the report for all subscribers. If necessary, use the down
arrow key on your keyboard to scroll to the end of the list.
Figure 58 All Subscribers Report
Table 38 lists the fields on the All Subscribers report.
Table 38 Fields on the Report Types Screen
Field
Description
Report_Name
The system automatically generates the name
(rep0) for each report.
Report_Type
Displays the selected report type; SUB_ALL in
this case for the All Subscribers Report
selected from the Reports menu.
Login
Displays the login name of the administrator
who is requesting the report.
Timestamp
Displays the date and time the report was
generated.
Record_Count
Displays the number of mailboxes in this
report.
NPA Subscribers
181
Table 38 Fields on the Report Types Screen (continued)
NPA Subscribers
Field
Description
Mailbox/COS
Displays the mailbox number and its Class Of
Service.
Last Name/First Name
Displays the last and first names of the
mailbox owners for each mailbox.
Last_User_Updt/Last_Admin_Updt
Displays the date and time of the most recent
update by the subscriber or the System
Administrator.
To generate reports about Numbering Plan Area (NPA) subscribers:
1 Click NPA Subscribers on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or press
GenR to generate a report.
2 Type S and press Enter to display the report on the screen.
This prompt appears:
Enter the NPA sort designator:
3 Type the NPA you want and press Enter.
Figure 59 shows the screen that appears. Table 38 lists the fields on the
screen.
Figure 59 NPA Subscriber Screen
182
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
NPA-NXX
Subscribers
To generate reports about NPA-NXX subscribers (area code plus exchange
number):
1 Click NPA-NXX Subscribers on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or
press GenR to generate a report.
2 Type S and press Enter to display the report on the screen.
This prompt appears:
Enter the NPA-NXX sort designator:
3 Type the NPA-NXX you want and press Enter. The NPA-NXX Report
screen appears. It is very similar to Figure 59.
Table 38 lists the fields on the screen.
Subscribers by
Company/Division
To generate reports about subscribers by company or division:
1 Click Subscribers by Company/Division on the Report Types menu.
Press Enter or press GenR to generate a report.
2 Type S and press Enter to display the report on the screen.
3 Select a company/division from the displayed lists.
Figure 60 shows the screen that appears.
Figure 60 Company/Division Screen
All Classes of Service
183
See Table 38 and Table 39 for information about the fields on this screen.
Table 39 Fields for Company/Division
All Classes of
Service
Fields
Description
Subscriber_Updt /
Last_Admin_Updt
Displays the date and time of the most recent update by
the subscriber in this company and division; also shows the
date and time of the most recent update by the system
administrator
Company/Division
Lists the name of the company or the division
To generate reports about subscribers by all classes of service:
1 Click All Classes of Service on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or
press GenR to generate a report.
2 Type S and press Enter to display the report on the screen.
Figure 61 shows the screen that appears. Table 38 lists the fields on the
screen (not all the fields in the table apply to this screen).
This screen shows a list of features in the first column and the classes of
service in the next three columns. An X means that the status is enabled.
Figure 61 Report Screen for All Classes of Service
184
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
ID Class of Service
To generate reports about subscribers by ID class of service:
1 Click ID Class of Service on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or press
GenR to generate a report.
2 Type S and press Enter to display the report on the screen.
This prompt appears.
Enter the COS, F1 for list.
3 Type in the Class of Service or press F1 and select the Class of Service
from the list.
4 Press Enter.
Figure 62 shows the screen that appears. Table 38 lists the fields on the
screen (not all the fields in the table apply to this screen).
The first column on this screen shows a list of mailboxes for this Class of
Service. The other columns show the corresponding subscriber’s name,
the date and time of the subscriber's last update, the date and time of
the administrator's last update, and the associated company name for
each mailbox.
Figure 62 ID Class of Service Screen
Administrators
Administrators
185
To generate reports about Administrators:
1 Click Administrators on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or press
GenR to generate a report.
2 Type S and press Enter to display the report on the screen.
The main report section shows the administrator's name in the first
column and the corresponding login ID, login expiration date, and pager
and telephone numbers. See Table 38 for descriptions of the remaining
fields.
Message Time Stats
To generate reports about time statistics for messages:
1 Click Message Time Stats on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or
press GenR to generate a report.
2 Type S and press Enter to display the report on the screen.
This prompt appears:
For All, Npa, npa-nxx? (A/N/X)
3 Enter the selection you want and press Enter.
Figure 63 shows the screen that appears if you type A.
If you enter N or X, the system prompts you for an NPA sort designator.
Figure 63 Message Time Stats Screen
186
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
Table 38 lists the standard fields on this screen. Table 40 lists the new
fields.
Table 40 Fields on the Message Type Statistics Screen
Port Usage Stats
Field
Description
URGT SEC
Number of urgent messages for this mailbox and the total time in
seconds.
NEW SEC
Number of new messages for this mailbox and the time in seconds.
SAVE SEC
Number of saved messages for this mailbox and the total time in
seconds.
DEL SEC
Number of deleted messages for this mailbox and the total time in
seconds.
FAX PG
Number of fax messages for this mailbox and the total number of
pages.
To generate reports about port usage statistics:
1 Click Port Usage Stats on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or press
GenR to generate a report.
This prompt appears:
Select MSU or type ‘A’ for all.
2 Type a specific MSU (or select it from the displayed list) or type A.
3 Press Enter.
Figure 64 shows the screen that appears.
Figure 64 Port Usage Statistics
Port Usage Stats
187
Table 41 lists the buttons on the Port Usage Statistics screen.
Table 41 Buttons on the Port Usage Statistics Screen
Button
Description
ClrA
Deletes all the defined or set time intervals.
SetI (Set interval)
Enables you to define the time interval for the port usage
activity report. Click this button to display a drop-down list
of the days to select. Normal is the default (12 am to 12
am) or Normal sets the report collection for the day
selected under Frequency.
Select the time interval from the drop-down list of From
and To.
Hist (History)
Click Hist to view or purge any previously generated
report. Select the report to view or purge from the
drop-down list displayed by the system and press Enter.
GenR (Generate
Report)
Click GenR to generate a report now. Select the valid data
time range from a list. The system verifies that a report has
been generated.
The system stores a Port Usage Stats report in this filename format:
psnnddhh.mm
■
ps — Indicates a port statistics report. Other report types include:
■
ph — Indicates a port history report.
■
sh — Indicates a subscriber history report.
■
md — Indicates a disk usage by message type report.
■
if — Indicates a mailbox login failure report.
■
lu — Indicates a mailbox last usage report.
■
si — Indicates a initialized mailbox report.
■
nn — Indicates the month.
■
dd — Indicates the day.
■
hh — Indicates the hour.
■
mm — Indicates the minutes.
See “Setting a Schedule” for detailed instructions on how this report
screen functions.
188
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
Mailbox Usage
Stats
To generate a report about mailbox usage statistics:
1 Click Mailbox Usage Stats on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or
press GenR to generate a report.
The following prompt appears:
Enter Mbx to filter:
2 Enter a mailbox number in the text box or select a mailbox from the
drop-down list.
3 Press Enter.
4 Click SetI and select the time period for this report from the drop-down
list. See “Setting a Schedule” for detailed instructions on setting intervals.
5 Press Done when you are finished setting an interval.
The functions of ClrA, SetI, Hist, and GenR are described in Table 41 in
the “Port Usage Stats” section.
To set a schedule for this report, see “Mailbox Usage Stats”.
Disk Usage by
Message Type
To generate a report about disk usage by message type:
1 Click Disk Usage By Message Type on the Report Types menu. Press
Enter or press GenR to generate a report.
The Instant Report Details screen appears. You have the following
options:
■
To e-mail the report, click the check box, enter an e-mail address, and
click GenR.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
To see a report, click GenR. The following message appears and then
the report is displayed (Figure 65).
Report Requested... Esc to Cancel.
Idle Mailboxes and Active Mailboxes
189
Figure 65 Disk Usage by Message Type
2 Press Exit to return to the previous screen. The following message
appears:
Report is available in <directory/filename>.
(Press a key to continue)
3 Press Hist to see a list of all saved reports. Hist provides the following
options:
■
View - press V and select a report to view from the drop-down list.
■
Purge - press P and select a report to purge from the drop-down list.
■
Purge All - press A to delete all existing reports from the system.
4 To set a schedule for this report, press Schd on the Instant Report Details
screen. See “Mailbox Usage Stats”.
Idle Mailboxes and
Active Mailboxes
To generate a report on idle and active mailbox statistics:
1 Click Idle Mailboxes or Active Mailboxes on the Report Types menu.
Press Enter or press GenR to generate a report.
The Instant Report Details screen appears. You have the following
options:
■
To e-mail the report, click the check box, enter an e-mail address, and
click GenR.
190
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
See a report by clicking GenR.
A pop-up box appears with a list of time ranges.
2 Select a time range from the drop-down list and double-click it. The
following message displays:
Report Requested...ESC to Cancel.
The report is then displayed on screen. Figure 66 shows an example of an
Idle Mailboxes report.
Figure 66 Idle Mailboxes Report
3 Click Exit. This message appears:
Report is available in <directory/filename>.
(Press a key to continue)
4 To see a list of all saved reports, press Hist. See step 3 through step 4 in
“Disk Usage by Message Type”.
5 To set a schedule for this report, see “Mailbox Usage Stats”.
Call Processing By Mbx
Call Processing By
Mbx
191
To generate a report containing call processing information (such as
mailbox login history or mailbox message deposit):
1 Click Call Processing By Mbx on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or
press GenR to generate a report.
2 Enter a mailbox number in the text box or select a mailbox from the
drop-down list.
The Instant Report Details screen appears with the mailbox number
displayed in the Filter Mbx: field. You have the following options:
■
To e-mail the report, click the check box, enter an e-mail address, and
click GenR.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
To see the report, click GenR.
A pop-up box appears with a list of time ranges.
3 Select a time range from the drop-down list and double-click it. The
following message displays:
Report Requested...ESC to Cancel.
The report is then displayed on screen. Figure 67 shows an example of a
calls processed by mailbox report for mailbox 631102.
Figure 67 Call Processing by Mbx Report
192
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
4 Click Exit. This message appears:
Report is available in <directory/filename>.
(Press a key to continue)
5 To see a list of all saved reports, press Hist. See step 3 through step 4 in
“Disk Usage by Message Type”.
6 To set a schedule for this report, see “Mailbox Usage Stats”.
Call Processing By
Port
To generate a report about call processing by port:
1 Click Call Processing by Port on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or
press GenR to generate a report.
2 Enter a port number in the text box or select a port number from the
drop-down list.
The Instant Report Details screen appears with the port number displayed
in the Filter Port: field. You have the following options:
■
To e-mail the report, click the check box, enter an e-mail address,
and click GenR.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
To see the report, click GenR.
A pop-up box appears with a list of time ranges.
3 Select a time range from the drop-down list and double-click it. The
following message displays:
Report Requested...ESC to Cancel.
The report is then displayed on screen. Figure 68 shows an example of a
calls processed by port report for port 28045.
Initialized Mailboxes
193
Figure 68 Call Processing by Port Report
4 Click Exit. This message appears:
Report is available in <directory/filename>.
(Press a key to continue)
5 To see a list of all saved reports, press Hist. See step 3 through step 4 in
“Disk Usage by Message Type”.
6 To set a schedule for this report, see “Mailbox Usage Stats”.
Initialized
Mailboxes
To generate a report about initialized mailboxes:
1 Click Initialized Mailboxes on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or
press GenR to generate a report.
This prompt appears:
Select Mailbox or type ‘A’ for all
2 Enter a mailbox number in the text box, select a mailbox from the
drop-down list, or type A.
The Instant Report Details screen appears with the mailbox number (or
all) displayed in the Filter Mbx: field. You have the following options:
■
To e-mail the report, click the check box, enter an e-mail address,
and click GenR.
194
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
To see the report, click GenR.
A pop-up box appears with a list of time ranges.
3 Select a time range from the drop-down list and double-click it. The
following message displays:
Report Requested...ESC to Cancel.
The report is then displayed on screen. Figure 69 shows an example of an
initialized mailboxes report for all mailboxes.
Figure 69 Initialized Mailboxes Report
4 Click Exit. This message appears:
Report is available in <directory/filename>.
(Press a key to continue)
5 To see a list of all saved reports, press Hist. See step 3 through step 4 in
“Disk Usage by Message Type”.
6 To set a schedule for this report, see “Mailbox Usage Stats”.
Failed Login Attempts
Failed Login
Attempts
195
To generate a report about failed login attempts:
1 Click Failed Login Attempts on the Report Types menu. Press Enter or
press GenR to generate a report.
This prompt appears:
Select Mailbox or type ‘A” for all
2 Enter a mailbox number in the text box, select a mailbox from the
drop-down list, or type A.
The Instant Report Details screen appears with the mailbox number (or
all) displayed in the Filter Mbx: field. You have the following options:
■
To e-mail the report, click the check box, enter an e-mail address,
and click GenR.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
To see the report, click GenR.
A pop-up box appears with a list of time ranges.
3 Select a time range from the drop-down list and double-click it. The
following message displays:
Report Requested...ESC to Cancel.
The report is then displayed on screen. Figure 70 shows an example of a
failed login attempts report for all mailboxes.
196
CHAPTER 6: REPORTS
Figure 70 Failed Login Attempts Report
4 Click Exit. This message appears:
Report is available in <directory/filename>.
(Press a key to continue)
5 To see a list of all saved reports, press Hist. See step 3 through step 4 in
“Disk Usage by Message Type”.
6 To set a schedule for this report, see “Mailbox Usage Stats”.
System Information
Click System Information to display information about the 3Com IP
Messaging version number(s).
7
COMPANY AND DIVISION
PROFILES
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Overview
■
Creating a Company Profile
■
Renaming a Company Profile
■
Deleting a Company Profile
■
Creating Or Deleting a Range of Mailboxes
■
Updating Subscribers
■
Setting Permission Levels
■
Importing a Company Profile
■
Defining E-mail Domains
Use the same procedures to create a Division profile or a Company
profile.
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
198
CHAPTER 7: COMPANY AND DIVISION PROFILES
Overview
A company or division is a group of subscribers who belong to the same
organization that may have the same language, time zone, Auto
Attendant, or outbound call line group. Although both company and
Class of Service define settings for a group of subscribers, the
company/division settings are related to a physical company, region, or
organization. There can be multiple divisions in each company. You can
use divisions to group users by the same time zone, same location, or
same Auto Attendant.
Creating a
Company Profile
To create a Company profile:
1 Click Company on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen appears (Figure 71).
If companies have already been created, they will appear in a drop-down
list.
2 Create a new company by typing a unique company name in the text
box, then press Enter. The following message appears:
Company Not Found - Add? (Y/N)
3 Type Y and press Enter. The following message appears:
Please select/create a SUG.
4 Associate a Send User Group with the company. For more information on
SUGs, see Chapter 8. Do one of the following:
■
Select a SUG from the list.
■
Create a SUG by typing the name of a new SUG in the text box.
■
Skip creating a SUG by pressing Enter.
Figure 71 shows the Company Administration screen. In this
example, the Engineering SUG has been assigned.
Creating a Company Profile
199
Figure 71 New Company Screen
Table 42 lists the fields on the Company Administration screen.
Table 42 Fields on the Company Administration Screen
Field
Description
Company
The name of the new company.
Division
The name of the new company division.
Language
If the individual responsible for installing IP Messaging has
installed multiple languages, a drop-down list of languages
appears.
User List
Contains the users in this company.
Auto-Attndt
The Auto Attendant node associated with this company.
Printer List
Lists the printers configured on this system (printer configuration
is not supported in this release).
Sndr Usr Grp
The Send User Group (SUG) associated with this company.
SMDI Link
The Simplified Message Desk Interface (SMDI) Link associated
with this company.
Time Zone
The time zone associated with this company.
Line Grp
The Line Group associated with this company. When you define
a line group, the system uses the ports defined by the line group
to make outgoing calls that originate from the company
mailbox.
Oper Ext
The Operator extension number associated with this company.
Avail Prnt
Lists the printer selected for use.
200
CHAPTER 7: COMPANY AND DIVISION PROFILES
The buttons on this screen enable the following functions:
Renaming a
Company Profile
■
Delt — Deletes a company profile. See “Deleting a Company Profile”.
■
Subs — Creates or deletes a range of subscriber mailboxes. See
“Creating Or Deleting a Range of Mailboxes”.
■
Updt — Updates information for all subscribers who belong to the
company. See “Updating Subscribers”.
■
Perm — Defines subscriber permissions. See “Setting Permission
Levels”.
■
Doms — Defines e-mail domains. See “Defining E-mail Domains”.
■
Impt — Imports company profile information from another company.
See “Importing a Company Profile”.
To rename a Company profile:
1 Click Company on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen appears (Figure 71).
2 Select the company to rename and click the Renm button.
3 Enter the new name in the Rename text box and press Enter.
This message appears:
Rename to <‘new company name’>? Y/N
4 Type Y and then press Enter.
The new company name appears on the list of companies.
Deleting a Company Profile
Deleting a
Company Profile
201
To delete a Company profile:
1 Click Company on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen appears (Figure 71).
2 Select the company name and press Enter.
3 Select a division from the displayed list.
4 On the next screen, click Delt. This message appears:
Delete This Company? (Y/N)
5 At the prompt, type Y and then press Enter.
The company is deleted from the list of companies.
If any subscribers are associated with a company, you need to delete the
subscribers from the User List before you can delete the company.
Creating Or
Deleting a Range of
Mailboxes
To create or delete a range of subscriber mailboxes that will be associated
with the company profile:
1 Click Company on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen appears (Figure 71).
2 Select the company name and press Enter.
3 Select a division from the displayed list.
The Company Administration screen for the company you selected
appears.
4 Click Subs. This prompt appears:
Create or Delete range? (C/D)
5 Enter C to create a range of mailboxes and press Enter.
Enter D to delete a range of mailboxes and press Enter.
6 Enter the Class of Service or press F1 to select from a drop-down list of
Classes of Service. Press Enter.
7 Enter the first mailbox number in the range for this company in the text
box. Press Enter.
8 Enter the last mailbox number in the range. Press Enter.
202
CHAPTER 7: COMPANY AND DIVISION PROFILES
The system prompts you to confirm the range.
9 Type Y and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen for the company you selected
appears and message indicates how many mailboxes have been created
or deleted.
10 Click OK.
Updating
Subscribers
To update all the subscribers who belong to this company/division:
1 Click Company on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen appears (Figure 71).
2 Select the company name and press Enter.
3 Select a division from the displayed list.
The Company Administration screen for the company you selected
appears.
4 Click Updt. The Update User Records screen appears (Figure 72).
Figure 72 Update User Records Screen
5 Check the parameters that require updates or press Sel to select all the
parameters. Click Updt to apply the updates.
To remove the check marks from all the fields, click Dsel (Deselect).
Setting Permission Levels
203
The system updates the selected parameters of all the mailboxes
associated with this Company group according to the Company Profile.
After a few seconds, the Company Administration screen for the
company you selected appears.
Setting Permission
Levels
You can define the access level for each parameter in the subscriber
profile associated with this company.
The levels of access define how other administrators may access and
update these parameters from the Company Profile screens and the
corresponding Subscriber Profile screens.
To set the permission levels for the parameters:
1 Click Company on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen appears (Figure 71).
2 Select the company name and press Enter.
3 Select a division from the displayed list.
The Company Administration screen for the company you selected
appears.
4 Click Perm.
The Company/Division Profile - Permission screen appears (Figure 73).
Figure 73 Company/Division - Permission Screen
204
CHAPTER 7: COMPANY AND DIVISION PROFILES
5 Select the permission level for each parameter by clicking the check box.
Permission settings are defined in Table 43.
Table 43 Permissions Settings
Permission
Description
Hard
Hides a parameter on the Company and Subscriber Profile screens.
View
Displays the parameter on the Company and Subscriber Profile
screens, but prevents editing of the parameter.
Firm
Displays the parameter on the Company Profile screen and allows
editing on the Company Profile screen but not the Subscribe Profile
screen.
Soft
Displays the parameter on the Company and Subscriber Profile
screens and allows editing of the parameter.
6 Click Exit. The system prompts you to save your changes.
7 Enter Y and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen for the company you selected
appears.
Importing a
Company Profile
Import the Company Profile parameters of another company by exporting
mailboxes in an export file from the Subscriber Profile option.
1 Click Subscriber Profile on the Main menu and press Enter.
2 Click the Expt button.
The following message appears:
Enter the range for export, Minimum Mailbox number:
3 Enter the lowest mailbox number in the text box and press Enter.
The following message appears:
Enter the range for export, Maximum Mailbox number:
4 Enter the highest mailbox number in the text box or enter the same
number if you are exporting only one mailbox. Press Enter.
The following message appears:
Enter the export filename:
5 Enter a name in the text box and press Enter.
The following message appears:
Importing a Company Profile
205
Export Succeeded!
Summary: 1 mailbox has been exported to file <filename>.
By default, the file is stored in the /usr/app/app.dir directory.
6 Click OK. On the next screen, click Exit. The Main menu appears.
7 Select Company and press Enter. The Company Administration screen
appears.
8 Select a company and division from their respective lists and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen for that company appears.
9 Click Impt.
The following message appears:
Enter the import filename:
10 Enter the import filename in the text box.
The following message appears:
Mailbox <mailbox number> exists!
Update/Overwrite/Renum/Skip/Cancel: (U/O/R/S/C)?
11 Enter U and press Enter.
The following message appears:
Update One or update All? (O/A)?
12 Enter O or A and press Enter.
The following message appears:
Full Import Succeeded!
Summary: 1 mailbox has been imported.
13 Click OK and Exit to the Main menu
206
CHAPTER 7: COMPANY AND DIVISION PROFILES
Defining E-mail
Domains
This section describes how to add and delete e-mail domains.
E-mail is supported on the 3Com® Native Telephone User Interface only.
E-mail domains can be used to locate a company or other entity on the
Internet. If a subscriber changes his division within a company, his e-mail
domain may also change. While implicit information such as his e-mail
address may be impacted, it will still point to the same mailbox.
For example, suppose that Jane Doe has moved from “XYZ, Engineering”
to “XYZ, Marketing”. Her e-mail domain will change from eng.xyz.com
to mark.xyz.com. The last two parts of the domain are the same
(xyz.com), but the first part of the domain impacts her e-mail address. An
administrator will need to change this information, but e-mail messages
will still be directed to the same mailbox.
Adding Domains
Add a domain as follows:
1 Click Company on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen appears (Figure 71).
2 Select the company name and press Enter.
3 Select a division from the displayed list.
The Company Administration screen for the company you selected
appears.
4 Click the Doms button. The E-mail Domain screen appears (Figure 74).
Figure 74 E-mail Domain Screen
Defining E-mail Domains
207
5 Enter a domain name and press Enter. The following message appears:
Email Domain <Domain Name> not found. Add? (Y/N)
6 Press Y to add the domain name. The domain name is saved and now
appears as a selection.
7 Use steps 4 and 5 to add additional domain names, or press Exit to
return to the previous screen.
Deleting Domains
Delete a domain as follows:
1 Click Company on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Company Administration screen appears (Figure 71).
2 Select the company name and press Enter.
3 Select a division from the displayed list.
The Company Administration screen for the company you selected
appears.
4 Click the Doms button. The E-mail Domain screen appears (Figure 74).
5 Select a domain name from the list and press Delt. The following
message appears:
Delete ‘<Domain Name>’? (Y/N)
6 Type Y and press Enter. The following message appears:
Email domain <Domain Name> has been deleted.
7 Press Exit to return to the previous screen.
208
CHAPTER 7: COMPANY AND DIVISION PROFILES
8
SEND USER GROUPS
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Send User Groups Overview
■
Provisioning the SUG Option
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Send User Groups
Overview
The Send User Groups (SUG) feature is a group of subscribers to whom a
user is authorized to send messages. A SUG can contain:
■
Individual subscribers
■
Companies (all subscribers associated with a company)
■
Company divisions (all subscribers associated with a division of a
company)
■
Individual subscribers, companies, and company divisions.
Each subscriber can have a SUG. This means that the subscriber is
authorized to send messages to any member of this assigned SUG.
Members of the same SUG cannot send messages to each other unless
each member is assigned to a SUG that includes the other members.
The SUG feature is also used with the Auto Attendant option. The SUG
defines a group on which the Auto Attendant can search by name.
For example, four subscribers (A, B, C, and D) belong to three different
divisions of a company and three SUGs have been defined.
210
CHAPTER 8: SEND USER GROUPS
The company divisions are Engineering, Marketing, and Accounting.
■
SUG 1 is the Engineering Division
■
SUG 2 is the Marketing Division
■
SUG 3 is the Engineering and Marketing Division
■
Subscriber A belongs to the Engineering division and uses SUG 1
■
Subscriber B belongs to the Marketing division and uses SUG 2
■
Subscriber C belongs to the Marketing Division and uses SUG 3
■
Subscriber D belongs to the Accounting Division and uses SUG 3
Table 44 lists the SUG assignments and permissions.
Table 44 SUG Permissions
Subscriber
Can send messages to:
Cannot send message to:
A
Everyone in Engineering
Anyone in Marketing and
Accounting
B
Everyone in Marketing
Anyone in Engineering and
Accounting
C
Everyone in Engineering and
Marketing
Anyone in Accounting
D
Everyone in Engineering and
Marketing
Anyone in Accounting
■
All subscribers in SUG 1 or SUG 3 can send messages to subscriber A.
■
All subscribers in SUG 2 or SUG 3 can send messages to subscriber B.
■
All subscribers in SUG 2 or SUG 3 can send messages to subscriber C.
Subscriber D uses SUG 3 but the Accounting division is not under any
SUG.
■
Subscriber D can send messages to anyone in Engineering and
Marketing
■
Subscriber D cannot send messages to anyone in Accounting
■
Accounting division subscribers cannot receive messages from any
subscriber
Provisioning the SUG Option
Provisioning the
SUG Option
Adding Companies
211
This section describes how to provision the SUG option, which includes
adding companies or divisions to a SUG, and adding subscribers to a
SUG.
To add a company or a division to a SUG:
1 Click Send User Groups on the Main Menu and press Enter.
The Send User Groups Administration screen appears.
2 Select an existing SUG from the drop-down list, or create a new SUG by
entering a unique name in the blank field. Press Enter. For a new SUG,
the following message appears:
SUG Not Found - Add? (Y/N)
3 Type Y and press Enter. The Send User Group Administration screen
appears. Figure 75 shows a new SUG with an empty Entry List.
Figure 75 Send User Group Administration Screen
4 Click Comp to add another company or division to an existing SUG or to
add a company or division to a new SUG.
5 Select a company from the drop-down list of companies or type in a new
company.
6 Select a division from the displayed list and press Enter. The following
message appears:
Add this company to SUG? (Y/N)
212
CHAPTER 8: SEND USER GROUPS
7 Type Y and press Enter.
The company appears in the Entry List on the Send User Group
Administration screen as shown in Figure 76.
Figure 76 Send User Group Administration Screen - Company Added
If a company has divisions, click the company name to display a
drop-down list of all the divisions. The first item in this list is typically Base
Company. This default means the company with all the divisions.
Adding and Deleting
Subscribers
To add subscribers to a SUG:
1 Click Send User Groups on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Send User Groups Administration screen appears.
2 Select a SUG from the list and press Enter.
The next screen shows a list of existing subscribers and company/divisions
currently assigned to the SUG, if any.
3 Click Subs to add a subscriber to this SUG.
4 Select a subscriber from the pop-up list of subscribers. The following
message appears:
Add this subscriber to SUG? (Y/N)
5 Type Y and press Enter. The subscriber appears in the Entry List on the
Send User Groups Administration screen as shown in Figure 77.
Provisioning the SUG Option
213
Figure 77 Send User Group Administration Screen - Subscriber Added
6 To add more subscribers, repeat steps 3 through 5.
7 To delete a subscriber from the SUG, select the subscriber and then click
Del.
The following message appears:
Delete Entry? (Y/N)
8 Type Y and press Enter.
9 When you are finished, click Exit. The following message appears:
Save Changes? (Y/N)
10 Type Y and press Enter. The Send User Groups Administration screen
appears.
11 Click Exit to return to the Main menu.
214
CHAPTER 8: SEND USER GROUPS
9
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND
SYSTEM STATUS
This chapter covers these topics:
■
System Configuration Description
■
System Configuration Screen Buttons
■
E-mail Banner
■
Additional Servers
■
Access Number Management
■
Inbound Ports
■
Line Groups
■
MWI Configuration
■
System Status Screen
■
System Alarms
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
216
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
System
Configuration
Description
Click System Configuration on the Main menu to see system
information. Figure 78 shows the System Configuration screen.
Figure 78 System Configuration Screen
CAUTION: System Configuration parameters are set by 3Com® during
installation and should not be changed without consulting 3Com.
Table 45 lists the fields on the System Configuration screen.
Table 45 Fields on the System Configuration Screen
Field
Description
System Name
The name that appears at the top of every screen.
System Version
The system software release version number.
Customer Name ID
Identifies the customer.
Prompt ‘#’ after Mailbox
When this box is checked, the system prompts the
user to press # after entering a mailbox number.
Default Auto Attendant
Allows you to select a default Auto Attendant. The
drop down list includes the System Default Auto
Attendant and all administrator-defined Auto
Attendants (if any). See Chapter 11 for information
on configuring an Auto Attendant.
Note: The Auto Attendant you select for this field
can be overridden by the Auto Attendant selected
during Subscriber Profile configuration for an
individual subscriber (see Table 26 in Chapter 5).
System Configuration Screen Buttons
217
Table 45 Fields on the System Configuration Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Prompt ‘#’ after Password
When this box is checked, the system prompts the
user to press # after entering a password.
Multilanguage Prompt
When enabled, allows the subscriber to select the
language used for voice prompts when the
subscriber initially accesses the Auto Attendant.
This option appears only if you have installed voice
prompts in more than one language. See “Adding a
Set of Language Prompts”.
System
Configuration
Screen Buttons
Maximum Mailbox Length
The maximum number of digits allowed for a mailbox
number.
Minimum Mailbox Length
The minimum number of digits allowed for a mailbox
number.
National Prefix
Not applicable.
Log Server
Used on client/server systems to indicate the machine
on which to store logs. If not specified, each machine
stores its own log entries.
Max. No Ans Timeout (sec)
The maximum timeout for an unanswered call.
Def No Ans Timeout (sec)
The default timeout for an unanswered call.
Legacy Voice Mail number
Not used.
Figure 79 shows the buttons on the System Configuration screen.
Figure 79 System Configuration Buttons
These buttons enable the following functions:
E-mail is supported on the 3Com Native Telephone User Interface (TUI)
only.
■
Bann — Allows you to configure an e-mail banner that appears on
every e-mail message sent from this system. See “E-mail Banner”.
■
Srvs — Allows you to identify additional servers that you want linked
to the IP Messaging server such as an external IMAP or POP3 e-mail
server. See “Additional Servers”.
218
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
E-mail Banner
■
AdNo — Allows you to configure the telephone numbers associated
with IP Messaging such as the numbers associated with voicemail
access and Music On Hold. See “Access Number Management”.
■
Port — Allows you configure inbound ports. See “Inbound Ports”.
■
Line — Allows you to create and manage the line groups available to
your system. See “Line Groups”.
■
MWI — Allows you to configure Message Waiting Indicator (MWI)
parameters. See “MWI Configuration”.
■
SMS — Reserved for future use.
■
Exit — Returns to the previous screen.
To enter information for an e-mail banner:
E-mail is supported on the 3Com Native Telephone User Interface (TUI)
only.
1 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
The System Configuration screen appears (Figure 78).
2 Click Bann. The E-Mail Banner screen appears (Figure 80).
Figure 80 Email Banner Configuration
Additional Servers
219
3 Enter text for the banner in the textbox.
The information you enter on this screen appears on every e-mail
message sent from this system. For example, you can enter an
advertisement message that will appear on every e-mail message sent by
all users of this system.
4 Click Save to save your changes.
Deleting Banner
Information
To delete the banner information:
1 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
The System Configuration screen appears (Figure 78).
2 Click Bann. The E-Mail Banner screen appears (Figure 80).
3 Select the banner information and click Delt. The following message
appears:
Delete File? (Y/N)
4 Enter Y and press Enter to delete the banner.
Additional Servers
To configure additional servers that are linked to the IP Messaging server:
1 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
The System Configuration screen appears (Figure 78).
2 Click Srvs. The System Servers screen appears.
3 Enter the server name in the textbox (for new servers) or select a server
name from the displayed list (for existing servers). Press the Enter key and
one of the following actions occurs:
■
For new servers, the following message occurs:
Create Server: <server name>? (Y/N)
Enter Y and press Enter.
■
For existing servers, the System Servers screen is filled in with the
previously configured information for that server.
4 Select the server type from the drop-down list (see Table 46).
5 Press Enter.
220
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
The system displays a server identification screen. The fields on this screen
depend on the type of server you selected. Figure 81 shows the fields
that are used for an IMAP server.
Figure 81 System Servers Screen - IMAP Server
6 Enter the required server information such as the server IP address, port
number, administrator account name, or password.
7 Click Save and then Exit to return to the System Configuration screen.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Table 46 Types of Servers
Server Name
Description
NBXSrv
Allows IP Messaging to turn MWI (message waiting indication) on
or off on NBX extensions. This is used only when IP Messaging is
coupled with an NBX system.
ImapSrv
Identifies an external Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP)
server to use when receiving e-mail.
IvmSrv
Not used
PopupSv
Identifies an external Post Office Protocol 3 (POP3) server to use
when receiving e-mail.
Access Number Management
221
Table 46 Types of Servers (continued)
Access Number
Management
Server Name
Description
ReplySv
Identifies the domain to use in the From field for e-mails processed
by IP Messaging. If you do not configure this server type, the From
field of a message shows <phone_number/mailbox_number> only
instead of <phone_number/mailbox_number@reply_server>.
Consequently, the recipient cannot reply to the message. You can
enter the IP address of the IP Messaging system for the ReplySv
value.
SmtpSrv
Identifies an external Simple Mail Transport Protocol (SMTP) server
to use when forwarding subscriber e-mail messages to external
destinations.
SyncSrv
Not used
LdapSrv
Not used
EmlDom
Configures e-mail domains that are allowed to be used for e-mail
auto-delivery.
Use the AdNo button to add, change, or delete:
■
The number that users dial to access IP Messaging mailboxes. See
“Configuring an IP Messaging Voicemail Access Number”.
■
A music on hold number. See “Configuring Music on Hold”.
■
An announcement number used by a Hunt Group. See “Configuring a
Hunt Group Announcement”.
■
A number used by an administrator to listen to archived messages.
See “Configuring the Message Archival Access Number”.
If a VCX system implements an IP Messaging client-server configuration,
the VCX administrator should set up IPM clients as trusted endpoints in
the call processor. The administrator can then assign unique voicemail
and MOH access numbers (extensions) that are routed to a specific client.
When a user presses a telephone’s MSG button, they access the voicemail
box on the assigned client. See the VCX Administration Guide for more
information on creating routes and end points for an IPM client-server
configuration.
If one client system becomes unavailable for any reason, users who
normally access voicemail through that client can then access their
voicemail by dialing the extension of a different client or by dialing the
server's voicemail extension.
222
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
Client-server configurations are supported only on VCX systems.
Configuring an IP
Messaging Voicemail
Access Number
A voicemail access number, or pilot number, is a special system number
that is used to:
■
Route calls to the IP Messaging system. The administrator configures a
route for this number so that the call processor directs all calls to this
number to the specified IP Messaging system.
See Configuring Patterns, Dial Plans, and Dial Rules and Configuring
Routing and Translation Services in the VCX Administration Guide.
■
Determine the IP Messaging system a phone connects to when the
subscriber presses the MSG button.The phone dials this voicemail
number, which enables the subscriber to access his or her mailbox.
The IP Messaging system recognizes a voicemail access number and
treats the call according to the following rules:
a If you press the MSG button (or dial the voicemail access number) on
a phone that has a mailbox on the system, the system prompts you for
the password associated with the mailbox.
b If you press the MSG button (or dial the voicemail access number) on
a phone that does not have a mailbox on the system, the system
prompts you to enter a mailbox number.
c When a call is forwarded to the voicemail system because the call is
not answered, the IP Messaging system allows the caller to leave a
message in the mailbox for the dialed phone number. The call
processor figures out which IP Messaging system to forward the call to
by examining the voicemail access number configured for the phone.
Rule a is ignored under the following conditions:
■
if the voicemail access number is not configured in the IP Messaging
system, or,
■
if the voicemail access number configured in IP Messaging does not
match the number configured for the phone.
The voicemail access number configured in IP Messaging should always
match the number configured for all phones if you want the three rules
described above to work as described. This number is set by the system
administrator in the Call Processor software and must be coordinated
with the IP Messaging system administrator.
Access Number Management
223
To configure an IP Messaging voicemail access number:
1 Configure a route plan for this access number on the Call Processor. See
Configuring Patterns, Dial Plans, and Dial Rules and Configuring Routing
and Translation Services in the VCX Administration Guide.
2 Log onto the IP Messaging server as app. See “Starting Call Builder”.
3 Click System Configuration on the Main voicemail menu and press
Enter.
4 Click IP Messaging and press Enter.
5 Press Add and type a number in the Enter Number field (Figure 82). This
number must match the voice mail number configured by the
administrator.
Figure 82 AdNo - IP Messaging Access Number Configuration
6 Press Enter. The following message appears:
Add number <n>? (Y/N)
7 Enter Y and press Enter.
8 To add another number, Click Add and repeat steps 4 and 5.
9 When you are finished, click Exit to return to the System Configuration
screen.
You must configure a second voicemail access number if message archival
is enabled on the IP Messaging system. This second access number and
the message archival pilot number must be the same.
224
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
Configuring Music on
Hold
The file that is played when a Music on Hold (MOH) number is accessed
should be stored in /usr/app/app.dir/speak.vox. This file can contain music
or a spoken announcement.
A telephony system’s WAV file importing capabilities are solely an
accommodation to you and shall not constitute a grant or waiver (or
other limitation or implication) of any rights of the copyright owners in
any audio content, sound recording, or underlying musical or literary
composition. You are obligated to comply with all applicable copyright
and other intellectual property laws in both uploading WAV files to a
telephony system and your subsequent use of such WAV files.
The default Music on Hold file in this directory is named music. The
filename must not be more than 8 characters long and must be
lowercase letters and numbers.
To configure the MOH number and audio file that will play Music on
Hold:
1 Configure a route plan for this access number on the Call Processor. See
Configuring Patterns, Dial Plans, and Dial Rules and Configuring Routing
and Translation Services in the VCX Administration Guide.
2 Log onto the IP Messaging server as app. See “Starting Call Builder”.
3 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
4 Click Adno.
5 Click Music on Hold and press Enter.
6 Press Add (Figure 83).
Access Number Management
225
Figure 83 AdNo - Music on Hold Access Number Configuration
7 In the Enter Number text box, enter the number configured by the
administrator as the Music On Hold Number and press Enter. This
number must match the MOH number configured by the administrator
during telephone setup.
8 In the Enter File text box, enter the name of the audio (music or speech)
file you want to associate with this number. To use the default MOH
audio file (music), leave this field blank. Figure 84 show a sample
configuration.
Figure 84 Music On Hold - Example Configuration
226
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
9 Press Enter.
10 This message appears:
Add number <n>? (Y/N)
11 Enter Y and press Enter.
12 To add another number, click Add and then repeat steps 4 through 8.
13 When you are finished, click Exit to return to the System Configuration
screen.
Configuring a Hunt
Group
Announcement
When an administrator configures a Hunt Group, one of the
configuration options is Announcement Number. This number is dialed by
the system and is associated with a voice file. This voice file is the
recording a caller hears when a connection is made to a Hunt Group
number but before the call is answered. For example, the recording could
be “Your call is important to us. Please wait for the next available
customer service agent.”.
See Configuring Hunt Groups and Attendants in the VCX Administration
Guide for details on configuring a Hunt Group.
There are two basic steps required to configure a Hunt Group
announcement:
1 Record the voice file and convert it to a format that IP Messaging can
play. The next section, “Converting a Voice File”, assumes you have
recorded a WAV file for your Hunt Group announcement.
2 Use the Adno option on the System Configuration screen to configure
the announcement number and associate it with the voice file.
Converting a Voice File
This section describes how to convert a voice WAV file to the proper
audio format for a Hunt Group announcement. This procedure ensures
that the file is in the correct WAV file format and then converts the WAV
file to a format that IP Messaging can play.
The procedure uses the Microsoft Windows Sound Recorder utility to
check the WAV file audio format.
Access Number Management
227
To check the WAV file audio format:
1 On a Windows system, click Start and select Programs.
2 Click Accessories, then click Entertainment and select Sound
Recorder.
3 Click File, then click Open and select your WAV file.
4 Click File and select Properties to check the format of your WAV file.
The file must be in G.711u format. Figure 85 shows a WAV file in PCM
44.100 kHz, 16-bit, stereo format that must be converted.
Figure 85 WAV File Properties
5 Click OK.
6 Click File and select Save As.
7 Click Change in the Save As dialog box.
The Sound Recorder utility displays the Sound Selection dialog box.
8 In the Format drop down list, select CCITT u-Law.
9 In the Attributes drop down list, select 8.000 kHz, 8 Bit, Mono.
228
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
The Sound Selection dialog box should now look like Figure 86.
Figure 86 Sound Selection Dialog Box
10 Click OK to close the Sound Selection dialog box.
11 In the Save As dialog box, save your sound file. Ensure that the filename
is 8 characters or less and the file extension is .wav.
12 Copy the WAV file to the /usr/app/gen directory on your IP Messaging
system.
13 Run the wav2ipmsg script to convert the WAV file using the following
command:
wav2ipmsg <filename>.wav
The wav2ipmsg script is located in the /usr/app/gen directory.
This command generates two files:
■
<filename>.g711u.ipmsg
■
<filename>.g729.ipmsg
These files are now in formats supported by the two codecs that IP
Messaging can use.
14 Copy the two .ipmsg files to the /usr/app/app.dir/speak.vox directory.
When the wav2ipmsg script converts your WAV file, the resulting .ipmsg
filenames may exceed the 8-character filename limit. If so, rename the
files.
Configuring an Announcement Number
After you have recorded, converted, and copied your Hunt Group
announcement voice file to the proper directory (see “Converting a Voice
File”), you must associate the file with an announcement number.
Access Number Management
229
You must now configure the announcement number and audio file that
will play the Hunt Group announcement. See “Configuring Music on
Hold” for more details.
Configuring the
Message Archival
Access Number
When IP Messaging is installed, the installer can enable message
archiving (see “Managing Archived Messages”). Archived messages are
accessed by dialing an extension associated with a specific mailbox. You
must configure this access number in your IP Messaging system.
Message archival access numbers can only be configured in AppMon.
To configure the number an administrator uses to access archived
messages:
1 Configure a route plan for this access number on the Call Processor. See
Configuring Patterns, Dial Plans, and Dial Rules and Configuring Routing
and Translation Services in the VCX Administration Guide.
2 Log onto the IP Messaging server as app. See “Starting Call Builder”.
3 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
4 Click Adno.
5 Click Archival Num and press Enter.
6 Press Add (Figure 87).
Figure 87 Archived Messages Number Configuration
7 Type an access number in the Enter Number field and press Enter.
230
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
This number must match a voice mail number configured by the
administrator. The following message appears:
Add number <n>? (Y/N)
8 Enter Y and press Enter.
9 To add another number, Click Add and repeat steps 4 and 5.
10 When you are finished, click Exit to return to the System Configuration
screen.
11 Select IP Messaging and configure a second archival number that
matches the archival number you just set. You must configure a voicemail
access number for every archival number that you configure and these
numbers must be the same for message archival to function. See
“Configuring an IP Messaging Voicemail Access Number” for details.
Deleting an Access
Number
To delete a number:
1 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
2 Click Adno.
3 Select the type of number you want to delete (IP Messaging, Music on
Hold, and Archival Num) and press Enter.
4 Select the number from the list and click Delt. The following message
appears:
Delete number <n>? (Y/N)
5 Type Y and press Enter.
6 Click Exit to return to the System Configuration screen.
Inbound Ports
The Inbound Port Configuration Utility screen displays the configured
inbound ports.
CAUTION: Port parameters are set by 3Com service engineers during
installation. DO NOT change these parameters without consulting 3Com
To access the Inbound Port Configuration Utility screen:
1 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
The System Configuration screen appears.
Inbound Ports
231
2 Click Port. The Inbound Port Configuration Utility screen appears
(Figure 88).
Figure 88 Port Configuration Screen
Table 47 lists the fields on the Port Configuration screen.
Table 47 Fields on the Port Configuration Utility Screen
Field
Description
Port
Lists the port numbers
Port Type
Identifies that the ports are dedicated for SIP (Session
Initiation Protocol)
smdi
Not used
wink
Not used
Inband ani, redir, MF
Not used
Toll Save
Not used
Xfer Type
The transfer type is Bridge or Hook Flash. The Bridge type
places a separate outbound call and bridges the calls
internally. The Hook Flash type executes a SIP REFER
transfer that releases the inbound call when the transfer
is done.
Internal Code
This is the call transfer code used to call numbers with
fewer than 7 digits. It must be “B” for SIP REFER
transfers. It is not used for Bridged transfers.
External Code
This is the call transfer code used to call numbers with
more than 6 digits. It must be “B” for SIP REFER transfers.
It is not used for Bridged transfers.
232
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
3 Click Edit to make changes to the fields. The Port Edit Configuration
screen appears (Figure 89).
Figure 89 Port Edit Configuration Screen
4 Click Save to save your changes.
5 Click Exit to return to the System Configuration screen.
Line Groups
The Line Group Configuration screen displays the configured line groups.
CAUTION: Consult 3Com before changing Line Group Configuration
parameters.
To create and edit the Line Groups available for your system:
1 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
The System Configuration screen appears.
2 Click Line. The Line Group Configuration screen appears (Figure 90).
Line Groups
233
Figure 90 Line Group Configuration Screen
3 Click Add to add a new line group.
4 Type the name of the group in the textbox and press Enter. The new
group appears in the list.
5 To assign parameters, click a line group in the list. The screen that appears
depends on the line group selected. Figure 91 shows the MSU30 Line
Group.
Figure 91 Line Group Configuration - Edit Screen
Table 48 lists the fields on the screen.
234
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
Table 48 Fields on the Line Group Configuration Screen
Field
Description
Name
The name of the line group
Description
A description of the line group
Number of Ports:
The number of ports for which this line is available
First T1 Dial Rule
Second T1 Dial Rule
Third T1 dial rule
These fields contain codes for data transfer to the switch
and are set during the system setup; do not change these
fields
6 Click Port to edit the number of ports assigned to each MSU.
7 Click Del to delete the indicated Line Group.
The Delete button appears only for user-defined groups.
8 When you are finished, click Exit and keep clicking Exit until the Main
menu appears.
MWI Configuration
To set or modify the MWI (Message Waiting Indicator) parameters:
1 Click System Configuration on the Main menu and press Enter.
The System Configuration screen appears.
2 Click MWI.The MWI Configuration screen appears (Figure 92).
Figure 92 MWI Configuration Screen
Table 49 describes the fields on the MWI Configuration screen.
MWI Configuration
235
The PID (PBX Integration Device) button allows you to configure a PID
with a name and IP address. PIDs are used for Blind Notify. When Blind
Notify is configured for a mailbox, the PID is specified where the
notification will be sent. Blind Notify is configured in a subscriber profile
(see Table 21).
Blind Notify must be enabled when an NBX call processor is used with an
IP Messaging server.
Table 49 Fields on the MWI Configuration Screen
Field
Description
On Code
When MWI is activated, the code designated commands the
switch to activate MWI for that user’s number. See the Code
Symbols entry in this table.
Off Code
When MWI is activated, the code designated commands the
switch to deactivate MWI for that user’s number. See the
Code Symbols entry in this table.
Retry Delay (seconds) The time interval in seconds between MWI activate and
deactivate call tries.
Delay (50 msec units) The minimum call length in milliseconds that MWI takes for
activation and deactivation calls.
Retries
The number of times the system tries to light the Message
Waiting Indicator light when MWI is activated for an
outbound call.
MWI Active
Enables (if checked) or disables (if unchecked) the MWI
service for the entire system.
MWI Daily Refresh
Click the check box to enter a time (between 12 and 6 AM)
to refresh the Message Waiting Indicator.
This MWI refresh applies to NBX MWI, SIP MWI, Blind Notify,
Inband MWI, SMDI MWI, and MWN.
MWI One-Time
Refresh
Click the drop-down box to display the following options:
■
None — One time refresh not required.
■
All — One time refresh of all files, Class of Services and
all mailboxes.
■
COS — One time refresh of Class of Service only.
■
MBX — One time refresh for mailboxes only.
■
File — One time refresh for files only.
This MWI refresh applies to NBX MWI, SIP MWI, Blind Notify,
Inband MWI, SMDI MWI, and MWN.
Blind Notify Refresh
Click the check box to enter a time in minutes (30 - 9999) to
refresh the Blind Notify Indicator.
236
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
Table 49 Fields on the MWI Configuration Screen (continued)
Field
Description
Code Symbols
The following code symbols may be inserted in the On Code
and Off Code fields to modify those commands.
■
.x. — Pause x seconds
Use periods around a number to pause for x number of
seconds.
■
@ — Wait for Answer
This function, activated by the @ symbol, applies only to
analog telephony and is not used with T1's (digital
telephone cable with 25 channels) or E1's (digital
telephone cable with 32 channels).
■
& — Hook Flash
This function, a quick tap to the hook, applies only to
analog telephony and is not functional with T1's or E1's.
■
U — Wait for Tone
When this letter is entered in either the On Code or Off
Code fields, the system will wait for a tone before
proceeding.
■
, — Pause 1 Second
A comma employed anywhere in the On Code or Off
Code fields provokes a one second pause.
■
W — Wait for DTMF
If a "W" is placed in the On Code or Off Code fields,
then the system will wait for a DTMF tone before
proceeding.
■
H — Wait for Hangup
If an "H" is placed in the On Code or Off Code fields,
then the system will not continue until the called party
hangs up.
3 When you are finished, click Exit and keep clicking Exit until the Main
menu appears.
System Status Screen
System Status
Screen
237
The System Status screen displays information about the server
running the IP Messaging system.
To view system status information:
1 Click System Status on the Main menu and press Enter.
2 The System Status screen appears (Figure 93).
Figure 93 System Status screen
Table 50 lists the fields on this screen.
Table 50 Fields on the System Status Screen
Field
Description
System Wide
Shows activity for all MSUs (Media Server Units).
Megabytes Free
Shows the amount of free disk space for all MSUs.
Active Calls
The number of calls that are currently active on the system.
Calls This Hour
The number of calls for the previous hour on the system.
MSU Information
Information about each MSU in the system.
Mbytes
The amount of free disk space for this MSU.
Active
The number of calls that are currently active on this system.
Hour
The number of calls for the previous hour on this MSU.
Message Window
The box at the bottom of the screen displays error messages.
238
CHAPTER 9: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION AND SYSTEM STATUS
3 To access more information about an MSU, click the MSU box in the main
System Status window (Figure 94).
Figure 94 MSU Information
4 Click Delt to delete the selected MSU from the System Status Profile. To
return to the System Status screen, click Exit.
System Alarms
The two buttons on the right-hand side of the System Status screen
(above the Exit button) show information about alarms. There are four
types of alarms: Critical, Major, Minor, and Zero. Click on a red alarm box
to clear the alarm.
Table 51 lists the alarm color codes.
Table 51 Alarm Color Codes
Color
Type of Alarm
Green - Green
None
Green - Red
Minor alarm
Red - Green
Major alarm
Red - Red
Critical
10
PAGER TEMPLATES AND TIME
ZONES
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Pager Templates
■
Time Zones
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Pager Templates
The Pager Template Administration screen enables you to configure a
pager template.
To configure a pager template:
1 Click Pager Templates on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Pager Template Administration screen appears (Figure 95).
2 Replace Default with the name of a pager template and press Enter. The
following message displays:
Create Template <Template Name>? (Y/N)
3 Type Y and press Enter.
In Figure 95, a new template (Template1) has been added.
240
CHAPTER 10: PAGER TEMPLATES AND TIME ZONES
Figure 95 Pager Template Administration Window
4 Click Edit to display the second Pager Template Administration screen
(Figure 96).
Figure 96 Pager Template Administration - 2
5 Fill in the fields. See Table 52 for a description of the Pager Template
Administration fields.
Pager Templates
241
Table 52 Fields on the Pager Template Administration Screen
Field Name
Description
Pager Number
The phone number associated with the pager company.
Pager PIN
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) required to access the
pager.
Pager Callback
The string that has the same values as the number (displayed on
the pager when the page is received).
Pager Template
The code in this field defines how pager notification is sent. The
codes on the right side of the screen define the dialing string.
For example:
n@s = dial phone number, wait for answer, enter callback
number.
See Table 53 for a description of the available codes.
Table 53 Pager Template Administration Symbols
Symbol
Description
&
Hook Flash — Sends a hook flash signal to the switch.
,
Pause one second — A comma in any field produces a 1-second pause.
.x.
Pause x seconds, a pause of x number of seconds — Put in any field
except the pager number field.
@
Wait for an answer — Waits for an answer indication before continuing.
E
Extension Mailbox number
G
Callback or Login
H
Wait for hang-up — An H in this field causes the system to wait until the
called party hangs up before proceeding.
I
Time — The time format is HHMM.
L
Log-in — The subscriber identification or mailbox number.
N
Phone — A 10-digit telephone number in North America. The phone
number from the pager template is used if available. Otherwise, the
phone number for the subscriber is used.
P
PIN string — Some pagers have this function which uses the PIN from
the template if available. Otherwise, the subscriber PIN is used.
Q
Date — The date format is MMDDYY.
R
Number of Message — Contains the number of new messages in the
subscriber's mailbox.
S
Callback String — The callback string is what appears on the pager.
U
Wait for the tone — When a U is in the pager template field, the system
waits for a tone before proceeding.
242
CHAPTER 10: PAGER TEMPLATES AND TIME ZONES
Table 53 Pager Template Administration Symbols (continued)
Symbol
Description
&
Hook Flash — Sends a hook flash signal to the switch.
,
Pause one second — A comma in any field produces a 1-second pause.
.x.
Pause x seconds, a pause of x number of seconds — Put in any field
except the pager number field.
@
Wait for an answer — Waits for an answer indication before continuing.
E
Extension Mailbox number
G
Callback or Login
H
Wait for hang-up — An H in this field causes the system to wait until the
called party hangs up before proceeding.
I
Time — The time format is HHMM.
L
Log-in — The subscriber identification or mailbox number.
W
Wait for silence — A W in this field causes the system to wait for silence
on the line before proceeding.
X
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) of last message — The caller
identification number is used if available. This field can be blank, even on
systems that collect ANIs.
Y
Media of last message — The three media for the last message are (1)
voice, (2) fax, or (3) both.
6 Click Save to save configurations and return to the Pager Template
Administration window.
7 Click Cncl to cancel configurations and return to the Pager Template
Administration window.
8 Delete a pager template by selecting the pager template name in the
Pager Template Name field and clicking Delt. Type Y and press Enter at
the prompt to confirm deletion.
Time Zones
The Time Zone Administration screen enables you to configure the time
zone for your system.
To configure the time zone:
1 Click Time Zones on the Main menu and press Enter.
The Time Zone Administration window appears.
The Time Zone Name Field is blank because it defaults to the time zone of
the IP Messaging server.
Time Zones
243
2 Click Table to select a time zone other than the server default.
3 Select a time zone from the Time zone name drop-down list and press
Enter.
Figure 97 shows the Time Zone Administration screen and the
drop-down list.
Figure 97 Time Zone Administration List
4 Delete a time zone by selecting the time zone from the Time Zone
Name drop-down list and clicking Delete. Type Y and press Enter to
confirm the deletion.
If you want to add a new time zone to the list (or add back a time zone
you have deleted), enter the UNIX code for the time zone in the UNIX
code field. Each time zone has an associated UNIX code. For example,
the code for the Eastern Daylight Time time zone is EST5EDT. Next, enter
the name of the time zone in the Time Zone Name text box and press
Enter.
244
CHAPTER 10: PAGER TEMPLATES AND TIME ZONES
11
AUTO ATTENDANT
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Auto Attendant Overview
■
Provisioning the Auto Attendant
■
Telephone User Interface
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
246
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
Auto Attendant
Overview
The IP Messaging Auto Attendant feature provides call handling
capabilities by automatically answering calls and providing the caller with
preconfigured options.
The Auto Attendant can perform the following functions:
■
Route callers to telephone numbers or mailboxes.
■
Provide a Dial-By-Name directory to assist callers.
■
Provide Interactive Voice Response (IVR) so callers can select audio-text
voice messages or retrieve faxes on demand.
■
Transfer callers to a Voice Form mailbox so they can leave recorded
information in response to specific Voice Form prompts. Voice Form
mailboxes are enabled in the Subscriber Profile; see Table 24 in
Chapter 5.
■
Allow a subscriber to create a personal set of menu options that
enable a caller to select from a number of prerecorded messages
(Message On Demand). MOD mailboxes are enabled in the Subscriber
Profile; see Table 24 in Chapter 5.
■
Provide multiple language support.
■
■
You can configure different Auto Attendants on the same IP
Messaging system to use different languages.
You can also configure one Auto Attendant to use multiple
languages. This option allows the caller to hear prompts in a
preferred language such as English or Canandian French.
Callers can transfer from the Auto Attendant to a live attendant or a live
attendant can transfer a caller to the Auto Attendant.
Table 54 defines Auto Attendant terminology used in this chapter.
Table 54 Auto Attendant Terminology
Term
Definition
Auto Attendant Tree
An Auto Attendant tree consists of all selections available to
callers for a specific Auto Attendant installation.
Interactive Voice
Response
IVR is a general term used to describe a system that plays
pre-recorded menu prompts to callers and accepts
touch-tone commands.
Key Button
A Key Button is a touch-tone digit (key) that callers press to
make a menu selection.
Auto Attendant Overview
247
Table 54 Auto Attendant Terminology (continued)
Term
Definition
Main Menu
The Main Menu is the first menu presented to callers when
the Auto Attendant answers a call.
Menu
A menu is a group of related options that callers use by
pressing a Key Button in response to a voice prompt.
Menu Prompt
A menu prompt is a pre-recorded voice file that asks callers
to make a specific selection by entering a touch-tone digit.
Message
A message is a pre-recorded voice or fax file that provides
information to callers.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Node
A node is a basic unit of an Auto Attendant tree. A node
provides a specific function or menu of choices to callers.
A simple Auto Attendant could consist of the following elements:
■
A top-level company greeting with prompts that enable a caller to
access various departments and individuals within the company. For
example, you could record “Thank you for calling the ABC
Corporation. For Sales, press 1. For Technical Support, press 2. For
directions to this location, press 3. For the Operator, press 0.
■
Key 1 accesses the Sales node within the Auto Attendant. The caller
hears prompts for each member of the Sales department. For
example, you could record “For Bill Smith, press 1. For Marie Torres,
press 2. To return to the previous menu, press 3.”
Pressing the key associated with a Sales person transfers the call to
that person’s extension.
■
Key 2 accesses the Technical Support node within the Auto Attendant.
As with the Sales node, the caller hears prompts for each member of
the Technical Support department.
Pressing the key associated with a Technical Support person transfers
the call to that person’s extension.
■
Key 3 accesses the company location node. When a caller presses 3,
the Auto Attendant plays a recording that provides driving directions
to the company. The key 3 node could have its own nodes that
provide directions based on the caller’s location (“If you are driving
from the north, press 1. If you are driving from the east,...”.)
■
Key 0 connects the caller to an Operator.
248
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
Provisioning the
Auto Attendant
Creating a New Auto
Attendant
This section describes how to set up an Auto Attendant.
To create a new Auto Attendant:
1 Click Auto Attendant on the Main menu and press Enter.
■
If the system does not have any previously defined Auto Attendants,
the Auto Attendant Setup Wizard screen appears (Figure 98).
■
If an Auto Attendant has been defined, the Auto Attendant
Configuration screen appears (Figure 100). You can run the Setup
Wizard from this screen at any time by clicking the Wizd button.
Figure 98 Auto Attendant Configuration Screen - Setup Wizard
2 Enter a name for this Auto Attendant in the Node Name text box.
3 Click the box to the right of the Mailbox No text box. A list of mailboxes
appears.
You must associate a voice mailbox with this Auto Attendant. The
mailbox serves as the Telephone User Interface (TUI) for this Auto
Attendant. You can use this TUI to record voice messages or capture FAX
messages that are assigned to various menu prompts in the Attendant.
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Provisioning the Auto Attendant
249
4 Select a mailbox number and press Enter. The mailbox number appears in
the Mailbox No text box.
5 Click Next.
Alternatively, if you have exported an Auto Attendant configuration to a
file (using the Expt button; see “Exporting an Auto Attendant”), you can
use the existing configuration as a template for a new Attendant.
6 From the next screen (Figure 99), enter the telephone number or range of
telephone numbers that will forward to this Auto Attendant. The Auto
Attendant will answer calls placed to the number or range of numbers
you specify.
Figure 99 Auto Attendant - Range of Numbers
■
If you know the range of numbers, enter the lowest number (Low
End) and the highest number (High End) in the appropriate text
boxes. Press Enter after entering each number.
■
To specify a single number (a range of one), enter the same number in
the Low End input box and the High End input box. Press Enter
after entering each number.
■
If you do not know the range of numbers, click Range and then select
a range from the drop-down list.
The telephone numbers in the Range fields should have the same number
of digits as the main access number for these telephones.
Unanswered calls to these numbers are directed to this Auto Attendant.
250
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
After completing the wizard, you can modify the range (if necessary) on
the Auto Attendant Configuration screen.
7 Click Next twice and then click Finish.
The Auto Attendant Configuration screen appears (Figure 100).
Once you have established the identity of your Auto Attendant, you are
ready to configure the menu system that will support the specific needs
of callers to this Auto Attendant. Before starting the configuration,
confirm you have selected the correct Auto Attendant and the correct
node by checking the displayed information on the Auto Attendant
Configuration screen.
Figure 100 Auto Attendant Configuration Screen
See one of the following topics for detailed information on each section
of the Auto Attendant Configuration screen:
■
Assigning Key Button Options
■
Configuring Other Auto Attendant Options
■
Advanced Options
■
Creating Sub-nodes
■
Recording a Voice File
■
Scheduling an Auto Attendant
■
Exporting an Auto Attendant
Provisioning the Auto Attendant
251
You can run the Auto Attendant Setup Wizard at any time by clicking
Wizd.
Assigning Key Button
Options
To map Auto Attendant functions to telephone keys:
1 Click on the blank space in the Key Button box to the right of the
required Key Button number.
The drop-down list of Key Button options opens (Figure 101).
Figure 101 Auto Attendant - Key Button Options
You can assign a function to the field labeled Timeout. For example, you
can specify that a caller who does not press a button before the timeout
period (the default is 4 seconds) expires is automatically transferred to an
operator extension.
2 Select an option from the drop-down list to use with this Key Button. This
defines the function that occurs when callers select that key.
Table 55 lists the Key Button options.
Table 55 Key Buttons
Key Button Option
Descriptions
Speak and Hang-Up
Plays a voice file and then hangs up.
Go to Sub-node
Goes to a sub-node level where a sub-menu is provided to
the callers.
252
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
Table 55 Key Buttons (continued)
Key Button Option
Descriptions
Message and Return
Plays a single voice message (Audio-text) or presents a single
fax message (Fax-On-Demand), then returns to the same
node so that the caller can make more Key Button
selections. The voice message setting can be established
only through the Telephone User Interface (TUI). See
“Telephone User Interface”.
Error Handle
Announces that the caller has pressed an invalid key.
Dial-By-Name
Runs a name search feature. The result of the name look-up
is used by the system as a Transfer Function or a Mailbox
Greeting Function, based on the Node Default Setting.
To enable this option, you must configure the following
values in the Other Settings section (see Table 56) of the
Auto Attendant Configuration screen:
Send Faxes
■
Set the DigGet field to 1.
■
Set the FunDig field to Personal Greetings.
Allows the caller to select faxes sent to the Auto Attendant
mailbox and sends the faxes to a printer.
1 Enable the Fax option for MB Send Media field in the
Subscriber Profile for this Auto Attendant. See Table 13
in Chapter 5.
2 Ensure that any fax messages you want the caller to be
able to select in the mailbox are associated with this Auto
Attendant.
3 Access the mailbox associated with this Auto Attendant.
From the Main menu of the Telephone User Interface
(TUI), press 9, then 6. Follow the prompts to create one
or more Message and Return options. Record a
meaningful prompt for each option and assign a fax
message from the mailbox to each prompt.
A caller to the Auto Attendant can now select one or more
faxes by pressing the appropriate Message and Return key,
and then print the fax (or faxes) by using the Send Fax
option. The caller does not have to print every fax
individually, but can print them all at once.
Note: Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
Login
Allows callers to log in to their mailbox.
Provisioning the Auto Attendant
253
Table 55 Key Buttons (continued)
Key Button Option
Descriptions
Transfer to Phone
Redirects the call to the specified telephone number. When
you specify the extension, be sure to enter any prefix
required to dial the call.
When the caller selects the key button associated with this
option and the call is transferred, IP Messaging has no
further control of the call and no IP Messaging channels are
used. Compare with the Bridge Transfer option.
Personal Greetings
Accesses the personal greetings for a mailbox and allows the
caller to leave a voicemail message.
Bridge Transfer
Transfers the caller to the specified internal extension. When
you specify the extension, be sure to enter any prefix
required to dial the call.
When the caller selects the key button associated with this
option, the transfer function seizes a second channel and
dials the telephone number. The system supervises the call
and if it is answered, bridges the caller to the dialed
telephone number. Unlike the Transfer to Phone option, IP
Messaging retains control of the call. If finishing the bridged
transfer, the caller remains in voicemail.
Go to Any Node
Selects from a list of already defined nodes, including other
Auto Attendant nodes.
No Action
There is no action specified for this key.
To delete a pre-defined field, select No Action.
Configuring Other
Auto Attendant
Options
The Other Settings section on the Auto Attendant Configuration screen
allows you to set up additional Auto Attendant features. For example,
you can select a menu prompt file, specify a node level number, and
indicate the function to execute when a caller enters a number not
assigned a Key Button function.
Table 56 describes the fields in the Other Settings section of the Auto
Attendant Configuration screen.
254
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
Table 56 Auto Attendant Configuration Screen - Other Settings
Setting
Description
Speak
Specifies the audio file the system plays when a call is
directed to the currently selected Auto Attendant node or
sub-node.
To select an audio file or record a new file, click Recorded
File.
■
Select an existing file from the pop-up list and click Sel.
or
■
Record a new voice file and click New Conn (see
“Recording a Voice File”).
Number
To enter a new range of telephone numbers for the Auto
Attendant setup, click Add New Range.
After entering the low and high end, click RG to list the
current ranges.
RngSet
To list the currently active number ranges and select a
range to delete, click Delete a Range.
Nd Lvl
To enter the node level number of the currently selected
Auto Attendant node or sub-node, click Nd Lvl. The
top-level node (the entry point for a caller) is 1.
MbxNum
To enter the mailbox number, click MbxNum (available
only for the root node).
Provisioning the Auto Attendant
255
Table 56 Auto Attendant Configuration Screen - Other Settings (continued)
Setting
Description
DigGet
You can set Digits to Get to any number. This is the
maximum number of digits that the system collects from
the caller so that the system can execute a defined Auto
Attendant function defined in the FunDig field.
When the DigGet field is set to a specified number, each
digit entered by the caller is checked to see if it matches
any key button defined. If the digit entered is matched in
the key button assignment, the function defined under
that key button is executed and no more digits are
collected by the system, nor is any function defined in the
FunDig field executed.
If no digit entered by the caller matches the key button
assignments (or nothing is defined in key button fields), the
system continues to collect digits until the maximum
number of digits are collected or when the timeout period
(the default is 4 seconds) is reached, and then the system
executes the function defined in the FunDig field.
For certain functions defined in the FunDig field, the
system does not necessarily need input from the caller
(DigGet set to zero). In this case, the setup screen prompts
for a specific number so that the system can perform the
function such as logging into mailbox 6463.
Not every available function in the FunDig field needs a
number. For example, “Go to any node” does not need a
specific number.
FunDig
The function defined in this field is executed only when no
functions are defined in any key buttons requested by the
caller. The available functions include:
Log-in — Allows log in to a specific mailbox number.
Transfer to Phone — Transfers the call to the assigned
telephone number
Personal Greetings — Plays a personal greeting for a
specific mailbox.
Go to Any Node — Branches to a node.
Bridge Transfer — Transfers the call as a bridged call.
Dig Trans Functi — Not supported in the current
release.
No Action — No action occurs for a key button press.
AA_Sug
To select a Send User Group (SUG) to associate with this
Auto Attendant, click AA_Sug for the Search by Name
function.
256
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
Table 56 Auto Attendant Configuration Screen - Other Settings (continued)
Setting
Description
Lang
To select the language to use for an entire Auto Attendant
Session (an Auto Attendant node and all its sub-nodes),
click Lang and select a language from the list of installed
languages. See “Adding a Set of Language Prompts” for
information on configuring language support.
The selected language setting remains active throughout a
call session unless it is changed by a mailbox setting. If no
language is specified, the Auto Attendant language is the
default system language.
To configure a multi-language Auto Attendant, first
configure each individual Auto Attendant node in its
respective language and set the language flag accordingly.
Next, configure the main Auto Attendant node, which
transfers to the individual language nodes using the Go to
Any Node action (see Table 55).
The following Auto Attendant Key Button actions (see
Table 55) use the Lang setting:
■
Message and Return
■
Error Handle
■
Dial-By-Name
■
Send Faxes
■
Transfer to Phone
■
Bridge Transfer
■
Login
The following Auto Attendant Key Button actions (see
Table 55) do not use the Lang setting because they
provide their own language:
■
Go to Sub-node
■
Go to Any Node
■
Personal Greetings
■
Speak and Hang-Up
Provisioning the Auto Attendant
Advanced Options
257
Table 57 lists the items available when you click the Advanced Opts
drop-down list on the Auto Attendant Configuration screen.
Table 57 Advanced Options
Advanced Options
Descriptions
Hide Resp In Logfile
Check this box to hide the caller response in a log file
separate from any other response from the caller. A typical
application is to hide the credit card number called in.
No Cut Through
Check this box to force the caller to listen to the entire
message before proceeding.
Play Prmt Once Only
Check this box to play the prompt message for this node
once instead of three times (default).
End Call After Prmpt
Check this box to end the call after the message prompt
has been played.
Specify Node Type
Check this box and set to 1 to check the Auto Attendant’s
Send User Group before transferring to the specified
extension. This function does not apply to bridged
transfers.
Confirm Response
Check this box to play back a confirmation message after
receiving a caller response for this node. A typical
application is confirmation of receipt of a caller credit card
number.
258
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
Table 57 Advanced Options
Advanced Options
Descriptions
Dig Trans Func Type
This Auto Attendant function checks extensions being
transferred to against Send User Groups (SUG) and
changes its call transfer behavior depending on how it is
set.
This function also has the ability to suppress the “Please
hold for...” prompt that occurs when the AA transfers a
call to an extension with a mailbox.
You have the following options:
1 Set this function to 1 so that the system checks the
extension being transferred to against the SUG
configured for the Auto Attendant.
The following scenarios may occur depending on how
mailboxes are configured:
■
If the extension matches a mailbox in the SUG, the call
is transferred.
■
If the system cannot match the mailbox to one
belonging to the SUG, then it transfers the caller to the
mailbox’s voicemail.
■
If the extension being transferred to does not have a
mailbox, then the call will be dropped. In other words,
if the phone doesn’t have a mailbox, then you cannot
use an Auto Attendant to transfer the call if this feature
is enabled.
2 Set this function to 2 to suppress the “hold for”
prompt and bypass the extension check against the
SUG.
3 Set this function to 3 to suppress the “hold for”
prompt and check the extension against the SUG.
Note: Setting this parameter to a value other than 1, 2, or
3 has no effect.
Clean Keypress Buffer
Check this box to clear the key press buffer that was used
to store all key presses on the previous node, so that
responses for this node will be stored in a new buffer.
Speech Recognition
Not supported in the current release.
Provisioning the Auto Attendant
Creating Sub-nodes
259
A sub-node is a sub-menu that is accessed from a higher level. This
section describes how to create sub-nodes and assign Key Buttons.
To create a sub-node:
1 Select the Key Button that you want to assign the sub-node.
2 Select Go to Sub-node from the drop-down list and press Enter.
Go to Any Node allows you to select from a list of nodes that are already
defined (including other Auto Attendants).
3 To access Key Button options in the sub-node, click the Attendant Name
and then select the sub-node to modify.
When a sub-node is created, click the node name and a drop-down menu
appears for any additional nodes.
You can specify when a sub-node is available to callers. See “Scheduling
an Auto Attendant”.
Recording a Voice File
To connect to a selected telephone to record a greeting, voice prompt, or
other message:
1 Click Conn.
2 In the Enter a Phone Number text box, enter the extension for any phone
in your system and press Enter.
The system dials the telephone number.
3 Answer the ringing extension.
4 Click New.
5 Record your voice file.
The system prompts you to save or rerecord the file.
When you follow the system prompt on the phone to save the file, the IP
Messaging interface displays an Enter a file name text box.
6 Enter a file name for the recorded voice file and press Enter.
7 To record another voice file, click New. If you are finished click End and
hang up.
260
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
Associating a Voice File with an Auto Attendant Function
You can use the recording for any Auto Attendant option that uses a
voice file. For example, to use the file for the prompt or the greeting a
caller hears when the Auto Attendant is first accessed, follow these steps:
1 Click in the Speak field.
The right side of the Auto Attendant configuration screen displays a
Select a File list of available audio files.
2 Scroll through the list and select the file you want to use.
3 Click Sel or press Enter.
Scheduling an Auto
Attendant
You can configure time-based schedules for Auto Attendant nodes and
sub-nodes. The schedule defines which node will be invoked at any given
time. The schedule allows for special day-of-week and day-of-year
settings, as well as a default setting that covers all other times. If no node
is defined for a particular time, the basic (parent) Auto Attendant node is
active.
Before you configure time-based Auto Attendant sub-nodes, you must
set up a basic Auto Attendant node that captures the range of extensions
and is active 24/7. This node then forwards callers to the appropriate
Auto Attendant sub-node based on the defined sub-node schedules.
After configuring the basic Auto Attendant node, configure all required
Auto Attendant sub-nodes (see “Creating Sub-nodes”). A separate node
is required whenever a prompt or an action changes. The Auto Attendant
does not support time-based prompts or actions within the same node.
To branch to different Auto Attendant sub-nodes according to a time
schedule:
1 Click Time. The Time Configuration screen appears (Figure 102).
There are 26 possible schedules For each Auto Attendant.
Provisioning the Auto Attendant
261
Figure 102 Auto Attendant Time Configuration Screen
2 Click Node and then select a node from the list. Press Enter.
The available node appears on the Time Configuration screen.
3 Click DofY (day of year), DofW (day of week), or Dflt (default).
■
■
■
DofY — Allows to you specify one particular date and a time
range.
DofW — Allows to you specify one or more days of the week and
a time range.
Dlft — Allows to you specify a time range.
4 Enter the schedule. To select a time, click in the time selection box. One
click advances the displayed time (one hour increments for hours; 15
minute increments for minutes). The hour selection box uses a 24-hour
cycle. Click OK when you are finished setting the schedule.
To delete the selected schedule setup, click Delt.
5 Click Exit to return to the Auto Attendant Configuration screen.
appears.
If you do not define a time schedule for an Auto Attendant node, the
schedule defaults to the 7/24 (all day, any day) if the time zone setup falls
under this option. Otherwise, depending on the time zone, it defaults to
Day of the week or Day of the year.
262
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
The time schedules for specific nodes fall into this order: Day of the year,
Day of the week, or every day setup.
Exporting an Auto
Attendant
To export an Auto Attendant to a flat file with menu prompts, message
files, and fax files (that you can use as a backup file on another system):
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
1 Click Expt.
2 Enter the name of the exported file in the text box and then press Enter.
The file is stored in the /usr/app/app.dir directory by default.
Using an Existing Configuration
To use an existing Auto Attendant as a template:
1 Click the Wizd button on the Auto Attendant Configuration screen
(Figure 98).
2 Click the Import button.
3 Type the filename in the Import filename field and press Enter or
Continue.
The system tells you that the import has succeeded and displays a
summary for your Auto Attendant template.
4 Click OK to exit the Auto Attendant Wizard.
Telephone User Interface
Telephone User
Interface
263
The TUI allows you to update or modify the voice and fax messages in the
Auto Attendant. However, you cannot create or delete an Auto
Attendant through the TUI. You must do this through the IP Messaging
provisioning interface. The TUI allows you to:
■
Record, revise, or delete voice prompts heard by callers.
■
Record, revise, or delete voice tags for fax messages.
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
■
Record, revise, or delete Message-on-Demand messages.
■
Select messages from your mailbox as the content for Fax-on-Demand
or Message-on-Demand messages.
You must have this information available before starting:
■
The keys you want to update.
■
The new message you want to record.
■
Confirmation that faxes can be sent and received by your
administrator mailbox (for Fax-on-Demand).
Use Table 58 to organize the information.
Table 58 Key Button Table
Key
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Function
New Message
264
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
TUI Menu System for
the Auto Attendant
The Auto Attendant menu options available through the TUI allow you to
record prompts and messages, add sub-nodes, select messages from the
mailbox, and record a voice tag for fax messages.
You can use the TUI to modify an existing Auto Attendant created with
the Application interface (see “Provisioning the Auto Attendant”). You
cannot use the TUI to create an Auto Attendant.
To access the Auto Attendant menu options:
1 Access the IP Messaging mailbox that has been configured for the Auto
Attendant.
2 Press [9] on the Main menu.
3 Press [6] on the Setup Options menu.
The voice prompt system announces “Auto Attendant administration
menu.” Figure 103 shows the Auto Attendant menu system.
Figure 103 Auto Attendant Menu – Telephone User Interface
START MENU
MODIFY MENU TREE
Modify Menu Tree
11
CANCEL
**
Record Prompt
Replay Prompt
11
Assign Keys
22
Re-record Prompt
22
Go to another Menu
33
00
Accept Prompt
##
CANCEL
**
HELP
ACCEPT PROMPT
Assign Keys
RECORD PROMPT
11
ASSIGN KEYS
22
ASSIGN A MESSAGE
ASSIGN A FUNCTION
11
Assign a Function
11
Assign a Message
Skip this key
22
Assign a Menu
22
HELP
00
HELP
00
SELECT FROM MAILBOX
Record Message
11
Select Message
##
Select from Mailbox
22
Skip to next message
11
Previous message
22
CANCEL
**
Telephone User Interface
265
When you press [1], the system plays the top-level menu prompt
assigned to this Auto Attendant when the Attendant was created. At this
point, you can:
■
Press [1] to record a new top-level menu prompt.
After rerecording the menu prompt and accepting the new recording,
you can assign key functions.
■
Press [2] to assign key functions for the current menu.
You can either assign a message to a key (by recording a message or
selecting a message from the mailbox) or assign a sub-menu
(sub-node) to the key. Alternatively, you can skip a key and go to the
next key.
Once you cycle through all the keys in a menu, the voice prompts for
the Auto Attendant menu system will ask you to assign key functions
for each sub-menu you created, if any.
■
Press [3] to skip the top-level menu system and go directly to a
previously created sub-menu system. If no sub-menus (sub-nodes)
have been created (through either the Application utility or the TUI),
Auto Attendant menu system does not provide option [3].
As shown in Figure 103, some menus allow you to press [0] for help with
that particular menu, and some menus allow you to press [*] to cancel
the current operation and return to the previous menu.
266
CHAPTER 11: AUTO ATTENDANT
12
DISTRIBUTION LISTS
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Distribution List Overview
■
Subscriber Distribution Lists
■
System Distribution List
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Distribution List
Overview
Distribution lists are predefined lists of calling parties.
There are two types of distribution lists:
■
Subscriber — The subscriber can create a personal distribution list as
a mailbox configuration option. This list is exclusive to the subscriber
who creates it.
■
System — The system administrator can create system distribution
lists for subscriber access to a defined set of mailboxes or external
numbers.
System distribution lists can contain one or more classes of service,
subscribers, other distribution lists, or external numbers. These
distribution lists contain a group of recipients (on or off the system).
System administrators create or change system distribution lists based
on the system privilege assigned to their login ID (the Permissions
screen on the Administrator Profile screen). The system administrator
can assign a distribution list to a Send User Group (SUG) that is
identified by a subscriber, a class of service, and a company, or
division.
268
CHAPTER 12: DISTRIBUTION LISTS
Distribution lists must be enabled. You can enable lists for the Class of
Service (COS) assigned to a subscriber on the COS Profile screen. See
“Provisioning the COS Profile”. The values for the Distribution Lists and
Entries Per List parameters must be greater than 0 (zero). You can also
enable distribution lists for individual subscribers on the Subscriber Profile
options screen. See “Changing Profile Settings”.
Subscriber
Distribution Lists
To create a subscriber distribution list:
1 Click Distribution Lists on the Main menu.
The Distribution Lists Management screen appears (Figure 104).
Figure 104 Distribution Lists Management Screen
2 Select a mailbox number from the drop-down list and press Enter.
The system prompts you to create a list (only if one doesn’t already exist):
Owner has no lists defined. Create? (Y/N/ESC):
3 Enter Y and press Enter.
The system prompts you enter a list identifier.
4 Enter a list identifier in the text box (maximum of 3 digits) and press
Enter.
The Distribution List Entries screen appears (Figure 105).
Subscriber Distribution Lists
269
Figure 105 Subscriber Distribution List Entries Screen
5 Add subscribers by using the buttons on this screen.
Select the appropriate button in Table 59.
Table 59 Subscriber Distribution List Field Descriptions
Button Name
Description
Subs
Click this button to select from a drop-down list of subscriber
mailbox numbers. See “Adding Subscribers”.
PhNo
Click this button to enter an external number. See “Adding Phone
Numbers”.
VPIM
Click this button to enter a VPIM destination. See “Adding VPIM
Destinations”.
List
Click this button to select from a drop-down list of other
distribution list numbers. See “Adding Lists”.
Emai
Click this button to enter an e-mail address. See “Adding E-mail
Addresses”.
Note: E-mail is supported on the 3Com® Native Telephone User
Interface (TUI) only.
Delt
Click this button to delete the selected distribution list. See
“Editing a Distribution List”.
Cmpy
Click this button to add a company to the distribution list.
Note: This option is only enabled if System Privileges (SysPv) have
been enabled for the mailbox that owns the list. This is
accomplished through an individual subscriber profile (Table 13)
or through a Class of Service profile (Table 28).
270
CHAPTER 12: DISTRIBUTION LISTS
Table 59 Subscriber Distribution List Field Descriptions (continued)
Button Name
Description
COSs
Click this button to add a Class of Service to a distribution list.
Note: This option is only enabled if System Privileges (SysPv) have
been enabled for the mailbox that owns the list. This is
accomplished through an individual subscriber profile (Table 13)
or through a Class of Service profile (Table 28).
Address Book
Click this button to display a drop-down list of entries in the
subscriber's address book. See “Address Book”.
Note: This option is enabled only if there are entries in this
subscriber address book and the personal address book feature is
turned on. See “Configuring Mailbox Options”.
Import TxtFl
Click this button to enter the file name to be imported. See
“Importing Distribution List Entries”.
Note: This option is only enabled if System Privileges (SysPv) have
been enabled for the mailbox that owns the list. This is
accomplished through an individual subscriber profile (Table 13)
or through a Class of Service profile (Table 28).
Adding Subscribers
To add subscribers to a distribution list:
1 Create a distribution list or select an already existing distribution list.
2 Click the Subs button.
3 Double-click the subscriber mailbox number. The number is added to the
list.
4 To add additional mailbox numbers, click Subs to re-display the list of
mailboxes and double-click another subscriber mailbox number.
5 Repeat step 3 to add more subscribers.
6 Click Exit when you are finished adding subscribers to the list.
The system prompts you to save changes.
7 Enter Y and press Enter.
Adding Phone
Numbers
To add phone numbers to a distribution list:
1 Create a distribution list or select an already existing distribution list.
2 Click PhNo.
This message appears:
Enter External Destination
Subscriber Distribution Lists
271
3 Enter a phone number in the text box (without dashes)
The number appears in the distribution list.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add more phone numbers.
5 When you are finished adding phone numbers to the list, click Exit.
The system prompts you to save changes.
6 Enter Y and press Enter.
Adding VPIM
Destinations
Voice Profile for Internet Mail (VPIM) is an industry-standard protocol
(rfc3801) that allows subscribers to exchange messages between
different voice mail systems. By entering VPIM destinations in a
distribution list, subscribers in different locations can be members of a
group distribution list that spans multiple sites. See Chapter 14 for
information on configuring VPIM destinations.
To add VPIM destinations to a distribution list:
1 Click VPIM.
The following prompt appears:
VPIM Destination.
2 Enter a VPIM destination in the text box.
Use the format <prefix><mailbox_number>. For example, if the VPIM
destination prefix is 888 and the mailbox number is 1234, you would
enter 8881234 in the VPIM destination text box.
The address appears in the distribution list.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more VPIM destinations.
4 When you are finished adding VPIM destinations to the list, click Exit.
The system prompts you to save changes.
5 Enter Y and press Enter.
Adding Lists
Use the following procedure to add lists to a distribution list:
1 Click List.
A drop-down list of distribution lists appears.
2 Select the list you want and then press Enter.
The list number appears in the distribution list.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more distribution lists.
272
CHAPTER 12: DISTRIBUTION LISTS
4 When you are finished adding distribution lists to the list, click Exit.
The system prompts you to save changes.
5 Enter Y and press Enter.
Adding E-mail
Addresses
To add e-mail addresses to a distribution list:
1 Click Emai.
The following prompt appears:
Enter Email destination.
2 Enter an e-mail address in the textbox.
The address appears in the distribution list.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more e-mail addresses.
4 When you are finished adding e-mail addresses to the list, click Exit.
The system prompts you to save changes.
5 Enter Y and press Enter.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
Editing a Distribution
List
To edit a distribution list:
1 Select a mailbox number from the drop-down list.
2 Select a distribution list from the displayed Lists box and click Edit.
3 Click any of the available buttons and make the appropriate edits.
For example, if you want to delete a subscriber from your distribution list,
select it from the displayed list and Click Delt. Type Y at the prompt and
press Enter to apply your changes.
4 Save any changes at the system prompt.
Address Book
The Address Book option is enabled only if there are entries in this
subscriber address book and the Personal Address Book (PAB) feature is
enabled. You can create address book entries on the Subscriber Profile
Option screen (see “Configuring Mailbox Options”).
The Distribution List can contain:
■
Home and office phone number
Subscriber Distribution Lists
■
Private and office cell number
■
Private and office pager number
■
Private and office fax number
■
Private and office e-mail address
■
Subscriber mailbox number
273
Using the Address Book Option
To use the Address Book option:
1 Click Address Book on the Distribution Lists Management screen for
adding entries (see Figure 105).
The Personal Address Book for the selected mailbox number appears.
Figure 106 shows an example of this screen with one address book entry
(“Anna User2”). The right side of the screen shows PAB fields and values
for the first address book entry.
Checkboxes appear only in front of the fields that have defined values. To
enter values, click Addr on the Subscriber Profile Options screen.
Additional entries will be listed alphabetically on the left side of the
screen. You can navigate to an entry by clicking the entry name or by
clicking the appropriate alphabetic tab.
Figure 106 Personal Address Book Screen
2 Select the PAB entry you want to add to the distribution list.
274
CHAPTER 12: DISTRIBUTION LISTS
3 Click Selt.
■
■
■
Click the check box next to the entry or entries you want to include
in the distribution list. To remove a selected entry, uncheck the box.
To add all PAB entries of a particular type to the distribution list,
highlight the entry type and click SltA. For example, to add all
home phone entries in a PAB, click any Home phone entry and
click SltA.
To remove all PAB entries of a particular type from the distribution
list, highlight the entry type and click ClrA.
4 Click Done when you are finished adding entries.
Figure 107 show the Distribution List Management screen after the home
phone and mailbox for Anna User2 have been added to the distribution
list owned by the subscriber assigned to mailbox number 1000.
Figure 107 Distribution List with PAB Entries
Subscriber Distribution Lists
Importing
Distribution List
Entries
275
You can also add distribution list entries through the Import TxtFl
(Import Text File) feature button on the Distribution List Management
screen.
This option is only enabled if System Privileges (SysPv) have been enabled
for the mailbox that owns the list. This is accomplished through an
individual subscriber profile (Table 13) or through a Class of Service
profile (Table 28).
1 Click Import TxtFl.
The system prompts you enter a filename.
2 Enter the filename to be imported in the text box and press Enter.
The file format of the imported file must be in simple text with one
subscriber or alias per line. Enter the pathname and the filename at the
prompt. If the path is not provided, the system searches for the file.
Once you have imported the file, you can add additional subscribers to
the list by using the appropriate button option (Subs, PhNo, Lists, and
Emai).
Adding a Company to
a Distribution List
To add all the subscribers who belong to a company or division within a
company:
1 Click Cmpy.
A drop-down list of companies appears.
2 Select the company you want and then press Enter.
The company name appears in the distribution list.
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more companies.
4 When you are finished adding companies to the list, click Exit.
The system prompts you to save changes.
5 Enter Y and press Enter.
Adding a Class of
Service to a
Distribution List
To add all the subscribers associated with a Class of Service:
1 Click k COSs. The following message appears:
Enter Class of Service, F1 for list:
2 Type in the COS or press F1 to select from a drop-down list.
276
CHAPTER 12: DISTRIBUTION LISTS
3 Press Enter.
The COS appears in the distribution list.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to add more Classes of Service.
5 When you are finished adding Classes of Service to the list, click Exit.
The system prompts you to save changes.
6 Enter Y and press Enter.
System Distribution
List
The System Administrator creates system distribution lists so that
subscribers can access a predefined set of mailboxes or external numbers.
System distribution lists eliminate the need for subscribers to create their
own lists.
System distribution lists contain a group of recipients (on or off the
system) for whom the subscriber can leave a message. These distribution
lists contain one or more classes of service, subscribers, other distribution
lists, or external numbers.
Creating a System
Distribution List
To create a System Distribution list:
1 On the Distribution List Management screen, type “System” in the
Owner text box and press Enter.
The system asks if you want to access entries in your personal address
book.
2 Type Y and press Enter.
The system prompts for a personal mailbox number.
3 Select a mailbox number and press Enter.
The system responds with the following prompt:
No system lists defined. Create? (Y/N/ESC):
4 Type Y and press Enter.
The system prompts for a list identifier.
5 Enter an identifier (maximum of 3 digits) and press Enter.
The system displays a screen similar to the Personal Distribution List (see
Figure 107) with one additional button:
System Distribution List
■
SUGs — Restricts distribution list use to members of a Send User
Group.
6 Click SUGs, select the SUG from the pop-up list, and press Enter.
7 Click Exit until the system prompts you to save your changes.
8 Type Y and press Enter.
277
278
CHAPTER 12: DISTRIBUTION LISTS
13
GLOBAL VOICEMAIL INTEGRATION
This chapter covers these global voicemail integration topics:
■
Description
■
Architecture
■
Features
■
Installation and Configuration
■
Local Office Administration
■
Adding a Subscriber to the Global Voicemail Central Server
Directory
■
Enabling Global Voicemail for a Class of Service
■
Enabling Global Voicemail using Web Provisioning
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Global voicemail integration is supported only on VCX systems.
Description
Global voicemail integration links regional and branch office IP Messaging
(IPM) servers and creates a universal mailbox directory. A specially
configured Global Voicemail Central Server coordinates the mailbox
creation and updates on local Regional and Branch office systems. When
global voicemail is enabled for two subscribers on different systems, they
can communicate as if they were hosted on the same system. Individual
systems are able to provide local voicemail services, so if connection to a
WAN is unavailable, voicemail service is uninterrupted.
280
CHAPTER 13: GLOBAL VOICEMAIL INTEGRATION
Architecture
A global voicemail integration setup may consist of:
■
A single IPM system, which is either a mirrored pair or a single system.
■
Multiple remote IPM systems set up as dual mirrored pairs or single
systems.
The Central Server (CS) is a service that can run on a dedicated IPM
system or on a Local Office (LO) system that carries voice traffic. The CS
service is independent of any voice traffic. On a combined LO/CS system,
if the Primary server fails, traffic is directed to the Secondary server and
the CS service becomes active on the Secondary.
When the Primary server comes back online, voice traffic returns to the
Primary, but the CS service connections to the LO remain on the
Secondary. Local Offices won’t reconnect to the Primary unless the
Secondary server fails.
Features
Global Name
Directory
Global voicemail integration has the features described below.
The global name directory allows subscribers in any remote office to look
up subscribers in other remote locations. Subscribers must have this
feature enabled and must be associated with the same Global Voicemail
Central Server.
Each remote office's IPM server has its own copy of the entire global
name directory and uses this data locally to look up subscribers by their
last names.
On a local system, if a new mailbox is added or a name is changed on an
existing mailbox, the global directory on the Global Voicemail Central
Server is updated. Each remote office system detects the change and
synchronizes its local copy of the directory with the Global Voicemail
Central Server.
If the Global Voicemail Central Server connection is unavailable, looking
up names can be accomplished locally with the existing copy of the
global name directory.
Features
Global Message
Sending
281
Global message sending allows subscribers to send, reply, and forward
messages to mailboxes hosted on other remote office systems. This
feature is transparent to users and makes it seem like remote mailboxes
are hosted on a local system.
The remote office that is sending the message uses the same interface
that communicates with the Global Voicemail Central Server, but the
connection is made directly to the remote office that is receiving the
message.
Connections to dual IPM remote office systems are supported. If the
primary IPM server is unavailable, then a connection is made to the
secondary server. If access to a certain remote office is unavailable, then
messages are queued. Connections are retried periodically, but if a
message is not delivered within 24 hours, then the message expires and is
deleted from the queue.
The sender receives a failure report in their mailbox. The failed message is
added to the sender’s Deleted Messages queue with the sender and
destination addresses reversed. This makes it easy to resend the message
by replying to it. Failure to act on this message means that the message
expires and is purged from the system.
Global Name
Announcements
Subscriber name announcement recordings are globally available across
all remote office systems. When a name announcement is recorded, the
announcement file is copied up to the Global Voicemail Central Server
and is made available to all other remote offices. The global directory
table is then updated with the file name and a time stamp.
When a name announcement file is needed for a mailbox on a remote
system, the file name is retrieved from the global directory and copied
down to the local system. Once this occurs, the file is permanently cached
on the local system. Subsequent requests for this announcement are
played from the local cache.
If a name announcement is re-recorded, the new announcement file is
copied up to the Global Voicemail Central Server. The global directory
table is then updated with a new name announcement and time stamp.
When a remote subscriber subsequently requests this name
announcement, it is again copied down to the local system.
If a name announcement cannot be retrieved within 2 seconds, then
either TTS (if available) will speak the name or the mailbox number will be
spoken.
282
CHAPTER 13: GLOBAL VOICEMAIL INTEGRATION
Global Provisioning
Mailboxes in the global name directory can be provisioned (created,
modified, or deleted) on the Global Voicemail Central Server or on a
remote office system. If the GVCS is used to make changes, the remote
office system associated with a mailbox automatically detects any
changes and synchronizes with the GVCS except for the following
functions:
■
External E-mail Accounts (POP3)
■
Find Me Follow Me
■
Distribution Lists
■
Notification Procedures
■
Aliases
These functions MUST be provisioned on the local office server.
Remote offices also support local mailboxes that aren't available to the
global system. These mailboxes will function exactly the same on the local
system without being detected by other systems.
Installation and
Configuration
The GVCS is the system that the Central Server (CS) server runs on. It may
be a dedicated IPM-only system or it may be an All-in-One system which
also provides voice services. In both cases, the GVCS must be installed
and configured as a Central Server first. Once the GVCS is up and
running, then Local Office configuration is performed on the GVCS. Once
the Local Offices have been defined, then the Local Office systems can be
installed and configured.
If you are installing onto a server other than the Central Server, then you
are asked to supply the IP address of the GVCS. This address is the first
address tried when a connection to the GVCS is attempted. Any
remaining Central Server addresses are retrieved automatically during the
first boot-up sequence. The GVCS (primary or secondary) that was first
configured must be available at this address during first boot.
Remote offices are also configured with the Local Office Admin screen.
The IP addresses and Primary host name for each remote office are
required. Primary host names uniquely identify each remote office site, so
these host names must be unique across the entire system. Remote
offices must be properly configured on the GVCS before the remote
office will be allowed to connect through the VCX firewall.
Local Office Administration
283
To configure a remote office, enable Global Voicemail and enter one or
more GVCS IP addresses. As stated above, the first GVCS IP address
entered is always the first address that the remote office uses when it
tries to connect to the GVCS. This capability allows load sharing on IPM
or Global Voicemail Central Servers configured as client/servers. If only
one GVCS IP address is used, then the other GVCS IP addresses are
automatically downloaded and configured. When a remote office system
boots up for the first time, the GVCS must be running and accessible
through one of the configured IP addresses. Once the remote office
connects to the GVCS and downloads the Global Directory table, it will
run independently and not depend on whether the GVCS is accessible.
For Dual IPM systems, Global Voicemail is only configured on the Primary
server. The Secondary server (and potentially, clients) retrieves the
configuration it needs from the Primary during its first boot.
For combined Local Office/Central Server systems, the site is installed just
like any other voice-capable site. However, both Global Voicemail and the
Central Server must be enabled. Once the Central Server comes on line,
you must access the Local Office Administration screen and create Local
Office configurations for each site, including the Central Server site.
Creating a Local Office with the host name and IP address of the Central
Server enables the Local Office/Central Server configuration. Install any
additional sites and enable Global Voicemail and disable the Central
Server for these sites.
Local Office
Administration
This section describes how to configure remote and branch offices on the
Global Voicemail Central Server. Proceed as follows:
1 Log into the IP Messaging utility on a Global Voicemail Central Server
as app. See “Starting Call Builder” for more information on logging onto
the IP Messaging server.
2 The Main IP Messaging administration main menu is displayed
(Figure 108).
The Local Office Admin feature only appears on systems that are
configured as Global Voicemail Central Servers.
284
CHAPTER 13: GLOBAL VOICEMAIL INTEGRATION
Figure 108 IP Messaging Administration main menu
3 Select Local Office Admin; the Local Office Administration screen is
displayed (Figure 109). You can add new regional or branch systems, edit
existing systems, or delete existing systems from the Global Voicemail
Central Server.
For combined Local Office/Central Server systems, you must configure a
Local Server with the Central Server’s IP address and host name.
Figure 109 Local Office Administration
Local Office Administration
Adding Local Servers
285
Add a local server to the Global Voicemail Central Server as follows:
1 Open Local Office Admin.
2 Press Add. (Figure 110).
3 Type a site name in the Site Name field. This name does not have to
match the host name for a Local Office only system.
For a combined Local Office/Central Server configuration, the site name
must match the host name of the primary CS system.
4 Enter the IP address of the primary IP Messaging server.
If this is a combined Local Office/Central Server configuration, use the
Central Server IP address.
5 Enter the IP address of the secondary IP Messaging server.
If this is a combined Local Office/Central Server configuration, use the
Central Server IP address.
The IP addresses of the IP Messaging servers must be correct so that
when the local office first starts up after installation, it looks for its IP
address in the Global Directory table. If it finds a match, it will
automatically populate the site name field with the correct host name. It
will also fill in the site ID based on the information entered during local
office installation.
6 Type in the site ID (optional). This ID should be unique to each system.
7 Press Save or the Enter key. The following message is displayed:
Save Local Office XXX? (Y/N)
Type Y to save a local office configuration.
The Site Index and Site Prefix are assigned by the system.
Editing Local Servers
Edit local server configurations on the Global Voicemail Central Server as
follows:
1 Open Local Office Administration.
2 Double-click on a server name in the server list or select a server name
and press Edit. You are now in editing mode (Figure 110).
The Primary IP field is highlighted first in editing mode. To edit the site
name, press the ESC key.
286
CHAPTER 13: GLOBAL VOICEMAIL INTEGRATION
Figure 110 Editing a Local Office
3 Change the site name, primary/secondary IP address, or the site ID and
press Save to apply your changes.
Deleting Local
Servers
Delete local office configurations on the Global Voicemail Central Server
as follows:
1 Open Local Office Administration.
2 Select a server name and press Delt. The system asks if you want to
delete the server. Press Y to delete the local server configuration. If there
are mailboxes assigned to this server, the system will ask if you want to
remove the mailboxes from the global directory.
Adding a Subscriber
to the Global
Voicemail Central
Server Directory
Individual subscribers may have mailboxes on local IP Messaging servers
that are not accessible to other subscribers in a Global Voicemail
configuration. To add a subscriber to the Global Voicemail Directory on a
Central Server:
1 Select Subscriber Profile from the Voicemail Administration main menu.
See “Creating a Subscriber Profile” for information on creating a
subscriber profile.
2 Enter a mailbox number in the text box or click the drop-down menu
arrow to access a subscriber profile.
3 Select Prof > Opt2; the Subscriber Profile Options 2 screen is displayed
(Figure 111).
Enabling Global Voicemail for a Class of Service
287
4 Click on the Global Voicemail checkbox. Choose a local office from the
drop-down list to associate the mailbox with that local office server.
The subscriber is now accessible to any remote or branch office in an
installation. For example, sending messages to remote subscribers or
looking up remote subscribers by last name is exactly the same as sending
messages or looking up subscribers by last name within the same office.
Figure 111 Subscriber Profile Options 2 - Global Voicemail
There are a few other ways to add subscribers to the Global Voicemail
Directory on the GVCS:
Enabling Global
Voicemail for a
Class of Service
■
Create subscribers on the local office server and enable Global
Voicemail for these subscribers. These mailboxes are then included in
the Global Directory and hosted on the local office server.
■
Use the Import Utility to import a group of subscribers. One of the
fields is a SiteName parameter that specifies the local server to which
these subscribers belong. See“Importing Subscriber Information” for
information on the Import utility.
Administrators can enable global voicemail for a COS, but subscribers
with that COS are not automatically added to the Global Voicemail
288
CHAPTER 13: GLOBAL VOICEMAIL INTEGRATION
Directory, because there is no way to specify a local office for each
subscriber. To enable Global Voicemail for a COS:
1 Select Class of Service from the Voicemail Administration main menu.
2 Enter a COS number in the text box or click the drop-down menu arrow
to select an existing COS.
3 Select Prof > Opt2; the Class of Service Profile Options 2 screen is
displayed (Figure 112).
4 Click on Global Voicemail to enable Global Voicemail for this Class of
Service.
Figure 112 Class of Service Profile Options 2 - Global Voicemail
Enabling Global
Voicemail using
Web Provisioning
This section describes how to enable Global Voicemail on either a Global
Voicemail Central Server or on a Local Office server. It is assumed that the
Global Voicemail feature was enabled during IP Messaging installation.
Enable Global Voicemail as follows:
1 Log onto an IP Messaging server as an administrator. See “Accessing the
Web Interface”for more details.
2 Click on Edit a Mailbox in the Admin Options menu.
3 Type in a mailbox number in the Mailbox field.
4 Select Toggle On/Off Preferences (Figure 113).
Enabling Global Voicemail using Web Provisioning
289
Figure 113 Global Voicemail - Toggle On/Off Preferences
5 Select a local office from the Global Voicemail pull-down menu.
If you are logged onto a Global Voicemail Central Server, then multiple
local offices will appear on this pull-down menu. If you are logged onto a
Local Office server, then only that local office will appear on the
pull-down menu.
6 Press Save to save your changes. This mailbox is now part of the Global
Voicemail directory.
Disabling Global
Voicemail
Disable global voicemail for a subscriber as follows:
1 Follow steps 1-4 in “Enabling Global Voicemail using Web Provisioning”.
2 Select Disabled from the Global Voicemail pull-down menu. This
removes the subscriber from the Global Voicemail directory.
290
CHAPTER 13: GLOBAL VOICEMAIL INTEGRATION
14
VPIM
This chapter covers these topics:
■
VPIM Overview
■
Configuring VPIM Domains and Mailboxes
IP Messaging supports VPIM, Version 2.
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
VPIM Overview
Voice Profile for Internet Mail (VPIM) is an industry standard protocol
(rfc3801) that allows subscribers to transport messages composed of one
or more MIME-encoded (Multi-Purpose Internet Mail Extension) parts.
VPIM allows subscribers on one VPIM-enabled messaging system to send,
receive, and forward voice mail and voice mail-based fax messages to one
or many subscribers in other locations, around the corner, or around the
world. Messages are easily delivered to any subscriber with a
VPIM-enabled mailbox.
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
The VPIM address for a subscriber mailbox uses the same formatting
scheme as an e-mail address. A mailbox on a VPIM-enabled system is
identified by prefix number and mailbox number on the left-hand side
and a domain on the right-hand side. For example, an outgoing VPIM
message to mailbox number 123, which is located at a remote site
(domain: site15.com) with the prefix identifier 82222, could be addressed
as:
82222123@site15.com
292
CHAPTER 14: VPIM
IP Messaging stores VPIM addresses in a route information table as a
range of mailboxes associated with a specified domain.
Because mailbox extensions are not unique across all sites, a sender must
know the recipient’s full phone number to send a message to a subscriber
at a remote site. Using the unique combination of site prefix number and
mailbox extension, IP Messaging uses the VPIM route information table to
find the domain and correctly route the message.
Configuring VPIM
Domains and
Mailboxes
The VPIM option lets you enter a domain name and a range of
mailbox extensions within that domain. The domain may be another
IP Messaging system or any VPIM-enabled messaging system. You can
also configure VPIM through the 3Com® IP Messaging Web Provisioning
interface (see “VPIM Administration”).
To configure a VPIM domain and a range of mailboxes:
1 Click VPIM on the Main menu.
The VPIM Administration screen appears (Figure 114).
Figure 114 VPIM Configuration Screen
2 Enter the domain name or IP address of the remote VPIM-enabled
system.
3 Press Enter.
4 Enter the number of the first mailbox in the range.
Configuring VPIM Domains and Mailboxes
293
The field accepts a maximum number of 15 digits.
5 Press Enter.
6 Enter the number of the last mailbox in the range.
7 Press Enter.
8 Enter the numeric prefix, if required, used by mailboxes in the specified
domain.
A mailbox on a VPIM-enabled system may require a prefix number to
uniquely identify it within a domain. This prefix can include the number
for a particular branch within a company and can also include a number
required for calls outside the local area.
9 Specify whether IP Messaging strips out the prefix before sending a
message to a VPIM-enabled destination by clicking in the r/m field.
When this field is enabled (there is an X in the check box), IP Messaging
strips out the prefix.
When this field is disabled (there is no X in the check box), IP Messaging
does not strip out the prefix.
10 Press Enter or click Save. IP Messaging prompts you to save the VPIM
configuration.
11 Type Y and then press Enter.
12 The range you added appears on the VPIM Administration screen.
In Figure 115, mailboxes 890 through 999 (inclusive) have been identified
within the domain 111.111.112.3. IP Messaging will not strip out the
prefix (1234) before sending a message to a VPIM-enabled destination.
294
CHAPTER 14: VPIM
Figure 115 VPIM Domain Administration Screen
As shown in Figure 115, buttons on the screen also allow you to perform
the following functions:
■
■
■
■
Click Exp to export the displayed VPIM domain configuration to a
file. By default, the file is saved to /usr/app/app.dir/vpim.txt. Each
time you export a configuration, IP Messaging appends the
configuration to any previously exported configuration.
Click Imp to import a VPIM domain configuration (or
configurations) in a saved /usr/app/app.dir/vpim.txt file.
Click New to add a new VPIM domain configuration.
Click Edit to modify the attributes of the selected VPIM domain
configuration.
■
Click Delt to remove the selected VPIM domain configuration.
■
Click Exit to exit from the screen.
15
ACCESSING THE WEB
PROVISIONING INTERFACE
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Accessing the Web Interface
■
Class of Service
■
Company Administration
■
VPIM Administration
■
System Configuration
■
Replacing Forgotten Passwords
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Accessing the Web
Interface
Use the IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface to access IP Messaging
administration options through a web browser.
Your browser must have cookies and Java script support enabled to start
a provisioning session.
Your access to the IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface depends on
the configuration of your IP Telephony and IP Messaging system. Consult
with the person responsible for setting up your system.
■
If you have a single-site system, enter the IP address of your primary
server in step 1.
Client-server and multi-site configurations are supported only on VCX
systems.
■
If you have a multi-site installation, enter the IP address of your
regional office in step 1.
296
CHAPTER 15: ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
■
If you have a client-server installation, enter the IP address of the client
in step 1.
1 Enter the appropriate IP address in your web browser’s Address text box.
The browser displays a dialog box similar to the one shown in Figure 116.
Figure 116 User Interface Dialog Box
2 Click IP Messaging Web Provisioning. The IP Messaging Login dialog
box appears (Figure 117).
Figure 117 Login Dialog Box
3 Enter the username and password of the administrator account.
Prepend the username of the administrator account with the letters sock.
For example, if the username for the administrator account you want to
use is admin1, enter sockadmin1 in the User Name or Phone Number
field.
You can create and modify administrator accounts using the IP Messaging
provisioning interface. This interface is available through the Application
utility. See “Configuring the Administrator Profile”.
You can also configure IP Messaging to e-mail a subscriber a new
password if the subscriber forgets his or her existing password. See
“Replacing Forgotten Passwords”.
4 Click Login. The Main menu appears (Figure 118).
Class of Service
297
Figure 118 Admin Options Main Menu
The interface has an inactivity timer. If the IP Messaging Web Provisioning
interface detects no user activity for 15 minutes (900 seconds), the
interface automatically logs the user out. The user must log in again and
start a new session.
Class of Service
IP Messaging has three default Class of Service (COS) settings: 100, 101,
and 102. Each COS has different default settings for features.
You can modify the IP Messaging COS or define new ones. The maximum
number of COSs is 10,000.
Editing an Existing
Class of Service
To access and edit the COS option on the web interface:
1 Click Class of Service on the Admin Options menu.
The Class of Service screen appears (Figure 119).
Figure 119 Class of Service Screen
298
CHAPTER 15: ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
2 Select a Class of Service from the drop-down list and then press Edit.
The Class of Service Profile screen appears. This screen contains eight
sections. The fields in these sections are described in Chapter . Specific
references for descriptions of the fields in each section are shown in the
following list:
■
Storage Size — See Table 33.
■
Greetings, Announcements, and Recordings — See Table 33.
■
Message Options — See Table 33.
■
Password Options — See Table 33.
■
OutDial Options — See Table 35 and “Identifying a Call Processor
for a Subscriber” for the SIP Dialing Domain, Primary Call
Processor, and Secondary Call Processor fields. This allows IP
Messaging to act as a single, centralized voicemail system by
recognizing the call processors at the remote sites.
■
Mailbox Toggle — See Table 28.
■
Review Options - See Table 28.
■
Delivery Options — See Table 30.
3 Edit the fields as required.
4 Click Save. The Class of Service screen appears with this message:
Class of Service <number> Has Been Updated.
Creating a New
Class of Service
To create a new Class of Service:
1 Click Add on the Class of Service screen.
The screen displays a default Class of Service template (COS 100).
2 Select a Class of Service from the drop-down menu in the Template field.
This allows you to copy an existing template and modify it as desired.
3 Type the name of the new Class of Service in the Class of Service field.
4 Edit all the other fields as required.
5 Click Save. The Class of Service screen appears with this message:
Class of Service <number> Has Been Created.
Company Administration
Deleting a
Class of Service
299
To delete a Class of Service:
1 Select a Class of Service from the drop-down list on the Class of Service
screen.
2 Click Delete. The system says:
Do you really want to delete this record?
3 Click OK to delete this COS.
The Class of Service screen appears with this message:
Class of Service <number> Has Been Deleted.
Company
Administration
To access the Company Administration option:
1 Click Company Administration on the Admin Options menu. The
Company Administration screen appears (Figure 120).
Figure 120 Company Administration Screen
2 Click Add New. The Company Administration Add screen appears
(Figure 121).
300
CHAPTER 15: ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
Figure 121 Company Administration Add Screen
3 Fill in the fields as required and click Add Company.
The Company Administration screen appears with this message:
Company <Company Name> Has Been Created.
4 To edit an existing company:
a Select the company from the drop-down list and click Edit.
b Change the fields as required and click Save.
The Company Administration screen appears with this message:
Company <Company Name> Has Been Modified.
5 To delete an existing company, select the company from the drop-down
list and click Delete.
The screen is refreshed and this message appears:
<Company Name> Has Been Deleted.
VPIM
Administration
Voice Profile for Internet Mail (VPIM) allows subscribers on one
VPIM-enabled messaging system to send, receive, and forward voice mail
and voice mail-based fax messages to one or many subscribers in other
locations who have a VPIM-enabled mailbox.
IP Messaging supports VPIM Version 2. See “VPIM Overview” for more
information.
E-mail is supported on the 3Com® Native Telephone User Interface only.
VPIM Administration
301
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
The VPIM Administration option on the Admin Options menu enables
you to enter a domain name and a range of mailbox extensions within
that domain. The domain may be another IP Messaging system or any
VPIM-enabled messaging system.
To identify a VPIM domain and a range of mailboxes:
1 Click VPIM Administration on the Admin Options menu.
The VPIM Administration screen appears.
Figure 122 VPIM Administration Window
You have the following options:
■
Click Add New to add a new VPIM domain. The Add VPIM
Administration screen appears (Figure 123).
■
Click Import to import a VPIM domain configuration (or
configurations) in a saved /usr/app/app.dir/vpim.txt file.
Figure 123 Add VPIM Administration Window
2 Enter the domain name or IP address of the remote VPIM-enabled system
in the VPIM Domain Name field.
3 Enter the numeric prefix (if required) used by mailboxes in the specified
domain in the Dial Plan Prefix field.
302
CHAPTER 15: ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
A mailbox on a VPIM-enabled system may require a prefix number to
uniquely identify it within a domain. This prefix can include the number
for a particular branch within a company and can also include a number
required for calls outside the local area.
4 Specify whether or not IP Messaging strips out the prefix before sending a
message to a VPIM-enabled destination by selecting the required option
in the Remove Prefix field.
5 Enter the first mailbox number in the range in the Mailbox Start field.
The field accepts a maximum number of 15 digits.
6 Enter the last mailbox number in the range in the End field.
7 Click Save.
In Figure 124, mailboxes 890 through 999 (inclusive) have been identified
within the domain 111.111.112.3. The dialing prefix 1234 is removed
from all messages sent to mailboxes 890 through 999.
Figure 124 VPIM Domain Added Window
As shown in Figure 124, you can also:
■
■
■
■
Edit the attributes of an existing VPIM domain range. Select the
domain from the VPIM Domain drop-down list and then click
Edit.
Delete an existing VPIM domain range. Select the domain from the
VPIM Domain drop-down list and then click Delete.
Add a new VPIM domain range by clicking Add New.
Export the displayed VPIM domain configuration to a file by
clicking Export. By default, the file is saved to
/usr/app/app.dir/vpim.txt. Each time you export a configuration, IP
Messaging appends the configuration to any previously exported
configuration.
System Configuration
■
System
Configuration
303
Import a VPIM domain configuration (or configurations) in a saved
/usr/app/app.dir/vpim.txt file by clicking Import.
The Configuration screen allows you to manage the following system
options:
■
The banner that appears on each IP Messaging Web Provisioning
interface screen. See “Configuring the Banner and E-Mail Reply
Server”.
■
The reply server to use in the From field for e-mails processed by IP
Messaging.See “Configuring the Banner and E-Mail Reply Server”.
■
The number subscribers dial to access the voicemail system. See
“Configuring the Voicemail Access Number”.
■
The Music On Hold (MOH) access number and the Hunt Group
announcement access number. See “Configuring MOH and
Announcement Access Numbers”.
If a VCX system implements an IP Messaging client-server configuration,
the administrator should set up IPM clients as trusted endpoints in the call
processor. The administrator can then assign unique voicemail and MOH
access numbers (extensions) that are routed to a specific client. When a
user presses a telephone’s MSG button, they access the voicemail box on
the assigned client. See the VCX Administration Guide for more
information on creating routes and end points for IPM client-server
configuration.
If one client system becomes unavailable for any reason, users who
normally access voicemail through that client can then access their
voicemail by dialing the extension of a different client or by dialing the
server's voicemail extension.
Client-server configurations are supported only on VCX systems.
Configuring the
Banner and E-Mail
Reply Server
Each IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface screen displays the 3Com
logo (Figure 118) by default. The Banner and Server Configuration screen
allows you to change the default logo, text that appears in every e-mail
message sent from this system, and the reply server to use in the From
field for e-mails processed by this system.
304
CHAPTER 15: ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
To access the Banner and Server Configuration screen:
1 Click Configuration on the Admin Options menu. The Configuration
Option screen appears (Figure 125).
Figure 125 Configuration Option Screen
.
2 Select Banner And Server Configuration and click Submit. The Banner
and Server Configuration screen appears (Figure 126).
Figure 126 Banner and Server Configuration Screen
3 To change the banner that appears on each Web Provisioning interface
screen:
a Select a file from the Change Banner drop-down list, or
b Upload a new banner by clicking Browse. After locating the file, IP
Messaging lists the file in the drop-down list.
c Click Submit to save your changes.
4 To change the company display name:
a Type a new name in the Change Company Display Name text box.
The company name is displayed on the IP Messaging Welcome Page
when you first log in.
b Click Submit to save your changes.
5 To change the reply server used by IP Messaging:
a Enter the IP address of the reply server. See Table 46 for more
information.
System Configuration
305
Reply servers identify the domain used in the From field for e-mails
processed by the IP Messaging server.
b Click Submit to save your changes.
Configuring the
Voicemail Access
Number
You can specify the number used by subscribers to access the voicemail
system when a phone extension is assigned to a subscriber. This number
must also be configured in your IP Messaging system. See “Configuring
an IP Messaging Voicemail Access Number” for more information.
You can add, change, or delete the number used by subscribers to access
voice mailboxes through the Access Number Configuration screen.
To access the voicemail Access Number Configuration screen:
1 Click Configuration on the Admin Options menu. The Configuration
Option screen appears (Figure 125).
2 Select Access Number Configuration and click Submit. The Access
Number Configuration screen appears (Figure 127).
Figure 127 Voicemail Access Number Configuration Screen
3 You can perform any of the following access number management
functions:
■
Add a new access number by entering the number in the Main
Voicemail Access Number text box and clicking Add.
Once an access number is added, a subscriber can dial that number
and access their mailbox. For example, if 5000 and 5002 are on the
access number list, a subscriber can dial either number to access their
voicemail.
■
Delete an access number by selecting it from the drop down list and
clicking Delete.
306
CHAPTER 15: ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
Configuring MOH
and Announcement
Access Numbers
You can use the Configuration Option screen to configure Music On Hold
(MOH) and a Hunt Group announcement.
■
When you configure MOH, a caller who is placed on hold hears an
audio recording (typically music.) An audio file is associated with a
MOH access number. Audio files are stored in the directory
/usr/app/app.dir/speak.vox. The default MOH file in this directory is
named music. See “Configuring Music on Hold” for additional
information.
■
When a Hunt Group is configured by the IP Telephony system
administrator, one of the configuration options is Announcement
Number. This number is dialed by the system and is associated with a
voice file. This voice file is the recording a caller hears when a
connection is made to a Hunt Group number but before the call is
answered. For example, the recording could be, “Your call is
important to us. Please wait for the next available customer service
agent.”. There is no default voice file; you must record your own Hunt
Group announcement. See “Configuring a Hunt Group
Announcement” for more information.
To identify the MOH number and audio file or to identify the Hunt Group
announcement number and voice file:
1 Click Configuration on the Admin Options menu. The Configuration
Option screen appears (Figure 125).
2 Select Music On Hold Number Configuration and click Submit. The
Access Number Configuration screen appears (Figure 128).
Figure 128 MOH and Hunt Group Access Number Configuration Screen
The Music On Hold Number List drop-down list shows currently
configured MOH and Hunt Group access numbers and their associated
files.
3 To configure MOH:
System Configuration
307
a In the Music On Hold Number List text box, type in the number that
has been configured as the Music On Hold Number.
b In the Music file text box, type in the name of the audio (music or
speech) file you want to associate with the MOH access number. Use
the default MOH audio file (music) by leaving this field blank.
c Click Add. You can add multiple MOH access numbers, but the
numbers must be configured by the IP Telephony system
administrator.
4 To configure a Hunt Group announcement:
a In the Music On Hold Number List text box, type in the number that
has been configured as the Announcement Number.
b In the Music file text box, enter the name of the audio file you want
to associate with this number.
c Click Add. You can add multiple Hunt Group announcement access
numbers but the numbers must be configured by the IP Telephony
system administrator.
Figure 129 shows the Access Number Configuration screen with a MOH
access number and Hunt Group announcement number added.
The MOH access number is 5001 and is associated with the default audio
file music.
The Hunt Group announcement access number is 5002 and is associated
with a customer-recorded voice file g729ipm.
Figure 129 MOH and Hunt Group Announcement Configured
To edit or delete an existing number and file combination, select the
number and file from the Music On Hold Number List drop-down list and
click either Edit or Delete.
308
CHAPTER 15: ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
Replacing
Forgotten
Passwords
You can configure IP Messaging to e-mail a subscriber a new password if
the subscriber forgets his or her existing password.
A subscriber uses the login dialog box shown in Figure 130 to access the
IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface.
Figure 130 IP Messaging Subscriber Login Screen
If the subscriber forgets his or her password, the subscriber can click the
Forgot Your Password? link. IP Messaging displays the dialog box shown
in Figure 131.
Figure 131 Forgot Your Password Screen
The subscriber enters his or her mailbox number (or username) in the first
field and any 4-digit confirmation number in the second field.
IP Messaging generates a temporary password and e-mails it to the
subscriber.
The subscriber then logs in to the IP Messaging Web Provisioning
interface using the temporary password received in the e-mail message.
IP Messaging displays a screen that prompts the subscriber to change the
password.
Replacing Forgotten Passwords
309
The subscriber enters the 4-digit confirmation number specified in
Figure 131 and a new password.
IP Messaging logs the subscriber in to the IP Messaging Web Provisioning
interface and changes the password. The password used to access the IP
Messaging Web Provisioning interface is also the password the subscriber
uses to access his or her mailbox through the telephone.
Configure the following settings to enable IP Messaging to e-mail a
subscriber a temporary password:
1 Configure the Reply Server address.
You can configure the Reply Server field in either IP Messaging
administration interface:
■
■
To configure the Reply Server field through the Application utility
interface, see “Additional Servers” and Table 46.
To configure the Reply Server field through the IP Messaging Web
Provisioning interface, see “Configuring the Banner and E-Mail
Reply Server”.
2 Configure an SMTP server address.
You must configure the SMTP server through the Application utility
interface. See “Additional Servers” and Table 46.
3 Configure an e-mail address for each subscriber.
You can configure a subscriber e-mail address in either IP Messaging
administration interface:
■
■
To configure a subscriber e-mail address through the Application
utility interface, see “Configuring Additional Mailbox Options” and
Table 25.
To configure a subscriber e-mail address through the IP Messaging
Web Provisioning interface, see “Editing Mailboxes”.
You must configure these three settings so that IP Messaging knows
where to send the e-mail containing the subscriber’s new password.
Consequently, you need to configure an e-mail address of some other
mailbox or an e-mail address such as the subscriber’s corporate or home
e-mail address.
310
CHAPTER 15: ACCESSING THE WEB PROVISIONING INTERFACE
If you specify the e-mail address of an external e-mail system, you must
identify the external SMTP server that IP Messaging can use to forward
the subscriber the e-mail message containing the new password.
16
CREATING, DELETING, AND
EDITING MAILBOXES
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Creating Mailboxes
■
Deleting Mailboxes
■
Editing Mailboxes
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Creating Mailboxes
Creating a mailbox associates a set of attributes with a subscriber profile.
These attributes can be defined in a Class Of Service (COS) or defined for
an individual subscriber. When the same attribute appears in both the
subscriber profile and the COS associated with the profile, the value for
the profile attribute is used. See Chapter 15 for information on COS
attributes.
When an administrator creates a user account and assigns a telephone
extension to that account, the administrator can specify that an IP
Messaging (IPM) mailbox be automatically created for the user. The
mailbox number will be identical to the user’s telephone extension. If you
attempt to create a mailbox for this user and specify the user’s extension
for the mailbox number, IP Messaging responds with the message
“mailbox already exists.” You must coordinate mailbox creation with the
IP Telephony system administrator. By default, mailboxes that are
automatically created are assigned to COS 102. You can change the
subscriber’s assigned COS by editing mailbox settings. See “Editing
Mailboxes”.
See “Accessing the Web Interface” for information on accessing the
3Com® IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface. You can also create
mailboxes through the IP Messaging AppMon interface. See Chapter 5.
312
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
To create a mailbox from the web interface:
1 Click Create/Delete Mailboxes on the Admin Options menu.
The Create/Delete Mailboxes screen appears (Figure 132).
Figure 132 Create/Delete Mailboxes Screen
2 Fill in the required fields:
a Type a mailbox number in the Mailbox field.
b Select a COS from the Class of Service drop-down list.
3 Fill in the optional fields as required. See “Email Address Field” for
information on the Email Address field.
4 Click Save. The screen refreshes and this message appears:
Mailbox <mailbox number> Has Been Created.
5 Click Logout or select another option from the Admin Options menu.
Creating Mailboxes
Email Address Field
313
The Email Address field allows subscribers to send and receive email
messages. If a mailbox is configured in this way, replies to messages are
typically sent back to the mailbox.
An e-mail address entered in the Email Address field to identify a
mailbox must be unique on an IP Messaging server. That is, two
mailboxes on the same IP Messaging server cannot share an e-mail
address.
If you want replies to your messages to go to a destination other than
your IP Messaging mailbox, specify a different destination by entering an
e-mail address in the Email Address field.
E-mail addresses are not assigned by default. This field must be populated
by the System Administrator or the mailbox subscriber.
E-mail is supported on the 3Com Native Telephone User Interface (TUI)
only.
Adding a Range of
Mailboxes
To add a range of mailboxes:
1 Click Create/Delete Mailboxes on the Admin Options menu.
The Create/Delete Mailboxes screen appears (Figure 132).
2 Click Add Range.
The Add Mailboxes screen appears (Figure 133).
Figure 133 Add Mailboxes Screen
3 Type the first mailbox number in the range in the Start field.
4 Type the last mailbox number in the range in the End field.
314
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
5 Select a Class of Service from the COS drop-down list.
6 Select a company from the Company Name drop-down list.
7 Select a division from the Division drop-down list.
8 Click Add Mailboxes. The screen refreshes and this message appears:
Mailbox <mailbox number> Have Been Created.
9 Click Logout or select another option from the Admin Options menu.
Deleting Mailboxes
To delete a mailbox:
1 Click Create/Delete Mailboxes on the Admin Options menu.
The Create/Delete Mailboxes screen appears (Figure 132).
2 Click Delete.
The Delete Mailbox screen appears (Figure 134).
Figure 134 Delete Mailbox Screen
3 Type in the mailbox number you want to delete.
4 Click Delete Mailbox. The screen refreshes and this message appears:
Mailbox <mailbox number> Has Been Deleted.
5 Click Logout or select another option from the Admin Options menu.
Deleting a Range of
Mailboxes
To delete a range of mailboxes:
1 Click Create/Delete Mailboxes on the Admin Options menu.
The Create/Delete Mailboxes screen appears (Figure 132).
2 Click Del Range.
The Delete Mailboxes screen appears (Figure 135).
Deleting Mailboxes
315
Figure 135 Delete Mailbox Range Screen
3 Type the first mailbox number in the range in the Start field.
4 Type the last mailbox number in the range in the End field.
5 Click Delete Mailboxes. The screen refreshes and this message appears:
Mailbox <Mailboxes number - number> Have Been Deleted.
6 Click Logout or select another option from the Admin Options menu.
316
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Editing Mailboxes
You can edit any user mailbox by logging in to the IP Messaging Web
Provisioning interface as an administrator (see “Accessing the Web
Interface”).
You can also log in to a particular user mailbox by entering the user’s
mailbox number and password in the Web Provisioning Login dialog box.
If you provide this access information to the user, the user can manage
mailbox settings as well. This management access is described in the IP
Messaging Module User Guide.
When you edit a mailbox, IP Messaging adds a list of management
options under the heading Mailbox Options on the left side of the Main
menu. All options except Find Me Follow Me are described in this section.
Find Me Follow Me is described in Chapter 17.
To edit existing mailbox settings:
1 Click Edit a Mailbox on the Admin Options menu.
2 Type a mailbox number in the Mailbox text box and click Submit.
The Mailbox Preferences screen appears (Figure 136).
3 This screen lets you change basic mailbox settings such as the subscriber’s
name, password, company affiliation, and assigned Class of Service.
Change information as required and then click Save.
Editing Mailboxes
317
Figure 136 Mailbox Preferences Screen
The following list describes the Mailbox Preferences fields that may
require further explanation:
■
Operator Extension —You can associate an operator extension
number with a subscriber’s mailbox in the field.
■
Auto Login — If Auto Login is turned ON, IP Messaging does not
prompt the subscriber to enter a password for mailbox access.
■
Email Address — You can modify the subscriber’s e-mail address in
this field. See “Creating Mailboxes” for more information.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
FMFM Feature — You can enable Find Me Follow Me with this
optional field and have the following choices:
Find Me Follow Me is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
318
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Do not use Find Me Follow Me if two-stage dialing is configured for your
gateway. Find Me Follow Me cannot handle waiting for a dial tone to be
asserted and a call will not connect to the PSTN.
■
■
■
Mailbox Only — IP Messaging creates a mailbox for the
subscriber but FMFM is not enabled.
FMFM and Mailbox — IP Messaging creates a mailbox for the
subscriber and enables FMFM.
FMFM Call Intercept — If FMFM Call Intercept is turned ON, IP
Messaging screens for caller identification and blocks calls from
unknown callers.
IP Messaging requests identification information from the calling
party. When the calling party provides the information, IP Messaging
uses your configured FMFM settings and tries to reach you. If contact
is made, IP Messaging presents the calling party information and
prompts you to accept or reject the call. If you cannot be reached, IP
Messaging routes the call to your call coverage point. The default
coverage point is your voice mailbox).
If FMFM is not enabled, the FMFM Call Intercept option setting has no
effect.
■
SIP Dialing Domain, Primary/Secondary Call Processor — If your
environment includes multiple call processors (for example, at multiple
remote sites), you can configure IP Messaging to act as a single,
centralized voicemail system by recognizing the call processors at the
remote sites.
Enter the required information in the SIP Dialing Domain, Primary
Call Processor, and Secondary Call Processor fields. You can also
configure this information through the IP Messaging AppMon
interface. See “Identifying a Call Processor for a Subscriber”.
■
Prompt for Mailbox Number — If Prompt for Mailbox Number is
turned OFF, IP Messaging does not prompt the subscriber to enter a
mailbox number for mailbox access.
E-mail and FMFM are not supported on the traditional Telephone User
Interface. If you (or another administrator) selected the ftl option for the
Menu Style COS parameter (see Table 28), you should not configure
e-mail or FMFM.
Editing Mailboxes
Viewing Message
Information
You can view the number of new, saved, urgent, and unreviewed
messages in a user mailbox. Message types include voice, fax, and e-mail.
Click Message Information on the Mailbox Options menu to view
message information for a mailbox.
The Message Information screen appears (Figure 137).
Figure 137 Message Information Screen
Personal Address
Book
319
To access an address book and to add, edit, and delete entries:
1 Click Personal Address Book on the Mailbox Options menu.
The Personal Address Book (PAB) screen appears (Figure 138).
Figure 138 Personal Address Book
2 Click Add New to add a new entry to a personal address book. The
Personal Address Book screen appears (Figure 139).
320
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Figure 139 Fields on the Personal Address Book Screen
3 Enter data in the Required Fields section.
4 Enter data in the General Information and Work Information sections as
required.
5 Click Save. The Personal Address Book Main menu appears (Figure 140).
Editing Mailboxes
321
Figure 140 Personal Address Book Main Menu
You have the following PAB options:
External Email
■
Delete an entry by selecting it from the drop-down list and clicking
Delete.
■
Display an address book entry by clicking View.
■
Add more entries by clicking Add New.
Use the External Email feature to link the subscriber's mailbox with an
external POP3 (Post Office Protocol) or Internet Message Access Protocol
(IMAP) e-mail account.
E-mail messages sent to this account will also appear in the subscriber’s
mailbox. If Text To Speech (TTS) is configured, the e-mail message can be
accessed in the subscriber’s mailbox through the TUI and the TTS
application will read the contents of the e-mail.
This option includes periodic polling, auto delivery, and synchronization of
one external e-mail account with the IP Messaging mailbox.
The External Email option only appears on the Mailbox Options menu if
POP3 Media has been enabled. See “Accessing the Class of Service
Option” and “Toggle On/Off Preferences” for more information.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
TTS is supported only on VCX systems.
322
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
To link an external e-mail account to a mailbox:
1 Click External E-mail on the Mailbox Options menu. The External E-mail
screen appears (Figure 141).
Figure 141 External Email Screen
2 Click Add New to add external e-mail servers to a mailbox. The Add New
External E-mail screen appears (Figure 142).
Figure 142 Add New External E-mail
3 Enter a name to identify this external e-mail session in the Account
Name field. For example, you could enter POP3-Home.
4 Enter the e-mail address that you want to link to in the Email Address
field.
Editing Mailboxes
323
5 Enter the name of the server if the system has a Domain Name Server
(DNS) in the Server field. If DNS is not available, enter the IP address of
the mail server.
6 Enter the user name of the e-mail account on the server in the
Username field.
7 Enter the user’s password in the Password field. Re-enter the password
in the Confirm Password field.
If the password is changed on the remote e-mail account and is not
changed in IP Messaging, then IP Messaging sends a message to the
external e-mail account and informs them that their password in IP
Messaging is incorrect and needs to be changed.
8 Enter the time interval in minutes in the Poll Interval field. This is the
amount of time that IP Messaging waits before retrieving e-mail
messages from (or updating messages to) this remote e-mail server.
9 Select POP3 or IMAP from the Protocol drop-down list.
10 Enable the Delete From Server check box to delete the e-mail message
from the remote e-mail server when messages are deleted in the
subscriber IP Messaging mailbox.
Delete From Server can’t be enabled if Synchronize is checked.
11 Enable the Poll at Login check box to retrieve e-mail messages from this
remote e-mail server every time the subscriber logs in through the IP
Messaging Graphic User Interface (GUI) or the Telephone User Interface
(TUI).
You can create more than one external account, but only one account
can be synchronized. If the first external account has Synchronize turned
ON, then it cannot be checked for the second external account.
12 Enable the Synchronize check box to synchronize a subscriber’s external
e-mail with their IP message store.
Synchronization ensures that voice, e-mail, and fax messages are
synchronized between the IP Messaging mailbox and the subscriber’s
external e-mail account. If a second external account is enabled, the IP
Messaging mailbox can send messages to the second account, but the
second account cannot send messages back to the IP Messaging mailbox.
When synchronization is first enabled for a subscriber with an external
e-mail account, messages that already exist in the external e-mail account
are not synchronized with the IP Messaging store. New messages that
arrive after synchronization is enabled will be synchronized.
324
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
The Account Validated field displays NO before External E-mail has been
configured. Once the IP Messaging system has successfully connected to
the subscriber’s external e-mail account, Account Validated changes to
YES.
13 Enable the Vmail Only check box to turn ON partial (one-way)
synchronization with an external email account.
Voicemail messages on the IP Messaging server are synchronized with a
subscriber’s external email account. For example, if messages are saved
on the IP Messaging server, they are also marked as saved on the external
email account.
Conversely, external e-mail account messages are NOT synchronized with
the IP Messaging server. If new messages are received by the external
email account, they are ignored by the IP Messaging server and cannot be
reviewed through the TUI.
14 Click Save.
Distribution Lists
To access distribution lists:
1 Click Distribution Lists on the Mailbox Options menu.
The Distribution Lists Screen appears (Figure 143).
Figure 143 Distribution Lists Screen
2 To create a new distribution list:
a Type the name of the list (a number between 1 and 9999) in the New
List text box and then click Create New List.
The Create New Entry screen appears (Figure 144).
Editing Mailboxes
325
Figure 144 Create New Entry Screen
s
b Enter a distribution list entry in the New Entry text box. The format of
the entry must be appropriate for the type selected in step c. For
example, if you select the E-mail entry type, enter an e-mail address in
the standard format, <name>@<hostname>.
c Select the type of distribution list entry from the drop-down list:
■
■
■
■
List — indicates the entry is another distribution list name or
number.
Mailbox Entry — indicates the entry is the mailbox number of a
subscriber.
Phone Number — indicates the entry is the phone number of a
subscriber.
E-mail — indicates the entry is the e-mail address of a subscriber.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
VPIM — indicates the entry is the VPIM destination address of a
subscriber. Use the format <prefix><mailbox_number>. For
example, if the VPIM destination prefix is 888 and mailbox number
is 1234, you would enter 8881234 in the New Entry text box.
VPIM is an industry-standard protocol (rfc3801) that allows
subscribers to exchange messages between different voice mail
systems. By entering VPIM destinations in a distribution list,
subscribers in different locations can be members of a group
distribution list that spans multiple sites. See Chapter 14 for
information on configuring VPIM destinations.
d Click Create New Entry. The system confirms the creation of the new
entry and displays the Distribution Lists Entry screen (Figure 145).
326
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Figure 145 Distribution Lists Entry Screen
e Repeat steps b through d for any additional entries. If you need to
delete an entry, select it from the drop-down list and click Delete
Entry.
f Click View All Lists when you are finished to display the View/Edit
Distribution screen (Figure 146).
3 You can also view/edit or delete distribution lists:
■
■
To display and edit a distribution list, select the list name from the
drop-down list and click View/Edit.
To delete a distribution list, select the list name from the
drop-down list and click Delete List.
Figure 146 View/Edit Distribution Screen
Editing Mailboxes
Scheduled Greetings
327
Use this option to set the time or day for the scheduled greetings
associated with a mailbox.
1 Click Scheduled Greetings on the Mailbox Options menu. The Schedule
Greetings screen appears (Figure 147).
■
If there is no recorded greeting, “No Greetings Recorded” appears in
the Greeting Number text box. The user must record greetings
through the TUI.
■
You cannot schedule the default greeting because it is the first
greeting recorded for the mailbox and must act as a default setting.
■
You must set up additional greetings through the TUI before
scheduling them through Web provisioning.
Figure 147 Scheduled Greetings Screen
2 To set up a new daily greeting schedule:
a Select the start and end time or select YES from the All Day
drop-down list.
b Select the day of the week or Everyday from the Day Of Week
drop-down list.
328
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
c Select the Greeting from the Greeting Number drop-down list.
The default greeting does not appear on the drop-down list.
d Click Add New.
3 To schedule a greeting by date:
a Select the start and end time or select YES from the All Day
drop-down list.
b Select the Greeting from the Greeting Number drop-down list.
The default greeting does not appear on the drop-down list.
c Select the month, day, and year for the greeting to begin from the
Month, Day, and Year drop-down lists.
d You can set the Start Time and End Time for any day of the year
starting from today’s date through the next 4 years.
e Click Add New.
Notification
The Notification option enables you to set the medium that the system
will use to notify users when messages are deposited into or retrieved
from their mailboxes. IP Messaging supports many notification methods
such as NBX MWI (Message Waiting Indication) Voice, E-mail, Socket
Connection (SIP Notify), Auto-Forward and Pager.
You must perform three general steps to set up a notification method:
1 Create a notification filter. See “Create a Notification Filter”.
2 Create a notification procedure by assigning a filter to a notification
method. See “Create a Notification Procedure”.
3 Enable a notification schedule for a filter that automatically assigns the
schedule to any method that uses the filter. See “Create a Notification
Schedule”.
The three Notification options appear on the Mailbox Options menu only
if you have enabled Notification Ability on the Mailbox Preferences
screen. See “Creating Mailboxes” or “Editing Mailboxes”.
Editing Mailboxes
329
Create a Notification Filter
To create a Notification Filter:
1 Click Notification Filters on the Mailbox Options menu.
The Notification Filter screen appears (Figure 148).
Figure 148 Notification Filter Screen
2 Click Add New to create a Notification Filter. The Add Notification Filter
screen appears (Figure 149).
Figure 149 Add Notification Filter Screen
3 Enter a string in the Name field to identify the filter.
4 Click the Status drop-down list to enable (Active) or disable (Inactive) the
filter. By default, a filter is created in the Active state but you can disable a
filter at any time.
5 Click the Message Type drop-down list and select whether this filter will
apply to all messages (the default), to messages marked normal, or to
messages marked urgent.
330
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
6 Enter values in the Sender, Recipient, Media, and Subject fields as
required. The entered values are applied according to the selected
Operator to restrict message notification according to the specified
values. The Operator options function as follows:
■
Field is empty (null value) and corresponding Operator is ALL — No
filtration. For example, if the Sender field is empty and Sender
Operator is ALL, messages from any sender result in user notification.
■
Field has a value and corresponding Operator is == — Messages
must include the specified field value for user notification to occur. For
example, if the Subject field value is “Status report” and the Subject
Operator is ==, only messages that include the string “Status report”
in the subject line result in user notification.
■
Field has a value and corresponding Operator is <> — Messages with
the specified field value are ignored. For example, if the Media field
value is Fax and the Media Operator is <>, all message types except
faxes result in user notification.
7 Click Save.
Create a Notification Procedure
To create a Notification procedure:
1 Click Notification Procedures on the Mailbox Options menu. The
Notification Procedure screen appears (Figure 150).
Figure 150 Notification Procedures Screen
2 Click Add New.
The Add Notification Procedure screen appears (Figure 151).
Editing Mailboxes
331
Figure 151 Add Notification Procedures Screen
3 Enter a name for the procedure in the Procedure Name field.
4 Select Enabled from the Status drop-down list.
5 Select the Notification Filter to use in the Filter drop-down list.
6 Enter the number of times IP Messaging will attempt to send the message
notification in the Tries text box.
7 Enter the time in minutes that IP Messaging will wait between
notification attempts in the Interval text box.
8 Enable (On) or disable (Off) in the Queue selection box.
■
If enabled and the system receives a notification outside its configured
schedule, the notification is queued until the schedule becomes active
again.
■
If disabled and the system receives a notification outside its configured
schedule, the notification is not queued and is not delivered.
9 The Chain selection box allows you to select and link another notification
procedure to the one you are configuring. The linked procedure is
executed if the current procedure fails. If you do not want to link
procedures, accept the default value, None.
332
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
10 Select the notification method in the Type field. The method you select
determines the remaining fields on the screen. The following examples
describe the fields you see in you select Voice (the default), E-mail,
Auto-Forward, Pager, Inband MWI, Blind Notify, and NBX MWI from
the drop-down list.
■
If you select Voice:
a Enter a phone number in the Phone Number field.
b Click Save.
■
If you select Email:
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
a Enter an e-mail address in the Email Address field.
The Template File field allows you to specify a file that contains e-mail
customization information for items such as the e-mail headers. This
feature is not supported in this release.
b Click Save.
■
If you select Auto-Forward:
a Enter an e-mail address in the Email Address field.
b Click Save.
■
If you select Pager:
a Enter a pager number in the Pager Number field.
b Enter a pager template file name in the Pager Template field.
c Enter a pager PIN number in the Pager PIN field.
d Click Save.
■
If you select Inband MWI:
a Enter a phone number in the Phone Number field.
b Enter an On code in the On Code field.
c Enter an Off code in the Off Code field.
d Enter a prefix in the Prefix field.
e Click Save.
Editing Mailboxes
■
If you select Blind Notify:
a Enter a PID Name in the PID Name field.
b Enter a PID User ID in the PID User ID field.
c Click Save.
■
If you select NBX MWI:
a Enter a phone number in the NBX Extension field.
b Select a server from the NBX Server drop-down list.
c Enter a password in the Password field.
d Click Save.
11 Click Edit to edit an existing procedure or click Delete to delete an
existing procedure.
333
334
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Create a Notification Schedule
To create a Notification schedule:
1 Click Notification Schedule on the Mailbox Options menu. The
Notification Schedule screen appears (Figure 152).
Figure 152 Notification Schedule Screen
2 Select a Notification Filter from the drop-down list.
3 The Notification Schedule screen allows you to create one or more
schedules for a filter and then enable one of them.
Editing Mailboxes
335
You have three scheduling options:
Schedule Daily Notification — This section allows you to schedule filter
operation (message notification) for a time range and either one
particular day or every day of the week regardless of the date.
4 To schedule a notification for a particular day of the week:
a Select a start and end time or select YES from the All Day drop-down
list.
b Select the day of the week the notification will be sent from the Day
Of Week drop-down lists or select Everyday.
c Click Save Schedule.
Schedule Notification By Date — This section allows you to schedule
filter operation (message notification) for a particular date.
5 To schedule a notification by date:
a Select a start and end time or select YES from the All Day drop-down
list.
b Select the month, day, and year the notification will be sent from the
Month, Day, and Year drop-down lists.
c Click Save Schedule.
Schedule Notification By Range — This section allows you to schedule
filter operation (message notification) between a range of dates.
6 To schedule a notification by date range:
a Select a start and end time, or select YES from the All Day
drop-down list.
b Select the month, day, and year the filter will become operational
from the Start Date drop-down lists. Select the month, day, and year
the filter will cease to be operational from the End Date drop-down
lists.
c Click Save Schedule.
You can create schedules for any existing notification filter by repeating
steps 2 through 6. Each saved schedule is listed in the top section (titled
Select a Notification Filter to Schedule). To enable a notification schedule,
enable the check box next to the schedule description. By default,
schedules are created in a disabled state.
336
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Alias Configuration
Use the Alias Configuration feature to set up different numbers that are
associated with and point to a mailbox. This allows the system to know a
subscriber’s identity when they access the system from other media such
as a mobile phone, a fax, or a different e-mail address.
For example, a subscriber could have the following office phone, cell
phone, home phone, and preferred e-mail address information:
■
12345 (office)
■
15554445562 (cell)
■
19996587234 (home)
■
myname@xyz.com (e-mail)
You configure the telephone numbers and the e-mail address as aliases of
an IP Messaging mailbox (for example, mailbox number 5678).
Consequently, all voice mails for the office, cell, and home phone
numbers as well as e-mail for the specified address are associated with
mailbox 5678. A subscriber can retrieve messages from any configured
alias using regular mailbox features like password, personal greeting, and
auto login. If you do not change these settings, the default settings apply
(those used for the parent mailbox).
You can also use Alias Configuration to allow two subscribers to share a
single mailbox. You can either merge two existing mailboxes or create an
alias for a subscriber without a mailbox that points to the mailbox of
another subscriber. See “Sharing a Mailbox”.
To assign an alias number to a mailbox or to edit, add, or delete an alias
for a mailbox:
1 Click Alias Configuration on the Mailbox Options menu. The Alias
Configuration screen appears (Figure 153).
Figure 153 Alias Main Menu
Editing Mailboxes
337
2 Click Add New to create a new alias. The Add Alias screen appears
(Figure 154).
Figure 154 Add New Alias Screen
3 Enter a name for the alias configuration in the Alias Name field
(optional).
4 Enter a phone number or e-mail address in the Number or E-mail
Address field,
5 Enter a mailbox number in the Attach Number field.
6 Enter the password to access this alias mailbox in the Enter Password
field.
7 Set the Auto Login field to ON (no password) or OFF (password).
8 Select the phone number, fax number, e-mail address, or LDAP login for
the alias in the Alias Type drop-down list.
9 Select an entry from the drop-down lists for the Password, Name
Announcement, and Personal Greeting fields.
10 Click Save. The Alias screen appears with your new alias listed.
338
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Virtual Calling Card
The Virtual Calling Card is a service that allows subscribers to make
outgoing calls from their mailbox. You can define the number of
allowable minutes on a monthly basis.
To change virtual calling card settings:
1 Click Virtual Calling Card on the Mailbox Options menu. The Virtual
Calling Card screen appears (Figure 155).
Figure 155 Virtual Calling Card Screen
2 The Time Left field displays the remaining virtual calling card minutes.
When this is enabled, Time Left equals Maximum Time minus used
minutes.
3 Click the Change Monthly Time drop-down list and select a new limit
to change the maximum allowed virtual calling card minutes for the
current mailbox.
4 The Transfer Digits field specifies the maximum length of the number a
subscriber is allowed to dial for an outgoing call. If the subscriber dials
more than the allowed number of transfer digits, IP Messaging rejects the
call.
5 The Warning Minutes field specifies how many virtual calling card
minutes remain before IP Messaging notifies the subscriber his or her
minutes are about to expire.
6 Click Save.
If a subscriber exceeds the maximum allowed virtual calling card minutes
during a call, IP Messaging allows the call to be completed. If the
subscriber attempts a subsequent call, IP Messaging notifies the
subscriber that his or her virtual calling card minutes have expired. If a
subscriber runs out of minutes, IP Messaging does not grant a new
Editing Mailboxes
339
minute quota until the first day of the next month unless you override the
maximum allowed virtual calling card minutes in the Change Maximum
Time drop-down list for that subscriber.
Toggle On/Off
Preferences
This option allows you to change some mailbox settings that were initially
configured when the mailbox was created.
To change mailbox preferences:
1 Click Toggle On/Off Preferences on the Mailbox Options menu. The
Toggle On/Off Preferences screen appears (Figure 156).
Figure 156 Toggle On/Off Preferences Screen
2 Change preferences by checking the desired checkbox or highlighting a
pull-down menu selection.
3 Click Save.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI. If you (or another
administrator) selected the ftl (Traditional) option for the Menu Style COS
parameter (see Table 28), you should not configure the Email or POP3
Media options.
If you deactivate a mailbox, a subscriber will be unable to access their
mailbox through the Telephone User Interface (TUI) or through Web
340
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
provisioning. Activate the mailbox to restore normal access to a
subscriber.
Global Voicemail is supported only on the VCX system.
Family Mailboxes
This option allows you to create sub-mailboxes under a main mailbox that
can be used by members of a group such as members of a family.
To create family mailboxes or sub-mailboxes:
1 Click Family Mailboxes on the Mailbox Options menu. The Family
Mailboxes screen appears (Figure 157).
Figure 157 Family Mailbox Screen
2 Enter a number in the field or leave it blank.
If you leave it blank, IP Messaging assigns the next available family
mailbox number.
3 Click Add Mailbox.
Figure 158 shows the new family mailbox 1000_1 under mailbox 1000.
Editing Mailboxes
341
Figure 158 Add Family Mailbox
4 Click Add Mailbox again to add another family mailbox.
The default password for a family mailbox is the last four digits of the
parent mailbox plus the family mailbox index. For example, if the parent
mailbox number is 12345, the first family mailbox is 12345_1 and
password for this family mailbox is 23451.
5 It is possible for a subscriber to change the password for a family mailbox
on the telephone TUI. You can reset the password for a family mailbox
back to its default:
■
To reset the password for the selected family mailbox, click Reset
Password.
■
To reset the passwords for all family mailboxes, click Reset All
Passwords.
342
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
Delivery Options
Use this option to specify how messages will be delivered to users.
To set delivery options:
1 Click Delivery Options on the Mailbox Options menu. The Auto-delivery
Options screen appears (Figure 159).
Figure 159 Auto-delivery Options Screen
Editing Mailboxes
343
2 Type information in the text fields or select an item from the drop-down
lists:
■
Maximum Retries — Specifies the maximum number of times IP
Messaging attempts to deliver a voice or fax message before declaring
the delivery unsuccessful.
■
Retry Interval (Seconds) — Specifies the time in seconds between
delivery attempts.
■
Voice Auto Delivery — Specifies that voice messages are
automatically delivered to the voice mailbox number entered in the
Voice Number field. Voice messages will also be sent to the mailbox
configured on the Create/Delete Mailbox screen. See Figure 132.
■
Fax AutoDelivery — Specifies that fax messages are automatically
delivered to the fax number entered in the Fax Number field. Fax
messages will also be sent to the mailbox configured on the
Create/Delete Mailbox screen. See Figure 132.
Facsimile is supported only on VCX systems.
■
Email Auto Delivery — Specifies that e-mail messages are
automatically delivered to the e-mail address entered in the Email
Address field. E-mail messages will also be sent to the mailbox
configured on the Create/Delete Mailbox screen. See Figure 132.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
■
CNG Tone — Enabling this option turns on the automatic detection of
a fax send tone (Comfort Noise Generator) and allows receipt of the
fax.
■
Line Turnaround — Enabling this option turns on detection of a fax
receive tone, which enables the sending of faxes that have not already
been sent to be printed.
■
After Delivery — Specifies the action taken on auto-delivered
messages. The options are:
■
■
Leave New — A voice message will be delivered to the voice
number listed on the Delivery Options screen and placed in the
new messages folder.
Save — A voice message will be delivered to the voice number
listed on the Delivery Options screen and placed in the saved
message folder.
344
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
■
Delete — A voice message will be delivered to the voice number
listed on the Delivery Options screen and placed in the deleted
messages folder.
■
Digits Allowed — Specifies the maximum number of digits allowed
for either the voice or fax Auto Delivery number for any outbound
dial.
■
Voice Number — Specifies the number to which voice messages are
sent.
■
Fax Number — Specifies the number to which fax messages are sent.
■
Email Address — Specifies the e-mail address to which e-mail
messages are sent.
■
Line Group — Designates a specific line or lines to which messages
are sent.
■
Urgent Voice Msg Only — Enables the auto delivery feature only for
the messages marked urgent.
3 Enter text in the Cover Sheet text box by clicking your cursor in the field
and typing the required text for a cover sheet.
4 Enter text in the Forward Insertion Text by clicking your cursor in the
field and typing the text that you want to forward.
5 Click Submit.
If your entries are valid, the system accepts them and the same screen
appears after you click Submit. If you entered invalid entries, the system
displays an error message at the top of the screen.
Integrating a
Subscriber Mailbox
with an E-Mail
Application
You can use standard e-mail clients to retrieve e-mail from the IP
Messaging system acting as a POP3 or IMAP e-mail server. Voicemail
messages are delivered as WAV file attachments to e-mail messages. The
subscriber can then access the e-mail account associated with the
mailbox and listen to the WAV attachment using any media player.
E-mail is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI.
IP Messaging supports the following third-party e-mail applications:
■
Microsoft Outlook Express
■
Microsoft Outlook
■
IBM Lotus Notes
Integrating a Subscriber Mailbox with an E-Mail Application
345
To enable voicemail message delivery as a as a WAV file attachment in an
e-mail message, configure the following parameters for a subscriber:
■
On the “Toggle On/Off Preferences” screen, ensure that the Email
Media and POP3 Media fields are set to Both Send and Receive
On.
If your e-mail system uses the IMAP protocol, your IP Messaging
administrator must configure the appropriate IMAP settings. See
“Changing Profile Settings”.
■
Optionally, on the “Toggle On/Off Preferences” screen, enable the
Personal Address Book option. IP Messaging can display a sender's
information in the e-mail application’s preferences if you populate the
sender's information in the subscriber’s Personal Address Book (PAB).
See “Personal Address Book”.
Also, IP Messaging can use a PAB entry when it constructs the From:
field in a voicemail message retrieved as an e-mail (see “Constructing
From: Field Information”).
■
Optionally, on the Mailbox Preferences screen (see “Editing
Mailboxes”), configure the Email Address field if you want if you
want to use a different e-mail address in your outgoing e-mail.
■
Optionally, on the System Configuration screen (see Figure 78), click
the Srvs button to access the System Servers screen. Identify IP
Messaging as the Reply Server (ReplySv; see Table 46). This setting
enables the system to extract the proper sender information of the
voice message. If you leave it blank, the From: field of an e-mail
containing a voice message shows
<phone_number/mailbox_number> only instead of
<phone_number/mailbox_number@reply_server>. Consequently, the
subscriber cannot reply to the message.
The System Configuration screen can only be accessed by the IP
Messaging administrator.
■
Configure an e-mail account (in Outlook Express, Outlook, or Lotus
Notes) for the mailbox.
Create an IMAP or POP3 account that points to your IP Messaging
mailbox. Set the incoming mail server (IMAP or POP3) to be the IP
Messaging domain name.
You can choose to either use the IP Messaging server as your outgoing
server (SMTP) or a third party server. Configure a third-party SMTP
server to allow subscribers to send e-mail messages to external
destinations. If you configure IP Messaging as your only SMTP server,
346
CHAPTER 16: CREATING, DELETING, AND EDITING MAILBOXES
subscribers can send e-mail messages to other IP Messaging
subscribers only.
17
SETTING UP FIND ME FOLLOW ME
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Find Me Follow Me Description
■
Configuring FMFM
Find Me Follow Me is supported on the 3Com® Native Telephone User
Interface (TUI) only.
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Find Me Follow Me
Description
The Find Me Follow Me (FMFM) feature allows a caller to contact a
subscriber regardless of the subscriber’s location, day, time, or network
access device. FMFM works across the Publicly Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN), wireless, Voice over IP (VoIP), and Intelligent networks
and supports basic and advanced contact methods.
FMFM allows a subscriber to control which callers can reach them. A
subscriber can:
■
Allow all incoming numbers to contact you.
■
Allow some incoming number to contact you.
■
Prevent some incoming numbers from contacting you.
You configure how callers can reach you by creating a list of destination
telephone numbers. The system attempts to reach you by dialing each
number in sequence, from first to last.
You can also use the TUI to record a greeting for callers while the system
tries to find you.
348
CHAPTER 17: SETTING UP FIND ME FOLLOW ME
You can configure FMFM through either the IP Messaging Web
Provisioning interface or the TUI on your telephone.
This chapter describes how to configure FMFM through the IP Messaging
Web Provisioning interface. Refer to the IP Messaging Module User Guide
– 3Com Native Interface for information on setting up FMFM through the
TUI.
FMFM is supported only on the 3Com Native TUI. If you (or another
administrator) selected the ftl (Traditional) option for the Menu Style COS
parameter (see Table 28), you should not configure FMFM.
Do not use Find Me Follow Me if two-stage dialing is configured for your
gateway. Find Me Follow Me cannot handle waiting for a dial tone to be
asserted and a call will not connect to the PSTN.
Configuring FMFM
Accessing the Basic
FMFM Screen
This section describes how to set up basic FMFM features from the IP
Messaging Web Provisioning interface.
To access the basic Find Me Follow Me screen:
1 Access the IP Messaging Web Provisioning interface. See “Accessing the
Web Interface”.
2 Click Edit Mailboxes on the Admin Options menu. The Edit Mailbox
screen appears.
3 Enter a mailbox number in the Mailbox field and click Submit.
4 Select FMFM and Mailbox from the FMFM Feature drop-down list.
5 Select ON from the FMFM Call Intercept drop-down list.
6 Click Find Me Follow Me on the Mailbox Options menu. The Find Me
Follow Me screen appears (Figure 160).
Configuring FMFM
349
Figure 160 Find Me Follow Me (Basic) Screen
From this screen, you can set up the following FMFM functions:
■
Allow some or all callers to find the user who owns the mailbox
specified in step 3. See “Allowing All Callers to Find a User”.
■
Prevent callers from finding the user who owns the mailbox specified
in step 3. See “Preventing Callers From Finding a User”.
Once you have specified the callers that can or cannot reach a particular
user, enter the phone numbers IP Messaging will use to locate the user.
See “Entering Destination Phone Numbers”.
Allowing All Callers
to Find a User
To allow all callers to find a user:
1 Access the Find Me Follow Me screen. See “Accessing the Basic FMFM
Screen”.
2 Select “Allow all calls to contact me”.
3 Click Continue. The destination screen appears (Figure 163).
Allowing Some
Callers to Find a User
To allow some callers to contact the user:
1 Access the Find Me Follow Me screen. See “Accessing the Basic FMFM
Screen”.
2 Select “Allow some calls to contact me”.
3 Click Continue. The Find Me Follow Me Allowed Numbers screen
appears (Figure 161).
350
CHAPTER 17: SETTING UP FIND ME FOLLOW ME
Figure 161 FMFM Allowed Numbers Screen
.
4 Enter the allowed number and click Submit.
The screen refreshes and displays the number you added.
5 Enter all the allowed phone numbers and click Submit after each entry.
6 Delete an allowed phone number by clicking the check box next to the
number and clicking Delete.
7 Click Continue when you finish entering allowed numbers. The
Destination screen appears (Figure 163).
Preventing Callers
From Finding a User
To prevent callers from finding a user:
1 Access the Find Me Follow Me screen. See “Accessing the Basic FMFM
Screen”.
2 Select “Exclude some calls from contacting me”.
3 Click Continue. The Find Me Follow Me Exclude Numbers screen appears
(Figure 162).
Configuring FMFM
351
Figure 162 FMFM Exclude Numbers Screen
4 Enter a phone number that you want to exclude.
5 Click Submit.
The screen refreshes and displays the number you added.
6 Enter all the phone numbers you want to exclude and click Submit after
each entry.
7 Delete an excluded phone number by clicking the check box next to the
number and clicking Delete.
8 Click Continue when you finish entering excluded numbers. The
Destination screen appears (Figure 163).
Entering Destination
Phone Numbers
After you have specified the callers who are allowed or prevented from
reaching a user, you specify the phone numbers where the user can be
reached (destination phone numbers). When forwarding a call, IP
Messaging uses the numbers in the order in which you entered them.
You can use any number that can be dialed by the IP Messaging system.
For example, you can enter an extension at another site or an external
number such as a cell phone number. These specified numbers are
subject to any dialing restrictions or formatting required to reach other
sites in your company configured by you or by the administrator.
352
CHAPTER 17: SETTING UP FIND ME FOLLOW ME
On the Find Me Follow Me Destination screen (Figure 163):
1 Enter the first number you want IP Messaging to try when attempting to
find the user.
2 Click Submit.
Figure 163 Destination Screen
The screen refreshes and displays the number you added.
3 Enter all the phone numbers you want IP Messaging to try when
attempting to find the user and click Submit after each entry.
4 Enter a value (in seconds) in the No Answer Timeout field. This value
determines how long the system tries a number before trying the next
number in the list. This specified value applies to all entered numbers. In
other words, you cannot specify 30 seconds for one number and 45
seconds for another number.
The No Answer Timeout value should be less than the No Answer
Timeout value configured on the phone. The No Answer Timeout value
determines how long a telephone rings before the system forwards
unanswered calls. If the No Answer Timeout value is more than the No
Answer Timeout value configured on the phone, FMFM will access the
phone’s voice mailbox and will not try the next number in the FMFM
sequence.
5 Delete a destination phone number by clicking the check box next to the
number and clicking Delete.
6 Click Finish when you are finished entering destination numbers.
Configuring FMFM
The main FMFM screen appears. The screen indicates that FMFM is
enabled and displays the current configuration. Figure 164 show an
example of a FMFM configuration.
Figure 164 FMFM Final Screen
353
354
CHAPTER 17: SETTING UP FIND ME FOLLOW ME
18
CALL REPORTING
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Call Reports Utility Overview
■
Accessing the Call Reports Utility and Configuring the Server
■
Data Display Options
■
Navigation Pane Display Options
■
Retrieving CDRs
■
IP Messaging CDR Field Descriptions
■
Creating Custom Reports
■
Report Grids
■
Status Bar
Microsoft .NET Framework version 1.1 or later needs to be installed on a
system before the Call Detail Reporting software is installed. The .NET
Framework software is available from the Microsoft Download Center.
This chapter only discusses IP Messaging call records. For information on
VCX™ call records, see the VCX Administration Guide. More detailed
information is discussed in the online help for the Call Reports utility.
Features that are supported only on VCX systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
The VCX Call Reports utility should be used on VCX only. The NBX system
has its own Call Reports utility. See the NBX Administrator’s Guide for
more information on the NBX Call Reports utility.
356
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
Call Reports Utility
Overview
The Call Reports utility can retrieve and display Call Detail Records (CDRs)
from an IP Messaging server. You can schedule the Call Reports utility to
retrieve CDRs at a specific time or you can retrieve them on demand. The
Call Reports utility also includes an option for creating reports that
contain a subset of CDR information by filtering content.
CDRs contain information about each call that is processed by IP
Telephony software. CDR information can be generated by a gateway,
the IP Messaging server, or the call processor, which can then send the
CDR information directly to the Accounting Server. See the VCX
Administration Guide for information on server configuration.
The VCX Accounting Server supports the 3Queue protocol for receiving
CDRs. 3Queue is a high-performance, reliable, 3Com® proprietary
protocol that uses ASN.1 formatted User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
messages. The UDP messages are sent to and received from the back-end
servers.
In general, the CDR generating component (a gateway, IP Messaging, or
the call processor) is responsible for deciding which CDR fields are
appropriate for that type of component. However, a CDR notes the start,
end, duration, and type of call. The CDR fields retrieved by the Call
Reports utility for IP Messaging are described in “IP Messaging CDR Field
Descriptions”.
The Call Reports utility runs in a Microsoft Windows environment and is
an installation option. Refer to the VCX installation Guide for
information.
Accessing the Call Reports Utility and Configuring the Server
Accessing the Call
Reports Utility and
Configuring the
Server
357
This section assumes that you are logged in to the PC on which the Call
Reports utility has been installed.
To access the Call Reports utility:
1 From the Start menu, select Programs > 3Com VCX > VCX Call
Reports.
The Call Reports utility appears (Figure 165).
Figure 165 Call Reports Utility
\
You must identify the IP Messaging server from which the Call Reports
utility will retrieve CDRs. The first time you start the Call Reports utility,
the utility displays the Server tab in the Preferences dialog box with its
default values as shown in Figure 166.
After the initial server identification, you can use the Preferences dialog
box (View > Preferences) to modify the initial configuration.
358
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
Figure 166 Call Reports Preferences Dialog - Server Tab
2 Enter the appropriate data in the fields. See Table 60.
Accessing the Call Reports Utility and Configuring the Server
359
Table 60 Call Reports Server Preferences Descriptions
Field Section
Field
Description
Network Addresses
VCX IP Address
IP address of the server where
the call processor is located. This
server will generate VCX CDRs.
You can leave this field
unchanged if you do not want
to retrieve VCX CDRs. The
default VCX remote directory is
set to
/opt/3com/VCX/bssxml/data/
defaultGroup/outbox.
IPMSG IP Address
IP address of the server where
the IP Messaging system is
located. This server will generate
IP Messaging CDRs. You can
leave this field unchanged if you
do not want to retrieve IP
Messaging CDRs
Use SFTP
Check to enable the Secure File
Transfer Protocol (SFTP).
User Name
User name of the login for the
VCX server hosting the Call
Records server.
Password
Password of the login for the
VCX server hosting the Call
Records server.
Remote Directory
The location where the super
CDR files are located. The
default is
/opt/3com/VCX/bss/db/export/.
User Name
User name of the login for the IP
Messaging server.
Password
Password of the login for the IP
Messaging server.
Remote Directory
The location where the IP
Messaging system CDR files are
located. The default is
/usr/app/app.dir/vmcdr.dir/.
VCX CDR Login
IPMSG Server Login
3 Click OK.
360
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
Data Display
Options
Display Tab Options
Data display options can be set through the Display tab or the Column
Selection dialog box.
This procedure describes how to change display options with the Display
tab.
1 Select View > Preferences and click the Display tab. The Call Reports
Preferences dialog box displays (Figure 167).
Figure 167 Call Reports Preferences Dialog – Display Tab
2 Choose from the following options:
■
To display all records – Click All records to display every available
record.
■
To display records from a specific number of days – Click Only
records from last and type in the number of days in the days field.
■
To limit the display of records – Type in the number of records you
want to display per page in the records field (next to Display
Interval). The display will then split the records into screens that
Data Display Options
361
match the specified interval. For example, if you download 200
records and have specified an interval of 100, there will be two pages
of records. The minimum allowable number of records is 100 and the
maximum is 1000.
Changing Column
Selections
Change the display settings by selecting the columns you want displayed.
1 Click on IPMSG from the main screen (Figure 165).
2 Select View > Column Selection. The Column Selection dialog box
displays (Figure 168).
Figure 168 Column Selections – IPMSG
3 Choose from the following options:
■
To display all columns – Click Select All to display all report columns
for IP Messaging.
■
To display specific columns – Locate the columns you want displayed
and check them.
■
To clear all checked boxes – Click Clear All to remove check marks
from all columns.
362
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
Navigation Pane
Display Options
The Navigation Pane is the panel on the left side of the main screen. To
change the number of displayed buttons:
1 Click the down arrow (located below the Grid Navigation tab).
2 Change the buttons you want to display using one of the following
methods:
■
Select Show Fewer Buttons to remove one or more buttons from
the Navigation Pane. When a button is removed, an icon replaces it
and displays on the bottom of the Navigation Pane. To add buttons
back, select Show More Buttons.
■
Select Navigation Pane Options; the Navigation Pane Options
dialog box displays (Figure 169). Uncheck the button(s) you want to
remove. To add a button back, check the button name.
Figure 169 Navigation Pane Options
■
Grid Navigation Tab
Select Add or Remove Buttons and highlight a choice in the
drop-down menu to enable or disable display of a button.
This tab is used to move forward and backward through large numbers of
records.
The default number of records is 100. However, if you download 900
records from the IP Messaging server, then you have to page through a
large number of records.
The Previous and Next icons allow you to navigate through the message
grid.
If you have a small number of records or have set the display value per
page to a large number, then selecting Next has no effect.
Retrieving CDRs
Retrieving CDRs
You can retrieve CDRs either manually or automatically.
Retrieve IP Messaging
CDRs Manually
To retrieve the CDRs for an IP Messaging system manually:
1 In the VCX Call Reports utility, select Data > IPMSG > Download
IPMSG Records.
2 New CDRs are downloaded from the server and displayed in the Call
Reports main window (Figure 170).
Figure 170 Retrieved IPMSG Records
363
364
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
Retrieve IP Messaging
CDRs Automatically
To retrieve the CDRs for an IP Messaging system automatically:
1 In the VCX Call Reports utility, select View > Preferences and click the
Retrieval tab. The Call Reports Preferences dialog box displays
(Figure 171).
Figure 171 Call Reports Preferences Dialog – Retrieval Tab
2 To automatically retrieve IP Messaging CDRs:
a Enable the checkbox preceding the field IPMSG: Automatically
retrieve every <hours field> hours.
b In the <hours field> field, enter a number that specifies how often
(in hours) you want the Call Reports utility to retrieve new CDRs.
3 Click OK.
New CDRs are downloaded automatically from the server at the specified
interval.
You can also automatically retrieve IP Messaging CDRs when you start the
Call Reports utility by enabling the option Prompt to retrieve at
startup.
Purging CDRs
Purging CDRs
365
To remove call records from the local database:
Purging records locally has no impact on CDRs stored on the IP
Messaging server.
1 Select Data > Purge Old Records; the Purge data dialog box displays
(Figure 172).
Figure 172 Purge data dialog box
2 Check Purge IPMSG Records to purge IP Messaging call records.
3 Select from the following purge options:
■
To delete all records, select Purge all records.
■
To delete records older than a certain date, select Purge data older
than and enter a date in MM/DD/YYYY format.
■
To redownload records that no longer exist locally, select
Redownload. This sets a flag that will include purged records during
a typical record download. See “Retrieving CDRs” for more
information.
366
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
IP Messaging CDR
Field Descriptions
This section describes the fields in a IP Messaging CDR returned to the
Call Reports utility. These CDRs are captured by the Accounting Server
and can either be sent to the Call Records Server or exported to a flat file.
These fields are described in Table 61 and can be viewed by clicking on
the Data tab and selecting IPMSG.
For information on VCX CDRs, refer to the VCX Administration Guide.
Table 61 IP Messaging CDR Fields
Field
Description
UNIQ
Specifies a unique identifier for the CDR.
DATE
Specifies the date and time this CDR was logged.
TYPE
Provides a 5-character description of the event:
The first character can be one of the following:
■
F — Facsimile call
■
L — Login Session
■
M — Message Deposit
■
N — Notification
■
O — Live outdial
■
P — Page
■
S — Find Me Follow Me call
■
X — Unknown type or call dropped too early to
determine type
The second character can be one of the following:
■
I — Inbound
■
O — Outbound
The third character can be one of the following:
■
F — Fax component exists
■
X — No fax component exists or irrelevant
The fourth character can be one of the following:
■
V — Voice component exists
■
X — No voice component exists or irrelevant
The fifth character can be one of the following:
CALLING
■
F — Text component exists
■
X — No text component exists or irrelevant
Specifies the calling party number.
IP Messaging CDR Field Descriptions
367
Table 61 IP Messaging CDR Fields (continued)
Field
Description
CALLED
Specifies the called party number.
REDIR
Specifies the redirected party number.
LOGIN
Specifies the subscriber ID.
COS
Specifies the Class Of Service ID.
CARRIER
Contains a site-specific string.
CC_NUM
Not used.
DEST
Specifies the outdial destination number.
DEST_NA
Specifies the outdial destination name announcement.
START
Contains a timestamp, in seconds, since Jan 1, 1970.
DURATION
Specifies the duration of the call in seconds.
PG_DUR
Specifies the duration of the call up to the end of a personal
greeting for 'Leave Message' events.
JOB_ID
Not used.
STATUS
Specifies the ‘End of Call Status’:
■
0 — Answer/Complete
■
1 — InvalidMedia
■
2 — Canceled
■
3 — No Answer
■
4 — Busy
■
5 — Intercept
■
6 — No Ring
■
7 — Failure
■
8 — HardErr
■
9 — NoDialTone
MODE
Provides a description of the event. For example, "FMFM_0"
is an incomplete Find Me Follow Me event and "FMFM_1" is
a completed Find Me Follow Me event.
PAGES
Specifies the number of pages successfully faxed.
BYTES
Specifies the number of bytes successfully transmitted.
CVRSHEET
Indicates that a fax included a coversheet.
MESSAGE
■
0 — None or not relevant
■
1 — Standard coversheet
■
2 — Custom coversheet
Specifies the ID of an associated message (if any).
368
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
Table 61 IP Messaging CDR Fields (continued)
Field
Description
NST_FIN
Specifies the number of new messages in a mailbox at the
start of a session and the number of new messages at the
end of a session.
SST_FIN
Specifies the number of saved messages in a mailbox at the
start of a session and the number of saved messages at the
end of a session.
MSG_CHG
Specifies the number of messages reviewed, saved, and
deleted during a session.
SECS
Specifies the total number of seconds for messages in a
mailbox at call start, total seconds of messages listened to
during a call, and total recorded seconds during a call.
DATA
Contains miscellaneous data.
DIRECTION
Indicates call direction: “I” for inbound and “O” for
outbound.
FAX
Indicates the content (a fax) of the call that generated the
CDR.
VOICE
Indicates the content (a voice message) of the call that
generated the CDR.
TEXT
Indicates the content (a text message) of the call that
generated the CDR.
Creating Custom Reports
Creating Custom
Reports
369
You can select a specific type of IP Messaging report to customize:
1 Select a report using one of the following options:
■
Click on IPMSG from the main screen (Figure 165), then click on the
Reports tab in the Navigation Pane.
■
Select Reports > IPMSG Reports.
2 Choose a specific report type by clicking on the list in the Navigation Pane
or by selecting it from the IPMSG Reports pull-down menu. For
example, if you select FindMeFollowMe, a parameters dialog box
displays (Figure 173).
Figure 173 Report Parameters – FindMeFollowMe
370
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
3 Create a custom report as follows:
a Type a title into the Custom Title field.
b Choose a report period. You have the option of selecting from preset
ranges or creating your own range by selecting Custom.
A custom range enables the Report from: and Report to: fields. Type
in the desired dates and times for your report.
c Specify a range of addresses that starts with, contains, or ends with a
specific address.
d Select a primary and secondary sort order from their respective
drop-down lists.
e Press Save to store these parameters in a custom report.
4 Retrieve an existing custom report by pressing Retrieve. Select the report
from the Open File dialog box.
5 Display the report format by pressing OK. You are then given the option
of printing the report or exporting it to numerous formats such as .pdf
and .doc.
Report Grids
Customized Grids
This section briefly describes how to create a custom report grid. It also
discusses grid locking and filtering.
Creating a customized report grid as follows:
1 Set the display options for your grid. See “Data Display Options” for
more information.
2 Resize the rows and columns by dragging the double-headed arrow in
the desired direction.
3 Click the Grids tab and select Save current view in the Navigation
Pane.
4 Give the grid a name. Once it is saved, it is available as a grid option for
later use.
For example, if you create a customized grid and name it test, the grid
name ipmsg_test will display in the Navigation Pane.
5 Retrieve an already existing grid by clicking the Grids tab and selecting
the grid name from the Navigation Pane.
Status Bar
Locking /Unlocking
Columns
371
Lock or unlock a grid column by selecting Grids > Lock Columns
(On/Off). A lock/unlock icon (Figure 174) appears at the top of each
column. You can then toggle locking and unlocking by clicking on this
icon. If you lock the column (icon pointing down), the column moves to
the far left of the grid and is frozen as you scroll across the screen.
Filtering Columns
Filter each column’s contents by clicking on the Filter icon (Figure 174). A
drop-down menu allows you to toggle the display of specific data. For
example, in the lvb_date column, if you select 10/04/2005 from the Filter
drop-down list, only the records associated with that date will display.
You can also specify custom filter criteria.
Sorting Columns
Change the sort order of a column by clicking on its title bar; a sort order
icon appears (Figure 174). An icon that points up means the column is
sorted in ascending order. An icon pointing down means the column is
sorted in descending order.
Figure 174 Column Icons
Status Bar
The status bar is located on the bottom of the CDR utility (Figure 175). It
indicates the number of downloaded records, the type of data (VCX or
IPMSG), the date, and time.
Figure 175 Status Bar
372
CHAPTER 18: CALL REPORTING
19
CONFIGURING TEXT-TO-SPEECH
This chapter covers these topics:
■
Text-To-Speech Overview
■
Installation Requirements
■
Installation Overview
■
Installing the Engine
■
Installing a Voice
■
TTS Adapter Installation
■
Automatic License Activation
■
Uninstalling the E-Mail Reader TTS Adapter
■
Adding TTS with the VCX Reconfiguration Script
Features that are supported only on VCX™ systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
TTS is supported only on VCX systems.
374
CHAPTER 19: CONFIGURING TEXT-TO-SPEECH
Text-To-Speech
Overview
The 3Com® E-Mail Reader application is a Text-To-Speech (TTS)
implementation. A TTS engine reads text strings and speaks them to a
listener. IP Messaging can use the 3Com® E-Mail Reader application to
speak the content of e-mail messages to a subscriber when that
subscriber uses a telephone to retrieve e-mail messages from an IP
Messaging mailbox.
The E-Mail Reader application is available from 3Com Customer Service. It
is distributed as a .zip file (Email Reader.zip) with these components:
■
TTS Engine - The TTS engine converts text into an encoded voice. The
E-Mail Reader application uses Speechify software from ScanSoft, Inc.
as the TTS engine. For the current release, Speechify software is
installed from the downloaded E-Mail Reader application on to a
Windows server.
■
TTS Voice - The TTS voice reads text strings aloud that a subscriber
retrieves from a voice mailbox.
TTS Adapter - The TTS adapter provides a link from the TTS engine,
Speechify, to IP Messaging software running on VCX Linux. The TTS
adapter is installed on the same Windows server as the Speechify TTS
engine.
The Speechify TTS engine, voice, and adapter are installed on a Windows
platform only.
The E-Mail Reader application supports the G.711u CODEC. The
Speechify software is available through the E-Mail Reader application and
supports US English, UK English, and Latin American Spanish.
Because the E-Mail Reader application supports the G.711u CODEC and
not the G.729a CODEC, IP Messaging must also use the G.711u CODEC if
you want to enable TTS. G.711u is the default CODEC enabled for IP
Messaging. See “CODEC Overview” for more information on codecs.
When a subscriber accesses an e-mail message in a voice mailbox through
the Telephone User Interface (TUI), a TTS request is relayed by IP
Messaging software to the TTS adapter. Each request specifies the text to
be converted and the CODEC and language to use. The TTS adapter
sends the request to the Speechify TTS engine.
Installation Requirements
375
The Speechify TTS engine converts the text to speech and the subscriber
hears the contents of the e-mail message. If the TTS engine cannot
process the request, an error code is returned to the IP Messaging system.
If the conversion does not happen within an internally calculated time
interval, the TTS adapter returns an error to the IP Messaging system.
The IP Messaging system and the TTS adapter exchange keep-alive
messages. If the IP Messaging system fails to receive a keep-alive
message, the IP Messaging system switches to another TTS adapter. See
“Uninstalling the E-Mail Reader TTS Adapter”. Current conversions are
lost. Subsequent conversions are routed to the new adapter.
Installation
Requirements
The E-Mail Reader application has the following minimum hardware and
software requirements for a Windows installation:
■
A 500 MHz Intel Pentium III-based computer
■
512 MB of RAM to support 72 ports. Refer to the Speechify User's
Guide or contact 3Com Technical Support for specific voice
requirements.
■
60 MB of free disk space for Speechify server run-time software. Each
Speechify voice requires additional disk space. Refer to the Speechify
User's Guide or contact 3Com Technical Support for specific voice
requirements.
■
Minimum system paging file size: 300 MB
■
A Network Interface Card
■
Windows 2003 Server or Windows XP Professional
■
A utility such as WinZip or PKZip to open the .zip file containing the
E-Mail Reader application
■
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later
■
Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0 or later for reading the full Speechify
documentation set
376
CHAPTER 19: CONFIGURING TEXT-TO-SPEECH
Installation
Overview
Install all three components of the E-Mail Reader application on the same
Windows workstation in the following order:
1 The TTS engine.
2 A voice.
3 The TTS adapter.
Installing the Engine
Install the engine as follows:
1 Create a directory for the E-Mail Reader application.
2 Unzip the Email Reader.zip file in the directory that you created in step 1.
3 Navigate to Email Reader > speechify > Core
4 Double-click on setup.exe to install the TTS engine.
5 Follow the wizard and accept the End-User License Agreement.
The installer will caution you to install a TTS voice before the TTS software
will operate.
6 Click Finish and reboot the system.
Installing a Voice
Install a voice as follows:
1 Navigate to Email Reader > speechify > Jill
2 Double-click on setup.exe to install the TTS voice.
3 Click Next, accept the license agreement, and click Next.
4 A Custom Setup screen appears. Do not change any of these settings.
Click Next.
5 Click Install.
6 Click Finish to close the installer.
Installation Overview
TTS Adapter
Installation
377
Installing the TTS adapter is a multi-step process that is described in these
sections:
■
Initial installation on a Windows system
■
Configuration of various parameters
■
Starting the service
Installing the Adapter
Perform the initial TTS adapter installation as follows:
1 Navigate to Email Reader\ttsadapter
2 Double-click 3COMTtsservice.exe. A command window opens and then
closes.
3 Click Run… and type cmd to open a command window.
4 Navigate to the directory where 3COMTtsService.exe is located.
5 Type the following command to install 3ComUmsTtsAdapter as a service
in the Windows system:
3comttsservice -install
If the service is successfully installed, the system displays 3COM
IPMESSAGING TTS Adapter installed .
Configuring the Adapter
The TTS adapter configuration specifies parameter values that enable the
adapter (and IP Messaging) to communicate with the Speechify TTS
engine. These parameter values are specified in the 3ComTts.xml
configuration file. A sample of this file, which is included with the 3Com
E-Mail Reader application, is shown in Figure 176.
378
CHAPTER 19: CONFIGURING TEXT-TO-SPEECH
Figure 176 Adapter Configuration File
IP Messaging reads the 3ComTts.xml configuration file when the system
starts. If you make changes to this file, you must stop and restart the
service for the new values to take effect.
Configure the file as follows:
1 Navigate to the directory where 3ComTts.xml is located.
2 Open the file in a text editor and change the sample values as necessary.
See Table 62.
Installation Overview
379
.
Table 62 3COMTTS.XML Parameters
Parameter
Default Value
Description
<IPMCommPort>
1722
Specifies the port used by IP Messaging to
communicate with the TTS adapter. 1722 is
the default value and must match the TTS
port number configured in the IP Messaging
first boot script. Check the boot script for
the port number and make sure that it
matches the port number in the
configuration file.
<Logging>
0
Enable logging by entering (1) and disable
logging by entering (0).The log file is written
to the TTS adapter installation directory.
<EngineName>
Speechify
Specifies the TTS engine that IP Messaging
will communicate with through the TTS
adapter. For this release, the only valid value
is “Speechify”.
<EnginePort>
5555
Specifies the port used by the TTS adapter to
communicate with the TTS engine. The
specified value, 5555, is a sample and
should be changed.
To determine the port, start Speechify server
management by selecting Start
->Programs -> Speechify -> Speechify
Server Management. The Speechify dialog
box displays a port number. Use this number
in place of the sample value, 5555. For
example, if Speechify lists 5581 as the port
number, use 5581 in place of 5555 in the
EnginePort field.
Notes: Make sure that the voice has been
started. Select Actions -> Start this voice
to activate the installed voice.
The adapter service 3COM IPMESSAGING
TTS Adapter should be stopped and
restarted after the port is changed as
described above. See “Starting the
Adapter Service” for information on
starting the service.
<License>
1
Specifies the number of Speechify licenses.
For example, if you have 10 licenses, change
this parameter to 10.
<Language>
1 = US English
Specifies the language supported by the
Speechify TTS engine. Specify the language
you have purchased and installed. For
example, if you have purchased UK English,
enter 2.
2 = UK English
3 = Spanish
380
CHAPTER 19: CONFIGURING TEXT-TO-SPEECH
Starting the Adapter Service
Start the 3Com TTS adapter service:
This procedure assumes that the default Control Panel view (Category
View) is activated.
1 Open the Windows Control Panel.
2 Open Performance and Maintenance (Category View only).
3 Double-click Services.
4 Find and select 3COM IPMESSAGING TTS Adapter.
5 Click Start the service on the left panel.
6 Verify that the service’s status is running.
License Configuration
License
Configuration
Automatic License
Activation
381
This section describes how to configure TTS licensing.
Activate the TTS License automatically as follows:
1 Copy the license file speechify.lic to the default location
Program Files\Speechworks\Speechify\flexlm\license folder.
2 Reboot the machine or start the Speechify service manually as described
in “Starting the Adapter Service”.
Manual License
Activation
Activate the TTS License manually as follows:
1 Copy the license file speechify.lic to the desired location.
2 Launch Speechify Licensing Tools by navigating to Start -> Programs ->
Speechify -> Speechify Licensing Tools.
3 Click the Server/License File tab and select Configuration Using
Services (Figure 177).
Figure 177 Server/License File Tab
382
CHAPTER 19: CONFIGURING TEXT-TO-SPEECH
4 Click the Config Services tab (Figure 178).
Figure 178 Config Services Tab
5 Verify the file path of speechify.lic (the license file), lmgrd.exe (the license
server executable), and the debug log file. Change the paths if desired.
6 Select the Use Services check box.
7 Click Save Service, and then click Yes to confirm.
License Configuration
Starting the Licensing
Service
383
Start the licensing service at system power-up or by setting it manually.
Automatic Start-up
Select the Start Server at Power Up check box (Figure 178) to start the
service automatically with every reboot of the machine.
Manual Start-up
Select the Start/Stop/Reread tab (Figure 179) and click Start Server.
Figure 179 Start/Stop/Reread Tab
For detailed information on licensing, see:
■
SpeechWorks Licensing Handbook
Program Files\Speechworks\Speechify\SWILicensingHandbook.pdf
■
License Help Files
Program Files\Speechworks\Speechify\flexlm\htmlman folder
384
CHAPTER 19: CONFIGURING TEXT-TO-SPEECH
Uninstalling the
E-Mail Reader TTS
Adapter
This section describes how to remove the TTS Adapter. To uninstall the
TTS adapter:
1 Click Run… and type cmd
A command window opens.
2 Navigate to Email Reader\ttsadapter
The path name in step 2 may vary depending on where the files were
copied during installation.
3 Type the following command to uninstall the adapter service:
3comttsservice -remove
This removes 3COM IPMESSAGING TTS Adapter from the Services
window.
Adding TTS
with the VCX
Reconfiguration
Script
This section describes how to add TTS capability using VCX
Reconfiguration and should only be used when:
■
TTS functionality needs to be enabled on a system, or
■
Additional TTS servers need to be added to an existing TTS installation.
Run the vcx-reconfigure script from a command console and specify
the IP address of the Windows server where the TTS adapter is installed.
You can also specify additional servers if desired. For detailed information
on how this script works, see “Reconfiguring a VCX Server” in the VCX
Maintenance Guide.
This script writes the changes to config.app
You must reboot the system for the new values to take effect.
A
CONFIGURING A PRINTER
This appendix covers these topics:
■
Printer Configuration Overview
■
Adding a Printer
Features that are supported only on VCX systems are noted throughout
this Administration Guide.
Printer
Configuration
Overview
VCX Linux includes the Common Unix Printing System (CUPS) for printing
support in IP Messaging. This support enables IP Messaging to
automatically send faxes to a printer.
This appendix describes how to set up a default printer. For more
information on printer configuration, refer to one of the following
resources:
■
CUPS documentation — On your IP Telephony or IP Messaging
system, access the /usr/share/doc/cups-1.1.17 directory. This directory
contains several documents in PDF format, including the CUPS
Software Administrator’s Manual (filename: sam.pdf). This manual
provides extensive information on printing.
■
CUPS web page — The web page, http://www.cups.org, also includes
extensive information on CUPS.
■
Man page — Enter the command man lpadmin for a quick reference
to printer configuration.
386
APPENDIX A: CONFIGURING A PRINTER
Adding a Printer
VCX Linux uses the lpadmin interface for printer setup. This interface is
the standard command line tool for configuring CUPS. Note that you
should be logged in as root to execute these commands.
The following commands set up a remote PostScript printer.
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -p myPrinter -v lpd://10.1.1.1/lp -m
postscript
/usr/bin/enable myPrinter
/usr/sbin/accept myPrinter
The first command identifies name of the printer as myPrinter and the
name of the printer queue as lp. The printer’s IP address is 10.1.1.1.
The second and third commands enable the printer and allow it to accept
print jobs.
The following command sets this printer as the default. This step is not
necessary unless you have more than one printer defined.
/usr/sbin/lpadmin -d myPrinter
Other useful commands include:
■
lpstat — Displays status information about current print jobs and
printers.
■
lp — Submits files for printing or cancels print jobs.
■
lpq — Shows information about print queue status.
INDEX
Numbers
3COMTTS.XML configuration file 377
A
access number management 221
Accounting service configuration file
modifying 70
administrator profile
creating 79
deleting 83
modifying 82
perm button 81
screen, field descriptions 80
administrators
reports 185
alarms
system 238
alias
configuring (web interface) 336
configuring in AppMon 104
merging mailboxes 107, 108
screen, field descriptions 106
sharing mailboxes 108
aliasing an extension to one mailbox 110
all
classes of service, reports 183
subscribers reports screen
field descriptions 180
subscribers, reports 180
announcement
configuring for a hunt group 226
app system menu 36
app.out
monitoring 69
application utility 31
app system menu 36
ending a session 32
error message window 35
menu options 35
message window 34
network menu 39
scripts menu 38, 42
utilities menu 37
voice and channel window 33
AppMon
description 31
apprentice font
description 28
installing 29
architecture
platform 20
archiving messages 58
creating an access number 229 to 230
deleting an access number 230
implementation 59
retrieval 60
auto attendant
advanced options 257
configuring through the TUI 264
connecting to a telephone 259
creating 248 to 251
enabling for TUI 129
exporting a configuration 262
key button
descriptions 251
options 251
other settings 254 to 256
overview 246
recording a voice file 259
sample setup 247
scheduling 260 to 262
specifying
for a subscriber 139
for the system 216
subnodes 259
terminology 246
using an existing configuration 262
B
backup
files 54
IP messaging data 53
IP messaging data, scheduling 55
banner and server configuration
web interface 303
388
INDEX
C
call bridging
enabling
for a COS 167
for a subscriber profile 136
call bridging options
call monitor 138
Call Builder
application utility 31
message utility 44
overview 27
process monitor utility 42
utilities 27
call builder
starting 31
stopping 45
call detail record
see CDR
call monitor
delivery report setup 169
overview 139
provisioning
class of service 171
subscriber profile 140
reports, call bridging options 138
call processing
by mbx, reports 191
by port, reports 192
call processor, identifying 134
call reports utility
accessing 357
automatic retrieval of CDRs 364
CDR field descriptions 366 to 368
CDRs 356
changing column selections 361
configuring server 357 to 359
creating custom reports 369
customized grids 370
data display options 360
display tab 360
filtering columns 371
grid navigation tab 362
identifying servers 357
locking/unlocking columns 371
manual retrieval of CDRs 363
navigation pane display options 362
overview 356
purging CDRs 365
report grids 370
retrieval tab 364
sorting columns 371
status bar 371
catalina.out
monitoring 69
CDR
storage
managing 69
CDR field descriptions
call reports utility 366 to 368
CDRs 356
automatic retrieval 364
manual retrieval 363
central server
adding subscribers 286
centralized voicemail systems 134
class of service
see COS
client-server configuration 21
codec
changing 72
overview 71
supported types 71
company administration screen
button descriptions 200
field descriptions 199
company profile 198
adding e-mail domains 206
associate with a Send User Group 198
creating 198
creating (web interface) 299
creating/deleting
a range of mailboxes 201
deleting 201
deleting e-mail domains 207
importing 204
renaming 200
setting permission levels 203
subscriber permissions field descriptions 204
updating subscribers 202
company/division reports screen
field descriptions 183
config.app configuration file 384
configurations
platform 22
conventions
notice icons, About This Guide 16
text, About This Guide 16
COS 147
configuring
Index
message profile 162 to 171
creating (web interface) 298
defaults 147
deleting 153
deleting (web interface) 299
delivery report setup screen
field descriptions 167
editing (web interface) 297
enabling global voicemail 287
entry screen buttons 174
mailbox options 2 169
mailbox options setup 163 to 166
message delivery options 154
modifying 147
options setup 2 screen
field descriptions 170
provisioning 147
notification 159 to 161
provisioning (web interface) 297
updating profiles 173
COS profile
button descriptions 153
field descriptions 149 to 152
COS profile 2 screen
field descriptions 162
cpy4.out
monitoring 69
custom reports, creating
call reports utility 369
customized grids
call reports utility 370
Cygwin/X
configuration 29
installation 28
setting environment variables 30
D
data display options
call reports utillity 360
database synchronization 67
delivery options
mailbox, web interface 342
delivery options screen
field descriptions 101 to 102
delivery reports
enabling
COS 167
for a subscriber profile 136
disk usage by mailbox
reports 188
display tab
call reports utillity 360
distribution list entries
subscriber, importing 275
distribution lists
overview 267
subscriber 267 to 275
system 267
E
e-mail
application integration 143, 344
banners, configuring 218
configuration
POP3 options 142
subscriber profile 141
domains
adding 206
deleting 207
reader application 374
eml_client.out
monitoring 69
EMS 25
enabling
scp command 63
ssh command 63
error message window
viewing 35
exporting
subscriber information 99
external e-mail
configuring (web interface) 321 to 324
partial synchronization 324
synchronizing 323
F
failed login attempts
reports 195
family mailboxes 340
fax printing options 102
file system, synchronization 68
files
app.out
monitoring 69
catalina.out
monitoring 69
cpy4.out
monitoring 69
eml_client.out
monitoring 69
localhost_access_log 69
389
390
INDEX
monitoring file size 68
ums_cbipi.log
monitoring 69
filter administration
filter component descriptions 119
setting parameters 117
filtering columns
call reports utility 371
find me follow me
see FMFM
fixed text messages
email 104
FMFM
advanced configuration 111
basic configuration (web interface) 348
blocking callers (web interface) 350
configuration options (web interface) 349
configuring
destinations (web interface) 351
for a subscriber profile 111
defining a new procedure 114
event types 112
notification procedure, defining 114
overview 347
priorities 113
setting filter parameters 117
setting up a notification schedule 120
fonts
apprentice 28
G
global messaging configuration 22
global name directory 280
global voicemail 283
adding local servers 285
adding subscribers to the central server
directory 286
architecture 280
central server
function 21
definition 21
deleting local servers 286
description 279
disabling in web provisioning 289
editing local servers 285
enabling for a COS 287
global message sending 281
global name annoucements 281
global name directory 280
global provisioning 282
installation and configuration 282
local office administration 283
using web provisioning 288
greetings, scheduled
web interface 327
grid navigation tab
call reports utillity 362
H
hunt group announcement
converting a voice file 226 to 228
I
ID class of service, reports 184
idle/active mailboxes
reports 189
import utility 94 to 99
imported file
format 98
importing
subscriber information 94
inbound ports
configuring 230 to 232
initialized mailboxes
reports 193
installation and configuration
global voicemail 282
IP messaging 237
capabilities 19
configuring
TTS adapter support 384
data
backing up 53
restoring 55
scheduling backups 55
determining operational state 49
main menu options 41
multi-site configurations 23
provisioning
interface, accessing 38
interface, main menu 41
options 24
restarting 51
shutting down 50
single office configurations 22
SIP, using 20
viewing
system alarms 238
system status 237
IP Messaging service
Index
monitoring log files 69
IP telephony and messaging configuration 20
K
keep-alive messages
TTS 375
key button
descriptions, auto attendant 251
options, auto attendant 251
L
line groups
configuration 232 to 234
screen, field descriptions 234
local messaging configuration 21
local office administration 283
local servers
global voicemail
adding 285
deleting 286
editing 285
localhost_access_log
monitoring 69
locking/unlocking columns
call reports utility 371
logging in
web provisioning 296
M
mailbox
aliasing 110
centralizing by subscriber profile 134
changing passwords 316
creating (web interface) 311 to 312
creating an alias 104
deleting (web interface) 314 to 315
delivery options (web interface) 342
editing, web interface 316 to 344
entry screen
button descriptions 94
options 2
subscriber profile 132 to ??
preferences
web interface 317
setting
password 104
setting preferences (web interface) 339
mailbox entry screen
subscriber profile 93
mailbox options 1
subscriber profile 127 to 130
mailbox options 2
COS 169
subscriber profile ?? to 134
mailbox options setup
COS 163 to 166
screen
COS, field descriptions 164
mailbox usage stats
reports 188
managing
log and CDR files 68
mapping keys
auto attendant 251
message
utility 44
window 34
message archival 58
creating an access number 229 to 230
deleting an access number 230
implementing 59
retrieving 60
message delivery options
COS 154
field descriptions 154 to 156
message information
viewing (web interface) 319
message notification
configuring 159 to 161
message on demand
enabling for TUI 129
message profile
call bridging option 167
configuring for a COS 162 to 171
delivery reports option 167
personal address book option 165
message time reports screen
field descriptions 186
message time stats
reports 185
messages
forwarding to an e-mail account 143
forwarding to an e-mail account (web
interface) 344
setting
delivery options 100
MOH
legal disclaimer 224
MOH and announcement access numbers
configuring (web interface) 306
multi-site
global messaging configuration 22
local messaging configuration 21
systems 21
391
392
INDEX
music on hold
configuring 224
legal disclaimer 224
MWI
configuration 234 to ??
configuration screen, field descriptions 235
N
navigation pane display options
call reports utility 362
network
menu 39
time protocol 64
notification
overview (web interface) 328
notification filter
creating (web interface) 329
notification procedure
creating (web interface) 330
for FMFM
defining 114
notification schedule
creating (web interface) 334
setting for FMFM 120
NPA subscribers
reports 181
NPA-NXX subscribers
reports 182
P
pager templates
configuring 239 to 242
screen, field descriptions 241
passwords
changing 48
changing for a mailbox 316
forgotten (web inteface) 308
setting for a mailbox 104
VCX 48
perm button
administrator profile 81
permission levels
provisioning 158
setting for subscribers 203
settings 158
personal address book
adding entries to a subscriber distribution
list 272
configuring entries 131
enabling for a COS 165
web interface 319 to 321
pilot number
configuring 222
platform
architecture 20
configurations 22
port configuration screen
field descriptions 231
port usage statistics reports screen
field descriptions 187
port usage stats
filename format 187
reports 186
ports
inbound, configuring 230 to 232
printer configuration 385
process monitor utility 42
attaching to 42
screen options 43
profiles
company 198
subscriber 85, 173, 311
purging CDRs
call reports utility 365
R
recording a voice file 259
regional offices
with branches 21
without branches 22
report grids
call reports utility 370
reports
accessing 176
administrators 185
all classes of service 183
all subscribers 180
call bridging options, call monitor 138
call processing by mbx 191
call processing by port 192
disk usage by mailbox 188
failed login attempts 195
ID class of service 184
idle/active mailboxes 189
initialized mailboxes 193
mailbox
usage stats 188
message time stats 185
NPA subscribers 181
NPA-NXX subscribers 182
port usage stats 186
scheduling 178 to 179
subscribers by company or division 182
Index
system information 196
restore
IP messaging data 55
resynchronizing
databases 67
file system 68
retrieval tab
call reports utility 364
S
scheduled greetings
web interface 327
scp command 63
scripts menu 38, 42
send user groups
adding
companies 211
subscribers 212
deleting subscribers 213
overview 209
provisioning 211
server synchronization, verifying 67
setting parameters
subscriber profile 124
sharing a mailbox 108, 110
single-site
client-server configuration 21
IP telephony and messaging configuration 20
systems 20
SNMP 25
sorting columns
call reports utility 371
Speechify software 374
ssh command 63
status bar
call reports utility 371
subnodes, creating
auto attendant 259
subscriber distribution lists 267 to 275
adding
class of service 275
companies 275
e-mail addresses 272
lists 271
personal address book entries 272
phone numbers 270
subscribers 270
VPIM destinations 271
address book option 273
creating 268 to 270
web interface 324
deleting
entries 272
web interface 326
editing
entries 272
importing distribution list entries 275
screen, field descriptions 269
subscriber information
exporting 99
importing 94
subscriber permission levels
setting 203
subscriber profile 85
alias
merging mailboxes 107
screen, field descriptions 106
sharing mailboxes 108
call bridging option 136
changing the voice prompt language 88
configuring
alias 104
FMFM 111
personal address book entries 131
creating 85, 311
deleting 146
delivery options screen, field
descriptions 101 to 102
delivery reports option 136
e-mail configuration, external 141
field descriptions 87 to 92
imported file, supported headings 95 to 97
mailbox
entry screen 93
options 1 127 to 130
options 2 132 to 134
modifying 93
setting
message delivery options 100
password 104
profile parameters 124
subscriber profiles
updating through a COS 173
subscriber records
screen, button descriptions 157
updating 156
subscribers by company or division
reports 182
SUG
see send user groups
synchronization
external e-mail 323
synchronizing
databases 67
file systems 68
393
394
INDEX
servers 67
time 64
with scp and ssh commands 63
system
alarms
viewing 238
configuration
(web interface) 303
button descriptions 217
configuring additional servers 219
managing access numbers 221
screen, field descriptions 216
types of servers 220
viewing 216
distribution lists 267
creating 276
overview 276
information
reports 196
startup
automatic 48
manual 48
status
screen, field descriptions 237
viewing 237
systems
multi-site 21
single-site 20
T
tab-delimited text file
imported file, format 98
time synchronization 64
time zones
configuring 242
toggle on/off preferences
web interface 339
Tomcat
monitoring log files 69
traps 25
TTS
adding with VCX reconfiguration 384
automatic license activation 381
configuring the adapter 377
enabling 376
installation requirements 375
installing
adapter 377
engine 376
voice 376
keep-alive messages 375
manual license activation 381
overview 374
Speechify software 374
starting the service 380
supported codecs 374
TTS adapter 374
configuring 377
uninstalling 384
TTS engine 374
TTS voice 374
U
ums_cbipi.log
monitoring 69
users, intended 15
utilities menu 37
V
vcx-reconfigure script 48
verifying
database synchronization 67
file system synchronization 68
server synchronization 67
virtual calling card
enabling, web interface 338
Vmail only field 324
voice and local channels
viewing 33
voice file
converting 226 to 228
recording for auto attendant 259
voice mail
configuring the access number 222
voice messages
forwarding to an e-mail account 143
forwarding to an e-mail account (web
interface) 344
voice prompt language
changing 88
voice prompts
overview 74
voicemail access number
configuring, web interface 305
VPIM 291
configuring 292
configuring (web interface) 301 to 303
overview 291
W
web provisioning
enabling global voicemail 288
family mailboxes 340
logging in 296
Download PDF
Similar pages